WO2023083184A1 - Desktop management method, graphical user interface, and electronic device - Google Patents

Desktop management method, graphical user interface, and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023083184A1
WO2023083184A1 PCT/CN2022/130644 CN2022130644W WO2023083184A1 WO 2023083184 A1 WO2023083184 A1 WO 2023083184A1 CN 2022130644 W CN2022130644 W CN 2022130644W WO 2023083184 A1 WO2023083184 A1 WO 2023083184A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
desktop
electronic device
dock
components
page
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/130644
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
沃发财
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023083184A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023083184A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/04817Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance using icons
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04847Interaction techniques to control parameter settings, e.g. interaction with sliders or dials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/0486Drag-and-drop
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/451Execution arrangements for user interfaces

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal technology, in particular to a desktop management method, a graphical user interface and electronic equipment.
  • the desktop of the electronic device carries a large number of desktop components such as APP icons, small tools (widgets), and service cards. This makes the user need to spend a lot of time looking for a desktop component from the numerous desktop components on the desktop.
  • the application provides a desktop management method, a graphical user interface and an electronic device.
  • Electronic devices can create desk space.
  • Desktop components in different scenarios may be displayed on the desktops of different desktop spaces.
  • Users can view desktop components contained in different desktop spaces by switching desktop spaces. This can simplify desktop content, help users quickly find desktop components in a scene, and help users focus on a scene.
  • the present application provides a desktop management method.
  • the method can be applied to electronic devices.
  • the electronic device may include a first desktop page, a first dock, and a second dock for displaying desktop components.
  • the first dock may contain X desktop components.
  • the second dock can contain M desktop components, and both X and M are positive integers.
  • the electronic device may display the first desktop page and the first dock on the screen, and X desktop components are displayed on the first dock.
  • the electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first dock.
  • the above-mentioned first operation can be used to switch the dock displayed on the screen.
  • the electronic device may display the second dock on the screen. There are M desktop components displayed in the second dock.
  • the above-mentioned first operation may include a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the above-mentioned first dock is located.
  • the aforementioned switching of the docks displayed on the screen may include: switching from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the logo indicating the first dock and the second dock on the screen, switching from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the second dock on the screen One dock and second dock, switch from showing the first dock on the screen to only showing the second dock on the screen.
  • a seventh dock is displayed on the screen.
  • the aforementioned switching of docks displayed on the screen may further include: switching from displaying the seventh dock and the first dock on the screen to displaying the first dock and the second dock on the screen.
  • a desktop space may include a dock. Users can switch desktop spaces by switching the dock displayed on the screen.
  • the first dock corresponds to the first desktop space.
  • the second dock corresponds to the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device may switch the dock displayed on the screen to the second dock.
  • the desktop space where the electronic device is located is also switched from the first desktop space to the second desktop space.
  • the desktop page of a desktop space can display the desktop components contained in this desktop space (for example, a desktop space can contain desktop components in a scene). Then, the user can view desktop components in different scenarios by switching between different desktop spaces.
  • the user can place a desktop component in a scene in a desktop space, and place the desktop component in this scene in the dock included in the desktop space.
  • the above-mentioned user operation of switching the desktop space is relatively simple. Users can quickly switch between different desktop spaces, so as to quickly find a desktop component in a scene corresponding to a desktop space.
  • the above method can simplify the content presented on the desktop, help the user focus on the scene corresponding to one desktop space, and reduce the situation that applications in other desktop spaces interrupt the user's focus on the scene corresponding to this desktop space.
  • a desktop space can also contain multiple docks.
  • the electronic device may continue to display the first desktop page. That is to say, when the dock displayed on the screen is switched, the desktop page displayed on the screen may not change.
  • the electronic device may display on a screen an identifier for indicating the first dock.
  • the electronic device may cancel displaying the above-mentioned first dock.
  • the above identifier of the first dock may be used to indicate the existence of the first dock. That is to say, when there are multiple docks, the electronic device can display one dock on the screen. All desktop components included in this dock can be displayed in this dock.
  • the electronic device can display the logos of other docks other than the dock on the screen.
  • the electronic device in response to the above first operation, may continue to display the above first dock.
  • Y desktop components are displayed in the first dock. Y is less than or equal to X.
  • the electronic device may switch from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the first dock and the second dock on the screen.
  • the above Y desktop components are displayed in the first dock.
  • multiple docks can be displayed on the screen of the electronic device at the same time. All the desktop components contained in each of the above multiple docks can be displayed. Alternatively, all of the desktop components included in each of the above multiple docks may be displayed in a part of the docks, and part of the desktop components included in each of the docks may be displayed in another part of the docks.
  • the electronic device may switch from displaying the above-mentioned multiple docks on the screen to displaying the above-mentioned second dock and one or more docks among the above-mentioned multiple docks on the screen. After the above switching operation, one or more of the above multiple docks displayed on the screen may display all or part of the desktop components contained in each of them.
  • a seventh dock is also displayed on the screen of the electronic device.
  • the seventh dock displays X1 desktop components included in the seventh dock.
  • X1 is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device may switch from displaying the seventh dock and the first dock on the screen to displaying the above-mentioned first dock and the above-mentioned second dock on the screen.
  • the above Y desktop components can be displayed in the first dock.
  • the electronic device may cancel displaying the first dock on the screen. Wherein, the electronic device may not display the logo indicating the first dock. This can reduce the distraction of the user's attention by the first dock when switching to the second dock, and help the user better focus on the scene corresponding to the desktop space to which the second dock belongs.
  • the electronic device enters the desktop editing state, and displays the second dock in the desktop editing state.
  • the second dock may include a first area and a second area, the first area may be used to display M desktop components added to the second dock, and the second area may be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  • the electronic device may also display the first dock in different regions.
  • the first dock may include a third area and a fourth area.
  • a third area can be used to display the X number of desktop components that have been added to the first dock.
  • the fourth area can be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  • the desktop components recommended by the electronic device in different docks may be different.
  • the electronic device may only display the second dock by area, and not display the first dock by area. That is to say, when the first dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device may display X desktop components included in the first dock in the first dock.
  • the electronic device when creating a new dock, can enter a desktop editing state and display the newly created dock.
  • the first area in the second dock may be empty. That is, no desktop components have been added to the second dock.
  • the second area in the second dock can be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  • the above-mentioned desktop components in the second area can facilitate users to quickly add desktop components in the second dock. If the desktop component to be added by the user is located in the second area, the user does not need to search for the desktop component on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device may recommend one or more desktop components in a dock according to the usage habits of the user in using the desktop components.
  • the following specifically introduces the manner in which the electronic device determines the recommended desktop component.
  • the electronic device divides the used desktop components in the first period of time into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include the following One or more: time of use, place of use.
  • the above-mentioned first time period may be, for example, one day, two days, one week and other time periods.
  • the electronic device determines the degree of duplication of multiple desktop component packages according to the added desktop components in the dock contained in the electronic device. , the more repetitive a desktop component package is.
  • the electronic device determines the usage rates of multiple desktop component packages according to the usage time of the desktop components, and the longer the usage time of the desktop components included in a desktop component package, the higher the usage rate of a desktop component package.
  • the usage duration of the desktop components included in one desktop component package may be, the total usage duration of the desktop components included in this desktop component package.
  • the usage duration of the desktop components included in a desktop component package may be an average usage duration of the desktop components included in the desktop component package.
  • the electronic device may determine the first desktop component package whose repetition degree is lower than the first repetition degree threshold and has the highest usage rate among the plurality of desktop component packages as one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  • the one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device may be one or more desktop components included in the first desktop component package.
  • the electronic device can calculate the degree of repetition according to the added desktop components in the dock included in the electronic device. This can reduce the situation of repeated recommendation when recommending desktop components, and the situation that the recommended desktop components belong to the scene corresponding to the established desktop space to which the dock belongs.
  • the above method can determine the desktop component recommended by the electronic device according to user habits such as multiple desktop components that the user often uses together, and the above-mentioned recommended desktop component is likely to be a desktop component that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for desktop components in the desktop page and drag the desktop components to the dock, help users quickly add desktop components to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
  • the one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device may be the one or more desktop components that have been used for the longest time or used the most times on the first desktop page.
  • the electronic device receives the second operation.
  • the above-mentioned second operation can be used to switch the desktop page displayed on the screen.
  • the electronic device may switch the first desktop page displayed on the screen to the second desktop page.
  • the electronic device may update the desktop components displayed in the second area to one or more desktop components that have been used the longest or used the most times on the second desktop page.
  • the electronic device can determine the recommended desktop component according to the usage time or the number of usage times of the desktop component on the desktop page currently displayed on the screen. If the desktop page currently displayed on the screen changes, the electronic device may update recommended desktop components according to the desktop page displayed on the screen after the change.
  • the electronic device receives the third operation.
  • the above third operation may be used to add the first desktop component on the second dock, and the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen.
  • the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the second dock.
  • the electronic device when creating a new dock, may not enter the desktop editing state.
  • the electronic device may display the newly created dock on the desktop.
  • the second dock may be empty when the second dock is newly created. That is, no desktop components have been added to the second dock.
  • the electronic device In response to the operation of dragging the desktop component on the desktop page to the second dock, the electronic device may display the desktop component dragged to the second dock in the second dock. In this way, the user can quickly add the desktop components on the desktop page to the second dock, without first entering the desktop editing state, and then adding the desktop components in the second dock.
  • the electronic device when receiving the above-mentioned third operation, the electronic device may be in the desktop editing state, and respond to the above-mentioned third operation to add the first desktop component in the second dock.
  • the electronic device when receiving the above third operation, may not be in the desktop editing state, and respond to the above third operation to add the first desktop component in the second dock.
  • the electronic device receives a fourth operation.
  • the above fourth operation may be used to add a first desktop component in the first area, and the first desktop component is a desktop component displayed in the second area.
  • the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area, and cancels displaying the first desktop component in the second area.
  • the electronic device receives the fifth operation.
  • the above fifth operation may be used to add a first desktop component in the first area, the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen, and the first desktop component is not displayed in the second area.
  • the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area.
  • the electronic device can display one or more recommended desktop components in the second area of the second dock.
  • the user can either add the desktop component recommended by the electronic device to the second dock, or add the desktop component on the desktop page to the second dock.
  • the electronic device in response to the user adding the first desktop component in the first area, updates one or more desktop components displayed in the second area according to the first desktop component.
  • the electronic device divides the desktop components used within the second time period into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include the following One or more: time of use, place of use.
  • the electronic device determines a second desktop component package including the first desktop component among the plurality of desktop component packages. Wherein, when only one desktop component package contains the first desktop component, the electronic device determines that the desktop component package containing the first desktop component is the second desktop component package; when multiple desktop component packages contain the first desktop component, the electronic device determines The desktop component package with the longest usage time of the first desktop component is the second desktop component package.
  • the electronic device displays one or more desktop components in the second desktop component package except the first desktop component in the second area.
  • the electronic device can update the desktop component recommended by the electronic device in the second dock according to the desktop component added in the second dock.
  • the electronic device updating the recommended desktop component according to the desktop component added by the user can increase the probability that the desktop component recommended by the electronic device is the desktop component that the user wants to add to the second dock.
  • the user can directly add the desktop component that needs to be added to the second dock from the recommended desktop components, without looking for the desktop component that needs to be added among the many desktop components displayed on the desktop page. This can help users add desktop components to the second dock more quickly.
  • the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain the desktop components added in the dock already established in the electronic device. For example, after the above-mentioned first desktop component is added to the second dock, the electronic device may cancel displaying the first desktop component on the desktop page.
  • the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain all the desktop components included in the first dock.
  • the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain all the desktop components included in the second dock.
  • the first desktop space to which the first dock belongs includes a first group of desktop pages, and one or more desktop pages included in the first group of desktop pages are used to place desktops included in the first desktop space Components, the first group of desktop pages contains the first desktop page, the second desktop space to which the second dock belongs contains the second group of desktop pages, and one or more desktop pages contained in the second group of desktop pages are used to place the second desktop space contains desktop components.
  • the electronic device may switch the first desktop page displayed on the screen to a third desktop page, the third desktop page being one desktop page in the second group of desktop pages.
  • a desktop space can contain a dock and one or more desktop pages.
  • the desktop space can be switched accordingly.
  • the electronic device may switch the desktop page from the desktop page contained in the first desktop space to the desktop page contained in the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device when the second dock is displayed on the screen, the electronic device receives a sixth operation.
  • the electronic device enters the desktop editing state, and displays the second dock and Q desktop components, wherein, the desktop components contained in the second desktop space are displayed in the first display style, and the desktop components not contained in the second desktop space are displayed in the
  • the second display style shows that Q is a positive integer.
  • the above-mentioned first display style may be a display style that is not removed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned second display style may be the display style removed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the case where the second dock is displayed on the above screen is the case where the electronic device is in the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop components contained in the electronic device on the desktop page.
  • the aforementioned desktop components displayed on the desktop page may include desktop components included in the second desktop space, or include desktop components not included in the second desktop space.
  • the user can operate the desktop components included in the second desktop space, and remove the desktop components from the second desktop space.
  • the user can operate the desktop components not included in the second desktop space, and add desktop components to the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device when the second dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device receives a seventh operation.
  • the electronic device displays the first dock and P desktop components in the desktop editing state, wherein the desktop components contained in the first desktop space are displayed in the first display style, and the desktop components not contained in the first desktop space are displayed in the first display style.
  • Two display styles display, P is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device may switch from the second desktop space to the first desktop space according to the seventh operation.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop components contained in the electronic device on the desktop page.
  • the aforementioned desktop components displayed on the desktop page may include desktop components included in the first desktop space, or include desktop components not included in the first desktop space.
  • the user can operate the desktop components included in the first desktop space, and remove the desktop components from the first desktop space.
  • the user can operate desktop components not included in the first desktop space, and add desktop components to the first desktop space.
  • the aforementioned Q desktop components may be all desktop components included in the electronic device.
  • the Q desktop components may be part of the desktop components included in the electronic device, for example, desktop components whose use time exceeds a preset threshold, or desktop components whose use times exceed a preset threshold.
  • the above P desktop components may also be all desktop components included in the electronic device.
  • the P desktop components may be some desktop components included in the electronic device, for example, desktop components whose use time exceeds a preset threshold, or desktop components whose use times exceed a preset threshold.
  • the aforementioned Q desktop components may be the same as the aforementioned P desktop components.
  • the electronic device when the second dock is displayed, the electronic device receives the first message of the second desktop component and the second message of the third desktop component.
  • the second desktop space contains the second desktop component and does not contain the third desktop component.
  • the electronic device displays the first message and does not display the second message.
  • the electronic device may display the above-mentioned second message.
  • the electronic device receives an eighth operation, and the eighth operation is used to delete the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device deletes the second dock and the second group of desktop pages.
  • the second desktop space includes a fourth desktop component.
  • the electronic device displays the fourth desktop component on the desktop page in the above-mentioned first display style in the desktop editing state.
  • the electronic device receives an operation on the fourth desktop component.
  • the operation on the fourth desktop component can be used to remove the fourth desktop component from the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device may switch the display style of the fourth desktop component from the first display style to the second display style on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop components included in the second desktop space.
  • the desktop page contained in the second desktop space does not contain the above-mentioned fourth desktop component. That is, the fourth desktop component is removed from the second desktop space.
  • the second desktop space does not include the fifth desktop component.
  • the electronic device displays the fifth desktop component in the second display style on the desktop page in the desktop editing state.
  • the electronic device receives an operation on the fifth desktop component.
  • the manipulation of the fifth desktop component can be used to add the fifth desktop component to the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device may switch the display style of the fifth desktop component from the second display style to the first display style on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop components included in the second desktop space.
  • the desktop page included in the second desktop space includes the above-mentioned fifth desktop component. That is, a fifth desktop component is added to the second desktop space.
  • the second desktop space includes the desktop pageB1.
  • the electronic device receives an operation on the desktop pageB1.
  • the operation on the desktop pageB1 is used to remove the desktop pageB1 from the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device may display all desktop components on the desktop pageB1 in the above-mentioned second display style in the desktop editing state.
  • the electronic device may display a desktop page included in the second desktop space.
  • the above-mentioned desktop page B1 is not included in the desktop pages included in the second desktop space. That is, the desktop pageB1 is removed from the second desktop space.
  • the second desktop space does not include the desktop pageB2.
  • the electronic device receives the operation on the desktop pageB2.
  • the operation on the desktop pageB2 is used to add the desktop pageB2 to the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device may display all desktop components on the desktop pageB2 in the desktop editing state in the above-mentioned first display style.
  • the electronic device may display a desktop page included in the second desktop space.
  • the desktop page included in the second desktop space includes the above-mentioned desktop page B2. That is, the desktop pageB2 is added to the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device receives a ninth operation, and the ninth operation is used to create a third dock and a third desktop space to which the third dock belongs.
  • the electronic device displays a third dock and W desktop components, and Y desktop components are displayed on the third dock.
  • the electronic device receives the tenth operation, and in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays Z desktop components related to Y desktop components among the O desktop components in a third display style, and the above-mentioned W, the above-mentioned Y, the above-mentioned O, and the above-mentioned Z are all is a positive integer.
  • the above-mentioned ninth operation for creating a third dock may specifically mean that the electronic device creates a blank dock, and adds the above-mentioned Y desktop components to the blank dock.
  • the dock added with the above Y desktop components is the above third dock.
  • the above W desktop components may be desktop components displayed on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device may also display other desktop components in the O desktop components except the Z desktop components in the fourth display style.
  • the foregoing third display style may be a display style that is not removed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the foregoing fourth display style may be a display style removed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Y desktop components specifically including: being the same or similar to one or more desktop components in the Y desktop components.
  • the categories of the two desktop components are similar may include, and the categories of the two desktop components have an inclusion relationship. Categories with containment management can indicate that a category contains another category. For example, the Entertainment category contains the Music category. Then, the entertainment category has a containment relationship with the music category.
  • the category of the two desktop components being similar may also include that the categories of the two desktop components are categories that can assist each other in a scene.
  • the aforementioned categories that can assist each other in a scenario may be represented in a usage scenario of desktop components of one category, and desktop components of another category may provide auxiliary functions.
  • the video category and the screen projection category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene. Wherein, when the user uses the desktop component of the video category to play a video, the user may need to use the desktop component of the screen projection category to project the played video to other display devices.
  • the above O desktop components may be all desktop components in the electronic device.
  • the above O desktop components may be all desktop components on the desktop pageA1.
  • the aforementioned desktop pageA1 may be the desktop page displayed on the screen when the electronic device receives the aforementioned tenth operation.
  • the electronic device after the electronic device displays the third dock and W desktop components in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device receives an operation of removing W1 desktop components from the third desktop space, and In the operation of adding W2 desktop components to the third desktop space, the electronic device may remove the aforementioned W1 desktop components from the third desktop space, and add the aforementioned W2 desktop components to the third desktop space. Then, in response to the above tenth operation, the electronic device displays Z desktop components related to Y desktop components among the O desktop components in a third display style.
  • the above-mentioned O desktop components may be all desktop components in the electronic device except the above-mentioned W1 desktop components and the above-mentioned W2 desktop components.
  • the above-mentioned O desktop components may be all desktop components on the desktop pageA1 except the above-mentioned W1 desktop components and the above-mentioned W2 desktop components.
  • the aforementioned desktop pageA1 may be the desktop page displayed on the screen when the electronic device receives the aforementioned tenth operation.
  • the electronic device when in a desktop space, can filter out desktop components for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, which have the same or similar category as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space.
  • the electronic device can retain the desktop components of the same or similar category as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that have the same category as the added desktop components in the dock of this desktop space Desktop components that are neither identical nor similar.
  • the above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
  • the electronic device when in the second desktop space, receives the eleventh operation, and displays S desktop pages on the screen in response to the eleventh operation.
  • S desktop pages S1 desktop pages are included in the second desktop space, and S2 desktop pages are not included in the second desktop space.
  • S, S1 and S2 are all positive integers.
  • S is the sum of S1 and S2.
  • the electronic device receives an operation on the T1 desktop pages among the S1 desktop pages, and removes the T1 desktop pages from the second desktop space.
  • the electronic device receives an operation on the T2 desktop pages among the S2 desktop pages, and adds the T2 desktop pages to the second desktop space.
  • T1 is a positive integer smaller than S1.
  • the above T2 is a positive integer smaller than S2. Further, when the desktop editing state is exited, the electronic device may display the desktop page included in the second desktop space.
  • the desktop page included in the second desktop space does not include the above T1 desktop components, but includes the above T2 desktop components.
  • the above S desktop pages may be all desktop pages included in the electronic device.
  • the electronic device when exiting the desktop editing state, can adjust the positions of the desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages.
  • the desktop components included in the second desktop space are displayed one by one on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages in order of positions from left to right and from top to bottom. There is no space between any two adjacent desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages.
  • the electronic device when exiting the desktop editing state, can adjust the positions of the desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages.
  • the desktop components included in the second desktop space and displayed on the fourth desktop page are displayed one by one on the fourth desktop page according to the order of positions from left to right and from top to bottom. There is no space between any two adjacent desktop components on the fourth desktop page.
  • the fourth desktop page is any desktop page in the second group of desktop pages.
  • the electronic device can adjust the positions of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page. After the desktop components in a desktop space are removed or added, the above adjustments to the positions of the desktop components can make the layout of the desktop components on the desktop page more compact. In this way, the user does not need to sort manually, and arranges the scattered desktop components on a desktop page compactly and neatly.
  • the electronic device displays a fourth dock on the screen, and the fourth dock displays recently used desktop components.
  • the above recently used desktop components may specifically include: when all desktop components added in the first dock are displayed on the screen, the recently used desktop components are the first desktop to which the first dock belongs The L1 desktop components with the latest opening time in the space, or the L2 desktop components opened by the electronic device within the third time period, both L1 and L2 are positive integers. Or, when all desktop components added in the second dock are displayed on the screen, the most recently used desktop components are the L3 desktop components with the latest opening time in the second desktop space, or the electronic device is opened within the fourth time period L4 desktop components, L3 and L4 are both positive integers.
  • the above-mentioned recently used desktop components are determined according to the desktop components included in the desktop space to which the fifth dock belongs.
  • the desktop space to which the fifth dock belongs is the desktop space where the electronic device is located. Further, the electronic device switches the desktop space where the fifth dock belongs to the desktop space to which the sixth dock belongs.
  • the electronic device may update the most recently used desktop components displayed in the fourth dock. The recently used desktop component after the update may be determined according to the desktop component included in the desktop space to which the sixth dock belongs.
  • the user can quickly find and open the recently used desktop component in the desktop space through the dock where the recently used desktop component is placed in the desktop space. This can help users focus on one scene and reduce the interference of desktop components in other scenes to users.
  • the electronic device receives the twelfth operation.
  • the twelfth operation is used to project the second desktop space to the display device.
  • the electronic device may send the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space to the display device.
  • the display device may display the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space (such as the second dock included in the second desktop space and a desktop page in the second group of desktop pages).
  • the electronic device when the electronic device projects the second desktop space to the display device, the electronic device receives a thirteenth operation. In response to the thirteenth operation, the electronic device may switch the desktop space it is in from the second desktop space to the first desktop space. The electronic device may display the first dock included in the first desktop space and one desktop page in the first group of desktop pages. Wherein, the display device still displays the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space.
  • the user can create multiple desktop spaces in the electronic device.
  • Each desktop space can contain desktop components in different scenarios.
  • the user can select the desktop space to be cast when casting the screen.
  • the desktop space in the electronic device that is not selected for screen projection will not be projected to other display devices. This can meet the requirement that the user does not want to cast relatively private content in the electronic device on other display devices during the screen casting process.
  • the user can freely switch between the screened desktop space and the non-projected desktop space in the electronic device, and there is no need to worry about displaying content that is not convenient for the screen projection on the non-projected desktop space on other display devices.
  • the electronic device receives the thirteenth operation, and sets the attribute value of the second desktop space as the first attribute value.
  • the above attributes may include one or more of the following: name, wallpaper, off-screen display status, and theme.
  • the electronic device can display the attributes of the second desktop space on the screen according to the above-mentioned first attribute value.
  • the user can manually set attributes such as the name, wallpaper, AOD status, and theme of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device may present the attributes of the desktop space on the desktop.
  • Different desktop spaces can have different properties. In this way, different desktop spaces can bring different visual effects to users. Users can more clearly perceive the differences between different desktop spaces, as well as the effect after switching desktop spaces.
  • the electronic device may display the dock and the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space on the screen.
  • the above fourth desktop space may include all desktop components of the electronic device. All desktop components of the electronic device can be displayed on the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space.
  • the desktop page contained in the fourth desktop space may display desktop components among all desktop components of the electronic device except the desktop components displayed in the dock contained in the fourth desktop space.
  • the electronic device receives a fourteenth operation. The fourteenth operation may be used to download the sixth desktop component. In response to the tenth operation, the electronic device may download the sixth desktop component, and display the sixth desktop component on the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space.
  • the present application provides a graphical user interface (GUI).
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • the graphical user interface is stored in an electronic device that includes a touch screen, memory, and one or more processors operable to execute one or more computer programs stored in the memory.
  • the graphical user interface may include: a first GUI displayed on the touch screen, the first GUI includes a first desktop page and a first dock, and X desktop components are displayed in the first dock.
  • a second GUI is displayed on the touch screen, the first operation is used to switch the dock displayed on the touch screen, the second GUI includes the second dock, and M desktop components are displayed in the second dock.
  • the present application provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes: a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors.
  • Memory can be used to store computer programs.
  • the above-mentioned one or more processors may be used to call a computer program, so that the above-mentioned electronic device executes any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium including instructions.
  • the electronic device is made to execute any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product.
  • the above-mentioned computer program product comprises computer instructions.
  • the electronic device is made to execute any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to an electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processor is used to invoke computer instructions to make the electronic device perform any possible Implementation.
  • the electronic device provided in the third aspect, the computer-readable storage medium provided in the fourth aspect, the computer program product provided in the fifth aspect, and the chip provided in the sixth aspect are all used to execute the method. Therefore, the beneficial effects that it can achieve can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1B is a software structural block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 2A to 2H are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 creating desktop spaces according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • 3A to 3D are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 creating desktop spaces according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4C are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 switching desktop spaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a desktop of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6A to 6E are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 recommending desktop components in the dock according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7A is a flow chart of a method for recommending an APP icon by an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 7B is a recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7C is another recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 recommending desktop components in the dock according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIGS. 9A to 9F are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • 10A to 10D are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • 12A to 12C are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13C is a flow chart of a method for adjusting desktop components in a desktop space by the electronic device 100 according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 13D is a flow chart of a method for determining a desktop component in a desktop component group that belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock of a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • 14A to 14F are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 adjusting the positions of desktop components on the desktop page according to the embodiments of the present application;
  • 15A to 15D are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 projecting a desktop space to the display device 200 according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • 16A to 16G are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 modifying the wallpaper of the desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B are schematic diagrams of a scene where the electronic device 100 deletes a desktop space according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • GUI graphics user interface
  • the GUI refers to a user interface related to computer operations displayed in a graphical manner, and may be an icon, window, control, and other interface elements displayed on a display screen of an electronic device.
  • the above controls may include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface elements.
  • a desktop in an electronic device is a user interface that users often use.
  • the desktop may also be referred to as a home screen interface, a main interface, and the like.
  • Desktop components such as APP icons, widgets, and service cards can be displayed on the desktop.
  • the aforementioned desktop component may refer to a GUI application program, which may be used to provide quick access to visual information and/or functions.
  • a calendar widget can display the user's schedule.
  • APP icons such as a camera application icon and a contact application icon may be used to provide a quick entry for opening a corresponding APP.
  • the electronic device may return to the desktop of the electronic device in response to the home screen key.
  • the above-mentioned home screen key may also be called a home key or the like.
  • the electronic device can create multiple desktop pages.
  • a desktop page can be used to place multiple app icons, widgets, service cards and other desktop components.
  • a desktop component can be moved from one desktop page to another desktop page.
  • the user can move multiple desktop components in the same scene, or multiple desktop components that are often used together, to a desktop page.
  • one or more desktop components in a learning scene are placed in a desktop page.
  • One or more desktop components under the motion scene are placed in another desktop page.
  • Multiple desktop components in the entertainment scene are placed in a desktop page.
  • the user can switch between different desktop pages by swiping left and right, so as to find applications in different scenarios.
  • the above method can help users classify desktop components according to different usage scenarios, and the user operations of creating scenarios and switching scenarios are relatively simple.
  • the user operations of creating scenarios and switching scenarios are relatively simple.
  • the above method is also difficult to help the user focus on one scene. For example, when the user wants to focus on the learning scene, the user can easily view the desktop page including the desktop components in other scenes by using the electronic device.
  • the electronic device can create multiple desktop folders.
  • a desktop folder can contain multiple APP icons.
  • Desktop folders can be placed on the desktop page. Wherein, the user may first open the desktop folder, and then open the APP corresponding to the APP icon through the APP icon in the desktop folder. The user can move multiple APP icons in the same scene, or multiple APP icons that are often used together, to a desktop folder.
  • the above method can help users classify desktop components according to different usage scenarios, and the user operations of creating scenarios and switching scenarios are relatively simple.
  • the above method requires the user to first search for the desktop folder, and then find the APP icon he needs from among the multiple APP icons contained in the desktop folder.
  • the above method is also difficult to help the user focus on one scene.
  • the desktop of the electronic device may include an application dock.
  • the dock can be used to place one or more APP icons.
  • the dock can be fixed on the desktop (such as the bottom of the desktop).
  • the APP icon in the dock can be kept displayed when the desktop page is switched. Users can place their most frequently used APP icons in the dock. In this way, users can quickly find and open their most frequently used APPs through the dock.
  • the electronic device can hide one or more desktop pages.
  • the aforementioned hidden desktop page may be selected by the user. In this way, the user can select the electronic device to display only the desktop pages that need to be used in the current scene.
  • the above method requires the user to move the desktop component to be hidden to the hidden desktop page, and the user operation is cumbersome, which is inconvenient for the user to quickly switch between the desktop components that need to be used in different scenarios.
  • This application provides a desktop management method.
  • the electronic device can create different desktop spaces.
  • a desktop space can contain a dock.
  • One or more desktop components can be placed in a dock (for example, one or more desktop components in one scene). That is, the electronic device can create a new desktop space by creating a dock, and switch between different desktop spaces by switching different docks.
  • the electronic device may switch different docks in response to a preset user operation of switching docks (such as sliding to the left, sliding to the right, etc.).
  • a desktop space can contain one or more desktop components in a scene. Users can quickly switch to different desktop spaces, and quickly find the most commonly used desktop components in the corresponding scene of a desktop space through the dock in a desktop space.
  • a desktop space may also include one or more desktop pages.
  • the user can choose to place all the desktop components used in a scene, such as scene A, on the desktop page of a desktop space, and place the most frequently used desktop components in scene A on the dock of this desktop space. Then, this desktop space is the desktop space corresponding to scenario A.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop page of the one desktop space, and fully display the desktop components in the dock of the one desktop space.
  • the electronic device may display the desktop page and the dock included in the switched desktop space on the desktop.
  • the electronic device can display a desktop page and a dock of a desktop space in a period of time, and a desktop space can only include desktop components in one scene. This can simplify the content presented on the desktop, help the user focus on a scene corresponding to a desktop space, and reduce the situation that applications in other desktop spaces interrupt the user's focus on the scene corresponding to this desktop space.
  • the electronic device when in a desktop space, may only display message notifications of desktop components included in this desktop space. This can better help users focus on the scene corresponding to a desktop space.
  • the desktop management method provided in this application can be applied to the electronic device 100 .
  • Electronic device 100 may be equipped with Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems, such as mobile phones, tablet computers, smart watches, smart bracelets, etc., can also be laptop computers (Laptop) with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels, with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels.
  • Non-portable electronic devices such as desktop computers with control panels.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 1A schematically shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the illustration, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit, NPU
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other files in the external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
  • the electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also known as "touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal.
  • the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 1B schematically shows a software structural block diagram of the electronic device 100 .
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, which are respectively the application program layer, the application program framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer from top to bottom.
  • the application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
  • the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, short message, and desktop management applications.
  • applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, short message, and desktop management applications.
  • the above-mentioned desktop management application can be used to provide desktop management functions such as creating desktop spaces and switching desktop spaces.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, activity manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
  • prompting text information in the status bar issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
  • the activity manager is used to manage activities, and is responsible for the starting, switching, scheduling of each component in the system, and the management and scheduling of application programs.
  • the activity manager can be called by the upper application to open the corresponding activity.
  • the desktop management application may invoke an activity manager to open an activity related to creating a desktop space (such as an activity that makes the desktop enter an editing state, draws an activity for creating a desktop space activity of the user interface, etc.), providing users with the service of creating a desktop space.
  • an activity manager to open an activity related to creating a desktop space (such as an activity that makes the desktop enter an editing state, draws an activity for creating a desktop space activity of the user interface, etc.), providing users with the service of creating a desktop space.
  • the Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
  • the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
  • a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example.
  • the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer.
  • Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the following describes a scenario of creating a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2A to FIG. 2H exemplarily show some schematic diagrams of scenarios in which electronic devices 100 create desktop spaces.
  • Stage 1 ( Figure 2A ⁇ Figure 2C): Create a blank dock.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 210 .
  • the desktop 210 may include a status bar 211 , a desktop page 212 , a page indicator 213 and a dock 214 . in:
  • Status bar 211 may include one or more signal strength indicators for mobile communication signals (also may be referred to as cellular signals), one or more signal strength indicators for wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) signals, battery status indicator, time indicator, etc.
  • signal strength indicators for mobile communication signals also may be referred to as cellular signals
  • Wi-Fi wireless fidelity
  • the desktop page 212 may include desktop components such as widgets and APP icons.
  • the widgets in the desktop page 212 may include a time widget 212A, a weather widget 212B, and a calendar widget 212C.
  • the APP icons on the desktop page 212 may include a contact application icon 212D, a dial application icon 212E, an information application icon 212F, and an application store application icon 212G.
  • the page indicator 213 may indicate the positional relationship between the currently displayed desktop page (such as the desktop page 212 ) and other desktop pages. Through the page indicator 213, the user can know which desktop page is being browsed currently. Exemplarily, the page indicator 213 includes 5 indicators. Wherein, the display style of the leftmost indicator among the page indicators 213 may be different from that of the other four indicators. The leftmost indicator can be used to indicate the negative one screen of the electronic device 100 . The four indicators on the right side of the page indicator 213 can be used to indicate the desktop page containing desktop components such as APP icons.
  • the electronic device 100 displays a desktop page 212 on the desktop 210 .
  • the second indicator from left to right among the page indicators 213 is selected. That is, the second indicator from left to right among the page indicators 213 can be used to indicate the desktop page 212 .
  • the electronic device 100 may switch the desktop page presented on the desktop.
  • the indicator in the selected state changes with the switching of the desktop page.
  • Dock 214 may be used to house one or more desktop components, such as video application icon 214A, music application icon 214B, and AA video application icon 214C.
  • the dock 214 can be fixed on the bottom of the desktop 210 .
  • the desktop components in dock214 can keep displaying when the desktop page is switched.
  • the application dock can also be called the application tray, application navigation bar, and so on.
  • the desktop component placed in the application dock is an APP icon as an example for illustration.
  • desktop components such as widgets and service cards can also be placed in the application dock.
  • the desktop 210 may also display a navigation bar, such as using virtual keys for navigation.
  • the navigation bar may include a back (back) key, a main screen (home) key, and a recent task (recent) key.
  • the back key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the previous user interface.
  • the home key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the desktop.
  • the recent task key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display recently used applications.
  • the electronic device 100 may use gesture navigation. For example, a gesture of sliding inward on the left or right side of the screen of the electronic device 100 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the previous user interface.
  • a gesture of sliding up at the bottom of the screen of the electronic device 100 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the desktop.
  • a gesture of sliding up and stopping at the bottom of the screen of the electronic device 100 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display recently used applications.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the navigation manner in the electronic device.
  • the desktop 210 may also include more or less content, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the desktop 210 includes a dock, namely dock 214 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 shown in FIG. 2B on the desktop 210 .
  • the aforementioned add control 215 may be located on the right side of the dock 214 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 on the left side of the dock 214 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display position of the added control 215 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also display the above adding control 215 in response to other user operations for creating a desktop space. For example, it acts on the user operation of long-pressing the area where the dock is located.
  • the electronic device 100 may cancel the display of the adding control 215 on the desktop 210 when there is no user operation on the adding control 215 within a preset period of time. That is to say, if the user does not perform any user operation (such as a touch operation) on the added control 215 within the preset time period when the added control 215 is displayed on the desktop 210 , the added control 215 will disappear from the desktop 210 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the foregoing preset time period.
  • the aforementioned preset time period may be 3 seconds, 5 seconds and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2C .
  • the user interface 220 is the desktop 210 in an editable state. That is to say, the electronic device 100 may enter the desktop editing state in response to a user operation acting on the adding control 215 .
  • the user interface 220 may include a thumbnail desktop page 221, a thumbnail desktop page 222, a thumbnail desktop page 223, a page addition/removal component 224, an automatic selection component 225, a zoom component 226, a thumbnail page indicator 227, The thumbnail dock228, the dock to be edited229 and the scene setting component230. in:
  • the thumbnail desktop page 222 may be a thumbnail of the aforementioned desktop page 212 .
  • the desktop components included in the thumbnail desktop page 222 are thumbnails of the desktop components on the desktop page 212 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 221 may be a thumbnail of the desktop page on the left side of the desktop page 212 .
  • the desktop page on the left side of the desktop page 212 is negative one screen, and the thumbnail desktop page 221 may also be a page for adding a desktop page.
  • the thumbnail desktop page 223 may be a thumbnail of the desktop page on the right side of the desktop page 212 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 222 is completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 220 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 221 and the thumbnail desktop page 223 are partially displayed on both sides of the user interface 220 respectively. This may indicate that there are thumbnail desktop pages on the left and right sides of the thumbnail desktop page 222 .
  • the user can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 through a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located.
  • the page adding/removing component 224 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove a thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 222 ) completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 220 in a desktop space.
  • a thumbnail desktop page such as the thumbnail desktop page 222
  • the automatic selection component 225 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components completely displayed on the thumbnail desktop page in the middle of the user interface 220 .
  • the automatic selection component 225 may also be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components on all thumbnail desktop pages.
  • the zoom component 226 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display thumbnails of multiple complete desktop pages on a user interface, so that the user can quickly remove multiple desktop pages.
  • the scene setting component 230 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the arrangement order of the desktop components for setting the desktop space on the desktop page, the name of the desktop space, the wallpaper, the status of the always on display (AOD) and other properties of the desktop space. Set up components.
  • the user interface 220 may not include the four components of the page adding/removing component 224 , the automatic selection component 225 , the scaling component 226 , and the scene setting component 230 , or may contain one or more of these four components.
  • the thumbnail page indicator 227 may represent the positional relationship between the currently fully displayed thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 222 ) and other thumbnail desktop pages.
  • the thumbnail page indicator 227 includes 6 indicators.
  • the leftmost and rightmost indicators among the thumbnail page indicators 227 present a display style of "+".
  • the thumbnail desktop pages indicated by the two indicators may both be pages for adding desktop pages.
  • the four middle indicators among the thumbnail page indicators 227 may indicate thumbnails of desktop pages containing desktop components such as APP icons.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display style of the thumbnail page indicator 227 .
  • Thumbnail dock 228 may be a thumbnail image of dock 214 described above. Wherein, the dock 214 is a fully displayed application dock bar, and the APP icons placed in the dock 214 are fully presented on the desktop 210 .
  • the APP icons in the thumbnail dock 228 may be overlapped and displayed as shown in FIG. 2C .
  • each APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 can be displayed on different layers, and the APP icons on the upper layer can partially cover the APP icons on the lower layer.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the APP icon placed on the top layer in the thumbnail dock 228 .
  • the top APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 may be the thumbnail of the rightmost APP icon in the dock 214, that is, the thumbnail of the AA video application icon 214C.
  • the topmost APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 may be the thumbnail of the leftmost APP icon in the dock 214, that is, the thumbnail of the video application icon 214A.
  • the APP icons in the thumbnail dock 228 may also be fully presented on the user interface 220 .
  • the APP icon in the thumbnail dock228 is a thumbnail of the APP icon in the dock214.
  • the thumbnail image of an APP icon may be a reduced image of the APP icon. That is, the size of the thumbnail of an APP icon is slightly smaller than the size of the APP icon.
  • the electronic device 100 performs thumbnail processing on an APP icon to obtain a thumbnail image of the APP icon.
  • the dock 229 to be edited is a blank dock created by the electronic device 100 . As shown in FIG. 2C , no desktop component has been added to the dock 229 to be edited.
  • the user can add a desktop component in the dock 229 to be edited through a preset user operation (such as dragging a desktop component in the thumbnail desktop page to the dock 229 to be edited).
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2A . That is, the electronic device 100 has not completed the creation of the dock. It can be understood that after the user operations shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B , the electronic device 100 only creates a blank dock, and the creation of the dock has not been completed yet. In the case that a desktop component is added to the dock 229 to be edited, the dock is created.
  • Stage 2 add desktop components in the blank dock.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220, and display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2D. .
  • the electronic device 100 completely displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the user interface 220, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 222 on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 223, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 223. page231.
  • the selected indicator in the thumbnail page indicator 227 changes from the second indicator on the left side of the thumbnail page indicator 227 to the thumbnail page indicator 227 is the third indicator from the left.
  • the thumbnail desktop page 223 may contain thumbnails of multiple desktop components, such as the sports and health thumbnail icon 223A.
  • the fitness and fitness thumbnail icon 223A may be a thumbnail of a fitness and fitness application icon.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2E .
  • the dock 229 to be edited includes a sports health thumbnail icon 229A.
  • the fitness and fitness thumbnail icon 229A may be a thumbnail of a fitness and fitness application icon.
  • the electronic device 100 when a desktop component is added to a dock, the electronic device 100 can still place this desktop component on the desktop page. Wherein, in response to a user operation of dragging a desktop component to a dock, the electronic device 100 may copy the desktop component, and add the copied desktop component to the dock. Users can quickly find this desktop component by adding the dock with this desktop component. When the user browses other docks that do not contain this desktop component, the user can still find this desktop component on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may no longer place this desktop component on the desktop page.
  • the desktop page may not include the desktop component.
  • the desktop page can include this desktop component.
  • the desktop page may not contain the desktop component.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 and display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2F .
  • the electronic device 100 completely displays the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the user interface 220, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 231, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 231.
  • the selected indicator among the thumbnail page indicators 227 is the fourth indicator from the left of the thumbnail page indicator 227 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 231 may include multiple thumbnail images of desktop components, such as the AA motion thumbnail icon 231A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2G .
  • the dock 229 to be edited includes a sports health thumbnail icon 229A and an AA sports thumbnail icon 229B.
  • the AA Sports thumbnail icon 229B may be a thumbnail image of the AA Sports application icon.
  • the APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 is fully presented on the user interface 220 .
  • the electronic device 100 may add the video thumbnail icon in the dock 229 to be edited.
  • the aforementioned video thumbnail icon may be a thumbnail of the video application icon 214A.
  • the thumbnail dock 228 can still include the video thumbnail icon.
  • the video thumbnail icon in the thumbnail dock 228 is added to the dock 229 to be edited, the video thumbnail icon may not be included in the thumbnail dock 228.
  • the electronic device 100 may exit the desktop editing state and display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2H .
  • a user operation for exiting the desktop editing state such as a touch operation on the area where the desktop page is located
  • the electronic device 100 may exit the desktop editing state and display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2H .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operations for exiting the desktop editing state.
  • the above-mentioned user operation for exiting the desktop editing state may also be a user operation of spreading two fingers outward (that is, pressing two fingers, then separating the fingers, and then lifting them).
  • the desktop 210 may include a desktop page 218 , a page indicator 213 , a simplified dock 216 and a dock 217 . in:
  • the desktop page 218 may be a page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page 231 . That is, the thumbnail desktop page 231 is a thumbnail image of the desktop page 218 . It can be understood that when the desktop editing state is exited, the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 is the thumbnail desktop page 231 . Then, after exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the desktop 210 , that is, the desktop page 218 .
  • the desktop page 218 may include desktop components such as APP icons.
  • Simplified dock 216 may be a simplified display of dock 214 described above.
  • the aforementioned thumbnail dock 228 may also be a thumbnail image of the simplified dock 216 .
  • the APP icons in the simplified dock 216 may be overlapped and displayed as shown in FIG. 2H . Wherein, each APP icon in the simplified dock 216 can be displayed on different layers, and the APP icons on the upper layer can partially cover the APP icons on the lower layer.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the APP icon placed on the top layer in the simplified dock 216 .
  • the APP icon placed on the top layer in the simplified dock216 can be the rightmost APP icon in the dock214, that is, the AA video application icon.
  • the topmost APP icon in the simplified dock 216 may be the leftmost APP icon in the dock 214 , that is, the video application icon.
  • the dock217 is the dock created through the process shown in the above-mentioned Fig. 2A to Fig. 2F.
  • the dock contains APP icons added by users: sports and health application icon 217A and AA sports application icon 217B.
  • the display style of the APP icon in the dock may be the same as the display style of the APP icon in the desktop page.
  • the display style of the APP icon in the dock may also be different from the display style of the APP icon in the desktop page.
  • the size of the APP icon in the dock is slightly smaller than the size of the APP icon in the desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may only fully display one dock on the desktop 210, and simplify the display for other docks.
  • the above-mentioned simplified display of the simplified dock can not only save the display area of the desktop 210, so that the electronic device 100 can fully display the above-mentioned dock, but also remind the user of the existence of these simplified docks.
  • the electronic device 100 since the display area of the desktop 210 is limited, if there are multiple docks, the electronic device 100 may completely display only one dock on the desktop 210 . Other docks are not presented on the desktop 210 .
  • the electronic device 100 can fully display two or more docks on the desktop 210, and other incompletely displayed docks can be simplified and displayed on the desktop 210 or not presented on the desktop 210 .
  • the dock214 contains 3 APP icons.
  • Desktop 210 has enough display area to display dock 214 and dock 217 . Then, the electronic device 100 can completely display both the dock 214 and the dock 217 on the desktop 210 . In this way, the user can browse two docks or more docks at the same time.
  • the user can trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop 210 through a preset user operation (such as sliding the dock to the left or right), so as to browse Different docks.
  • a preset user operation such as sliding the dock to the left or right
  • the scenario in which the electronic device 100 switches the dock will be specifically described in subsequent embodiments. Let’s not start the introduction here.
  • a desktop space may include a dock.
  • the process of creating a dock shown in FIGS. 2A to 2H above is the process of creating a desktop space.
  • Users can place the icons of the most frequently used APPs in a scene in a dock.
  • This scene is the scene corresponding to the desktop space to which the dock belongs.
  • the dock 214 includes APP icons in entertainment scenarios such as videos and music.
  • the desktop space to which dock214 belongs is the entertainment desktop space.
  • Dock217 contains APP icons in sports scenes such as sports.
  • the desktop space to which dock217 belongs is the motion desktop space.
  • the above-mentioned user operation of creating a desktop space is relatively simple.
  • the user can quickly create different desktop spaces to divide the desktop components into scenes, and quickly find the most frequently used desktop components in the corresponding scene of the desktop space through the dock of the desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 can still display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2B without entering the desktop editing state.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a blank dock on the desktop 210 .
  • the add control 215 disappears from the desktop 210 , and a blank dock as described above can be displayed on the right side of the dock 214 .
  • the dock 214 may be completely displayed on the desktop 210 as shown in FIG. 2B .
  • the dock 214 can also be displayed in a simplified manner, and presented on the desktop 210 in the style of the simplified dock 216 shown in FIG. 2H .
  • the user can add desktop components on the desktop page (such as desktop page 212, desktop page 218, etc.) to the blank dock, thereby completing the creation of the desktop space.
  • the above-mentioned mode of adding the desktop component on the desktop page to the blank dock can be, for example, dragging the desktop component into the blank dock.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for adding the desktop component to the newly created dock.
  • the electronic device 100 may cancel the display of the blank dock on the desktop 210 when no desktop component is added to the blank dock within a preset period of time. That is to say, if the user triggers the electronic device 100 to display a blank dock through the user operation shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. The dock will disappear from the desktop 210.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the foregoing preset time period.
  • the aforementioned preset time period may be 15 seconds, 30 seconds and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may cancel displaying the blank dock on the desktop 210 .
  • dock217 already exists in the desktop shown in FIG. 2H.
  • the electronic device 100 can add the desktop component in the dock 217 .
  • the simplified dock 216 already exists in the desktop shown in FIG. 2H .
  • the electronic device 100 can add this desktop component in the simplified dock 216 .
  • the electronic device 100 may fully display the desktop components in the simplified dock 216, and present them on the desktop 210 in the style of the dock 214 shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the dock 214 may contain the above-mentioned added desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 can still display the simplified dock 216 in a simplified display style, and overlap and display the newly added desktop components with the existing desktop components in the simplified dock 216 .
  • a newly added desktop component can be placed on top of the simplified dock 216, partially covering other desktop components located below. In this way, the user can be sure that desktop components have been added to the simplified dock 216 .
  • the number of desktop components that can be placed in a dock is limited.
  • the user can add desktop components to the dock through the method in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the user can add the desktop components in the desktop page to the dock without triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state.
  • FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which other electronic devices 100 create a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 210 .
  • the desktop 210 For the content contained in the desktop 210, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 shown in FIG. 3B on the left side of the dock 214 .
  • the electronic device 100 may widen the add control 215 to display the add control 215A shown in FIG. 3C .
  • the above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located is continuous. That is, during the above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left, the user's hand does not leave the screen of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can continuously detect the user operation of sliding to the left on the screen.
  • the above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock214 is located may refer to: a user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock214 is located. It can be understood that the size of the area where the dock214 is located is limited, and during the process of sliding to the left, the scope of the user's operation may exceed the area where the dock is located. However, if the sliding start point of the user operation of sliding to the left is located in the area where the dock 214 is located, the user operation of sliding to the left can trigger the electronic device 100 to display the adding control 215 .
  • the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located may be a user operation in which the distance of sliding to the left reaches or exceeds a preset distance.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the adding control 215A.
  • the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located may be a user operation in which the time of sliding to the left reaches or exceeds a preset time length.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the value of the preset distance and the preset time length.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 widens the add control 215 to display the add control 215A shown in FIG. 3C , the electronic device 100 may narrow the dock 214 and overlap and display a part of APP in the dock 214 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 3D .
  • the user interface 220 may include a dock 229 to be edited.
  • the user can add desktop components in the dock 229 to be edited.
  • FIG. 2C For the content contained in the user interface 220, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2C.
  • FIG. 2C For the implementation of adding a desktop component in the dock 229 to be edited, reference may also be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
  • the release of the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left means that the user's finger that continues to slide to the left leaves the screen of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a blank dock on the desktop without entering the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 3D . Users can add desktop components in the desktop page to this blank dock.
  • the user operation of continuously sliding to the right in the area where the dock 214 is located may also trigger the electronic device 100 to create a blank dock.
  • the user operation of continuously sliding to the left (or sliding to the right) may directly trigger the electronic device 100 to create a blank dock.
  • the user may no longer perform user operations on the adding control 215 . That is to say, the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left (or sliding to the right) may be equivalent to that shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. A combination of touch operations on control 215A is added.
  • the user operation in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D is simpler, which can help the user to create a desktop space more conveniently.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a creation component for creating a desktop space on the user interface.
  • a user operation such as a touch operation
  • the electronic device 100 may create a blank dock.
  • the electronic device 100 may enter the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 2C .
  • the above-mentioned user operations for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state may include user operations of long pressing on a blank position of the desktop, user operations of pinching two fingers inward, user operations of clicking a specified button, pressing a specified physical button (or a combination of physical buttons) ) user actions and so on.
  • This embodiment of the present application does not limit it. Different from the user interface 220 shown in FIG.
  • the user interface displayed by the electronic device 100 in response to the user operation for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state may include the above-mentioned creating components, but not the above-mentioned to-be-edited dock229.
  • the electronic device 100 may create a blank dock, and display the dock 229 to be edited shown in FIG. 2C on the user interface. Then, the user can add desktop components in the dock 229 to be edited to complete the creation of the desktop space.
  • FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C exemplarily show some scenarios where electronic devices 100 switch desktop spaces.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 .
  • Desktop 410 may include dock 411 , simplified dock 412A, simplified dock 413A, simplified dock 414A, and simplified dock 415A. in:
  • the electronic device 100 may only fully display one dock on the desktop 410 and simplify the display for other docks.
  • the dock 411 is a dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 .
  • Dock411 contains APP icons in entertainment scenarios such as video and music.
  • the desktop space to which dock411 belongs may be an entertainment desktop space.
  • the user can place the icons of the most frequently used APPs in the entertainment scene in the dock 411 .
  • Through dock411, users can quickly find and open their most frequently used apps in entertainment scenarios.
  • Simplified dock412A, simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are docks with simplified display.
  • the four simplified display docks can be overlapped to save the display area of the desktop 410 .
  • the simplified dock displayed on the upper layer can partially cover the simplified dock displayed on the lower layer.
  • the overlapping levels of the multiple simplified docks may be arranged on the leftmost side in an order from left to right
  • the simplified dock of is displayed at the top, and the simplified dock at the far right is displayed at the bottom.
  • the overlapping layers of the simplified docks can be arranged in the order from left to right, the simplified dock on the far right is displayed on the top layer, and the The simplified dock on the far left is displayed at the bottom.
  • the fully displayed dock after the electronic device 100 switches the dock is the simplified one located at the top of the simplified dock.
  • simplified dock 412A, simplified dock 413A, simplified dock 414A, and simplified dock 415A are located to the right of fully displayed dock 411 .
  • Simplified dock412A is a dock to the right of dock411 and adjacent to dock411.
  • Simplified dock412A, simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are arranged in order from left to right, simplified dock412A is located at the far left of these four simplified docks, and simplified dock415A is located at the far right of these four simplified docks. Then, according to the overlapping display rule in the above-mentioned embodiment, the simplified dock 412A is displayed on the uppermost layer among the four simplified docks that are overlapped and displayed.
  • An APP icon in the simplified dock 412A (that is, the sports and health application icon 421 ) is completely displayed in the simplified dock 412A.
  • the simplified dock 415A is displayed at the bottom among the four simplified docks displayed in an overlapping manner. Simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are all partially blocked, and some areas are visible.
  • the user can know that if the fully displayed dock is switched to the dock on the right side of the dock 411, the desktop space displayed by the electronic device 100 is the desktop space to which the simplified dock 412A belongs, such as the sports desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4B . Wherein, the electronic device 100 fully displays the simplified dock 412A on the desktop 410 , and the simplified display dock 411 .
  • the complete display style of the simplified dock412A may be the dock412 as shown in FIG. 4B .
  • the dock 412 may include a sports health application icon 421 and an AA sports application icon 422 . It can be seen that the dock412 contains the APP icon in the sports scene.
  • the desktop space to which dock412 belongs may be a motion desktop space.
  • the simplified display style of the dock 411 may be the simplified dock 411A shown in FIG. 4B .
  • the APP icons in the simplified dock 411A can be displayed overlappingly.
  • Simplified dock 411A may be displayed to the left of fully displayed dock 412.
  • Simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are still displayed overlapping. Different from FIG. 4A , in FIG. 4B , since the simplified dock 412A is completely displayed, the simplified dock 412A is no longer overlapped with other simplified displayed docks.
  • the simplified dock adjacent to the simplified dock 412A and located under the simplified dock 412A, that is, the simplified dock 413A, can be displayed on the uppermost layer of the multiple simplified docks that are still overlapped. It can be seen that an APP icon (ie AA chat application icon 431 ) in the simplified dock 413A is completely displayed in the simplified dock 413A.
  • Simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are displayed on the lower layer of simplified dock413A, both of which are partially blocked, and a part of the area is visible.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C . Wherein, the electronic device 100 can completely display the simplified dock 413A on the desktop 410 and simplify the displayed dock 412 .
  • the complete display style of the simplified dock413A may be the dock413 shown in FIG. 4C .
  • the dock 413 may include an AA chat application icon 431 , a BB chat application icon 432 , and a dial application icon 433 . It can be seen that what is contained in dock413 is the APP icon in the communication scene.
  • the desktop space to which dock413 belongs may be a communication desktop space.
  • the user operation of sliding to the left shown in FIG. 4B may be equivalent to simplifying the display of the dock 412 to the left.
  • the electronic device 100 may overlap and display the simplified dock displayed on the dock 412 with the existing simplified dock on the left.
  • the leftward simplified display style of the dock 412 may be the simplified dock 412B shown in FIG. 4C .
  • Simplified dock412B is displayed overlapping with simplified dock411A.
  • the simplified dock 412B can be displayed on the upper layer of the simplified dock 411A, and partially cover the simplified dock 411A.
  • the simplified dock 412A shown in FIG. 4A and the simplified dock 412B shown in FIG. 4C are docks after the simplified display of the dock 412 .
  • the simplified dock 412A is a dock that is simplified and displayed to the right, and is located on the right side of the fully displayed dock.
  • Simplified dock412A implements a simplified display dock to the left, which is located on the left side of a fully displayed dock.
  • the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock 412A and the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock 412B may be different.
  • the leftmost APP icon in the dock 412 (such as the sports and health application icon 421 ) is displayed on the top layer of all overlapping displayed APP icons in the simplified dock 412A.
  • the rightmost APP icon in the dock 412 (such as the AA sports application icon 422) is displayed on the top layer of all overlapping displayed APP icons in the simplified dock 412B.
  • the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock412A and the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock412B may be the same.
  • the electronic device 100 may simplify and display the fully displayed dock to the right.
  • Simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are still displayed overlapping. Different from FIG. 4B , in FIG. 4C , since the simplified dock 413A is completely displayed, the simplified dock 413A is no longer overlapped with other simplified displayed docks.
  • the simplified dock 413 adjacent to the simplified dock 413A and located under the simplified dock 413A, that is, the simplified dock 414A, can be displayed on the uppermost layer of the multiple simplified docks that are still overlapped. It can be seen that an APP icon in the simplified dock 414A (that is, the AA note application icon 441 ) is completely displayed in the simplified dock 414A.
  • Simplified dock 415A is shown below simplified dock 414A, partially obscured.
  • the electronic device 100 may respond to other preset user operations to switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop. For example, in response to a click operation or a touch operation on a simplified dock, the electronic device 100 may completely display the simplified dock on the desktop and simplify the display of other docks.
  • the clicked or touched simplified dock may be adjacent to the fully displayed dock and located on the left or right side of the fully displayed dock (simplified dock 411A or simplified dock 413A shown in FIG. 4B ).
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C .
  • FIG. 4C For a specific implementation of switching the dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 4C .
  • the simplified dock that is clicked or touched may also be a simplified dock that is located in a lower layer and is partially hidden among multiple overlapping simplified docks (simplified dock 414A or simplified dock 415A as shown in FIG. 4B ). Since the simplified dock is partially covered and only a part of the area is displayed, the above-mentioned click operation or touch operation may act on the displayed area of the simplified dock. For example, in response to a touch operation on the area where the simplified dock 413A shown in FIG. 4A is displayed, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C . For a specific implementation of switching the dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 4C .
  • a desktop space may include a dock
  • the process of switching the dock shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C is the process of switching the desktop space.
  • the user can switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop through the user operation of sliding left or right, or clicking the user operation corresponding to the dock.
  • the above-mentioned user operation of switching the desktop space is relatively simple, and the user can quickly switch the desktop space corresponding to different scenes, so as to quickly find the desktop component that he or she uses most frequently in a scene.
  • the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a new desktop space.
  • the dock that is currently completely displayed on the desktop is the dock that is arranged on the leftmost side
  • the user operation that slides to the right in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic
  • the device 100 creates a new desktop space, and the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to simplify the display of the dock that is currently fully displayed on the desktop, and display the current complete display on the right side of the dock on the desktop.
  • the dock is completely displayed on the desktop (that is, switching the desktop space).
  • the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a new desktop space, and act on the area where the dock is located to move to the right
  • the user operation of sliding can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to simplify the display of the dock currently completely displayed on the desktop, and completely display the dock on the left side of the dock currently completely displayed on the desktop (that is, to switch the desktop space). If there is a simplified display dock on the left and right side of the currently fully displayed dock on the desktop, then the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the desktop space.
  • a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for recently used desktop components may be displayed on the desktop of the electronic device 100 at the same time.
  • the above-mentioned resident desktop component may be fixedly placed in the dock.
  • the electronic device 100 may adjust the desktop component in the dock where the resident desktop component is placed.
  • the aforementioned recently used desktop components may include desktop components that have been opened within a preset period of time (for example, within the last 15 minutes). The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific value of the latest preset time period.
  • the above-mentioned recently used desktop components may also include the L desktop components with the latest open time among all running desktop components (such as running in the foreground, running in the background, etc.).
  • the aforementioned L is a positive integer.
  • the specific value of L is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned recently used desktop components may also include one or more desktop components screened by the electronic device 100 according to other rules. That is to say, the electronic device 100 can automatically update the desktop components included in the dock where the most recently used desktop components are placed according to the opening time of the desktop components.
  • FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a scene where the electronic device 100 displays a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 510 .
  • Desktop 510 may include dock511 , dock512 , dock513 , dock514 , dock515 and dock516 .
  • dock 511 may be a dock for placing recently used desktop components.
  • dock512-dock516 may be docks for placing resident desktop components.
  • the dock 511 may include desktop components recently opened by the user such as the AA chat application icon 511A, the music application icon 511B, and the AA news application icon 511C.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of desktop components contained in the dock 511 .
  • the size of the dock 511 may vary with the number of desktop components contained therein. For example, when the recently opened desktop component has only two APP icons, the length of the dock 511 can be reduced from the size that can place three APP icons as shown in FIG. 5 to the size that can place two APP icons. When the recently opened desktop component has four APP icons, the length of the dock 511 can be enlarged from the size in which three APP icons can be placed as shown in FIG. 5 to the size in which four APP icons can be placed.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display positions on the desktop of the above-mentioned dock for placing resident desktop components and the dock for placing recently used desktop components.
  • the dock where recently used desktop components are placed may also be located on the right side of the dock where resident desktop components are placed.
  • a dock displaying a resident desktop component on the desktop is used as an example for introduction.
  • the electronic device 100 may display two different types of docks on the desktop: a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components. Wherein, there may be one or more docks for placing resident desktop components.
  • a dock that places resident desktop components can represent a desktop space. Users can create different desktop spaces and use different desktops to divide desktop components into scenes. This can facilitate the user to quickly find desktop components in different scenarios. In addition, the user can also quickly open the desktop components that he has recently opened again through the dock where the recently used desktop components are placed.
  • the electronic device 100 may recommend desktop components in the dock of the desktop space according to preset recommendation rules, so that the user can quickly complete the creation of the desktop space.
  • FIG. 6A to FIG. 6E exemplarily show some scenarios of recommending desktop components in the dock provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 610 as shown in FIG. 6A .
  • a user operation for creating a dock that is, creating a new desktop space
  • the user interface 610 may include a thumbnail desktop page 611 , a thumbnail desktop page 612 , a thumbnail desktop page 613 , a dock 614 and a dock 615 .
  • thumbnail desktop page 611 to the thumbnail desktop page 613 may refer to the thumbnail desktop page 221 to the thumbnail desktop page 223 shown in FIG. 2C .
  • the dock614 may refer to the abbreviated dock228 shown in FIG. 2C above. I won't go into details here.
  • the dock 615 is the newly created dock.
  • the dock 615 may include an added APP area 617 and a recommended APP area 618 .
  • the added APP area 617 can be used to place the APP icons that have been added to the dock 615 . In the case that no APP icon has been added to the dock 615 , the added APP area 617 may be displayed as empty as shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the recommended APP area 618 can be used to place APP icons recommended by the electronic device 100 .
  • AA notes application icon 618A, email application icon 618B, and document editing application icon 618C These recommended APP icons may be selected by the electronic device 100 from all APPs installed in the electronic device 100 according to preset recommendation rules.
  • the above preset recommendation rules will be specifically introduced in subsequent embodiments. Let's not expand here.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of APP icons included in the recommended APP area 618 .
  • each APP icon placed in the recommended APP area 618 may include the add control shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the add control on an APP icon can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add this APP icon to the added APP area.
  • the electronic device 100 in response to the user operation of adding a control on the AA note application icon 618A, can add the AA note application icon in the added area 617 of the dock 615, and recommend APP notes in the APP area 618. App icon removed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6B .
  • an AA notes application icon 617A may be included in the added area 617 .
  • the recommended APP area 618 may contain an email application icon 618B and a document editing application icon 618C, but not the AA notes application icon 618A.
  • the electronic device 100 updates the recommended APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 according to the added APP icon.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6C .
  • an AA notes application icon 617A may be included in the added area 617 .
  • the recommended APP area 618 may include a document editing application icon 618C, an AA quiz application icon 618D, and an AA dictionary application icon 618E.
  • the APP icons contained in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6C may be determined by the electronic device 100 according to the APP icons added to the added APP area 617 (such as the AA note application icon 617A) and preset recommendation rules.
  • the electronic device 100 can also add the APP icons in the thumbnail desktop page to the added APP area 617 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also update the APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 according to the added APP icon.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6D .
  • user interface 610 may include thumbnail desktop page613 , thumbnail desktop page619 , thumbnail desktop page620 , dock614 and dock615 .
  • thumbnail desktop page 613 For the thumbnail desktop page 613 , the thumbnail desktop page 619 , the thumbnail desktop page 620 , and the dock 614 , reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 2C . I won't go into details here.
  • the desktop page 619 may include an AA dictionary application icon 619A.
  • the electronic device 100 can add the AA dictionary application icon in the added APP area 615A of the dock 615, and update the recommended APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 .
  • For the user operation for adding the AA dictionary application icon 619A in the desktop page 619 to the dock 615 reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6E .
  • the added area 617 may contain the AA note application icon 617A, and the AA dictionary application icon 617B added from the desktop page 619 .
  • the recommended APP area 618 may include a document editing application icon 618C, an AA reading application icon 618F, and a BB reading application icon 618G.
  • the APP icons contained in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6E may be determined by the electronic device 100 according to the APP icons added to the added APP area 617 (such as the AA dictionary application icon 617B) and preset recommendation rules.
  • FIG. 7A exemplarily shows a flowchart of a method for recommending an APP icon by the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method may include steps S701-S705. in:
  • the electronic device 100 Upon receiving a user operation for creating a dock, the electronic device 100 creates a dock1, and displays K APP icons in a recommended APP area of the dock1.
  • the aforementioned dock1 may be, for example, the aforementioned dock615 shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the aforementioned K APP icons displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1 may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the aforementioned K is a positive integer.
  • the electronic device 100 may recommend an APP icon to be added to the dock for the user according to the time when the user uses the APP.
  • FIG. 7B exemplarily shows a recommendation rule provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Multiple APPs can be installed in the electronic device 100, such as APP1, APP2, APP3, APP4, APP5, APP6 and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may divide the APPs installed in the electronic device 100 according to the usage time of the APPs, and group multiple APPs into packages (pack).
  • the electronic device 100 may collect data on the usage time of the APP by the user within a certain period of time.
  • the aforementioned period of time may be, for example, one week, one month, and the like.
  • the above-mentioned data on the usage time of using the APP may include the time of opening the user interface of the APP, the time of closing the user interface of the APP, the duration of using the APP, and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may divide a day into different time periods, such as 6:00-9:00, 9:00-12:00 and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the division of the foregoing time periods.
  • the electronic device 100 may also take two days, three days, or one week as a whole period of time, and divide this period of time into different time periods. Subsequent embodiments of the present application are specifically described by dividing a day into different time periods.
  • the electronic device 100 can count the APPs used in each time period, and the usage duration of these APPs. For example, the electronic device 100 may divide several (such as 3, 4, etc.) APPs with the longest usage time from 6:00 to 9:00 into APP pack1. The electronic device 100 may classify several APPs with the longest usage time from 9:00 to 12:00 as APP2. The electronic device 100 may divide several APPs with the longest usage time from 21:00 to 24:00 into APP pack N. In this way, the electronic device 100 can obtain multiple APP packs. Since users may use the same APP in different time periods, different APP packs can contain the same APP. The number of APPs contained in each APP pack may be the same, or may also be different.
  • An APP pack can contain APPs that users often use together. For example, a user often uses an APP for checking the weather and an APP for browsing news together from 8:00 to 9:00. Users often use different APPs for shopping together from 21:00 to 24:00.
  • multiple APPs that are often used together by the user may belong to one scene.
  • a user may use multiple different shopping apps together in a shopping scene.
  • the above division of APPs according to the user's usage time can facilitate the electronic device 100 to recommend to the user the APPs that the user often uses together at the same time, and improve the efficiency of the user's construction of a desktop space for describing a scene.
  • the electronic device 100 can also determine the degree of duplication of each APP pack according to the APP icons contained in the existing dock.
  • the degree of duplication of an APP pack can be determined by the number of APP icons corresponding to the APPs contained in this APP pack existing in the existing dock. Among them, the more APP icons corresponding to the APP contained in an APP pack exist in the existing dock, the higher the repetition degree of this APP is, and vice versa, the lower the repetition degree of this APP. For example, an APP pack contains 5 APPs, if 3 APPs in this APP pack exist in the existing dock, then the repetition degree of this APP pack can be 3/5, that is, 60%.
  • the electronic device 100 may select an APP icon recommended to the dock from APP packs whose repetition degree is lower than a preset repetition degree.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the value of the above-mentioned preset repetition degree.
  • the preset repetition degree may be 70% or the like. In this way, repeated recommendation can be avoided, or the recommended APP icon belongs to the scene corresponding to the established desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the usage rate of each APP pack according to the usage time of the APP, and select the APP pack with the highest usage rate from the APP packs whose repetition degree is lower than the preset repetition degree as the recommendation result.
  • the usage rate of an APP pack can be the total usage time of all APPs included in the APP pack in the time period corresponding to the APP pack.
  • APP pack1 contains 5 APPs.
  • the total usage time of these 5 apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 140 minutes.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the usage rate of APP pack1 as 140.
  • the usage rate of an APP pack may be the average usage duration of all APPs included in the APP pack within the time period corresponding to the APP pack.
  • APP pack1 contains 5 APPs.
  • the total usage time of these 5 apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 140 minutes.
  • the average usage time of these five apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 28 minutes.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the usage rate of APP pack1 is 28.
  • the usage rate of the APP pack can also be determined by other calculation methods using the usage time of the APP. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • APP pack1 is an APP pack with the highest usage rate among the APP packs whose repetition degree is not lower than the above preset repetition degree.
  • the electronic device 100 may use APP pack1 as a recommendation result.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the APP icons corresponding to all APPs in the APP pack1 in the recommended APP area of the dock (such as the aforementioned newly created dock1), that is, all of them are recommended to the user.
  • the electronic device 100 may also select several (such as K) APPs with the longest usage time from the APP pack1, and display the APP icons corresponding to the K APPs in the recommended APP area of the dock.
  • the electronic device 100 is not limited to the usage time of the above-mentioned APP, and the electronic device 100 may also obtain the recommendation result of the APP according to the number of times the APP is opened, or in combination with the data such as the usage time of the APP and the number of times the APP is opened.
  • the electronic device 100 may also divide the APP based on the geographic location dimension to obtain multiple different APP packs.
  • the electronic device 100 may divide the APPs used by the user when the electronic device 100 is at position 1 into one APP pack, and divide the APPs used by the user when the electronic device 100 is at position 2 into another APP pack.
  • the electronic device 100 can obtain multiple APP packs.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the recommendation result based on the plurality of APP packs according to the recommendation rules introduced in the above embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned different geographic locations such as location 1 and location 2 may specifically refer to areas with a certain size range.
  • the recommendation model A may be stored in the electronic device 100 .
  • Recommendation model A may follow the recommendation rules shown in FIG. 7B.
  • the electronic device 100 can collect data on the usage time of the user using the APP, and use the recommendation model A to regularly or irregularly group the APPs installed in the electronic device 100 to obtain multiple APP packs, and determine the Recommended results.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the above recommendation result in the recommended APP area of the newly created blank dock.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display the above recommendation result in the recommended APP area of the edited dock.
  • the recommendation rule shown in FIG. 7B above can recommend multiple APPs that the user often uses together when the user creates a new desktop space.
  • the multiple apps used together above are often used by users in one scenario. This can help users provide efficiency in constructing desktop spaces that describe a scene.
  • the above-mentioned recommendation rules are also combined with the desktop space already created by the user, so as to reduce the situation of repeated recommendation and the conflict between the recommended APP and the created desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user operation of adding the APP1 icon among the K APP icons to the dock1, the electronic device 100 adds the APP1 icon to the added APP area of the dock1.
  • the electronic device 100 may use APP pack1 shown in FIG. 7B as a recommendation result.
  • the electronic device 100 may display K APP icons in the APP pack1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1.
  • the K APP icons may include an APP1 icon corresponding to APP1.
  • the above-mentioned APP1 icon may be, for example, the aforementioned AA notes application icon 618A shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the user operation of adding the APP1 icon to the dock1 may be, for example, the user operation of adding a control on the AA note application icon 618A shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the electronic device 100 determines Y APPs from all the APPs installed on the electronic device 100, and the Y APPs have an association relationship A with APP1, and the electronic device 100 updates the APP icon in the recommended APP area in the dock1, corresponding to the above Y APPs The APP icon is displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1.
  • the APP icons corresponding to the above Y APPs may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 shown in FIG. 6B .
  • the electronic device 100 may update the APP icon in the recommended APP area of dock1 according to the APP added by the user in dock1 and the preset recommendation rules.
  • the preset recommendation rule may be to recommend an APP of the same type as the APP added by the user in the dock.
  • the APP added by the user in dock1 is the AA notes application.
  • the category of the AA notes application may be a study category.
  • the electronic device 100 may search for an APP whose category is the learning category from all APPs installed on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may determine one or more APPs from the found APPs of the learning category, and display the APP icons corresponding to the one or more APPs in the recommended APP area of dock1.
  • the one or more APPs may be any one or more APPs in the learning category of the electronic device 100 .
  • the one or more APPs may be one or more APPs in the learning category of the electronic device 100 that are frequently used by the user (eg, the longest usage time).
  • the one or more APPs may be APPs that are not placed in other existing docks.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the document editing application, the AA quiz application, and the AA dictionary application are APPs of the learning category, and display the APP icons corresponding to these three APPs in the recommended APP area of dock1 (refer to FIG. 6C ). shown in the recommended APP area 618).
  • the electronic device 100 may store an application category table.
  • the application category table may include categories to which all APPs installed in the electronic device 100 belong. Among them, an APP can have multiple categories.
  • the plurality of categories may be of different levels.
  • a video application may have an entertainment category, a video category.
  • the level of the entertainment category above is higher than that of the video category.
  • the entertainment category may include a video category, and may also include a music category, a game category, and so on. Multiple categories of an APP may also be at the same level.
  • a document editing application may have a learning category, a job category, and a tools category.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific division of APP categories.
  • the above description information of the category of the APP may be included in the application program package of the APP.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the category of the APP from the application package of the APP, and add the category of the APP to the application category table.
  • the electronic device 100 may search for all APPs of a category among all APPs installed on the electronic device 100 through the above application category table.
  • the aforementioned preset recommendation rule may be to recommend an APP that is often used together with an APP added by the user in the dock.
  • FIG. 7C exemplarily shows another recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Multiple APPs may be installed in the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can group the APPs according to the usage time of each APP by the user to obtain multiple APP packs.
  • the electronic device 100 can search for an APP pack containing APP1 from a plurality of APP packs. Further, the electronic device 100 may determine the APP pack containing the longest usage time of APP1 as the recommendation result according to the usage time of APP1 in each APP pack containing APP1.
  • the APP packs including APP1 among the plurality of APP packs are: APP pack1 and APP pack3.
  • the electronic device 100 may compare the usage duration of APP1 in APP pack1 with the usage duration of APP1 in APP pack3. For example, the usage time of APP1 in APP pack1 is 15 minutes. The usage time of APP1 in APP pack3 is 45 minutes. The electronic device 100 may determine that the usage time of APP1 in APP pack3 is longer, and determine APP pack3 as the recommended result.
  • the electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to other APPs in the APP pack3 except APP1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1.
  • the electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to some APPs in the APP pack3 except APP1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1.
  • the aforementioned partial APPs may be APPs that are not placed in other existing docks.
  • Y APPs displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1 have an association relationship A with APP1.
  • the association relationship A may belong to the same category.
  • the relationship A may also belong to the same APP pack, that is, the APPs that users often use together.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the above association relationship A.
  • the APP2 icon on the above desktop page may be, for example, the AA dictionary application icon 619A on the thumbnail desktop page 619 shown in FIG. 6D .
  • the above user operation of adding the APP2 icon to the dock1 may be, for example, a user operation of dragging the APP2 icon to the added APP area of the dock1.
  • the electronic device 100 determines Z APPs from all the APPs installed on the electronic device 100. These Z APPs have an association relationship B with APP2.
  • the electronic device 100 updates the APP icon in the recommended APP area in the dock1, and corresponds to the above Z APPs.
  • the APP icon of the icon is displayed to the recommended APP area of dock1.
  • the APP icons corresponding to the Z APPs above may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 shown in FIG. 6E .
  • the method for the electronic device 100 to determine the above Z APPs may refer to the method for the electronic device 100 to determine the Y APPs in step S703. That is to say, the above association relationship B may belong to the same category. Alternatively, the relationship B may also belong to the same APP pack, that is, the APPs that users often use together. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the above association relationship B.
  • step S703 is associated with the above step S702. That is, only when step S702 occurs, the electronic device 100 may proceed to step S703.
  • step S704 is associated with the above step S705.
  • the above step S702 to the above step S705 are all optional.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of the above step S702 and step S704.
  • the electronic device 100 can recommend the user to add according to user habits such as multiple APPs that the user often uses together, as well as the APPs added by the user in the dock of the newly created desktop space.
  • user habits such as multiple APPs that the user often uses together, as well as the APPs added by the user in the dock of the newly created desktop space.
  • the above-mentioned recommended APP is more likely to be the APP that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for apps on the desktop page and drag them to the dock, help users quickly add apps to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
  • FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B exemplarily show some other scene diagrams of recommending desktop components in the dock provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 810 as shown in FIG. 8A .
  • a user operation for creating a dock that is, creating a new desktop space
  • the user interface 810 may include a thumbnail desktop page811 , a thumbnail desktop page812 , a thumbnail desktop page813 , a dock815 and a dock816 .
  • thumbnail desktop page 811 - the thumbnail desktop page 813 may refer to the thumbnail desktop page 221 - the thumbnail desktop page 223 shown in FIG. 2C.
  • the dock815 may refer to the abbreviated dock228 shown in FIG. 2C above. I won't go into details here.
  • the dock 816 is the newly created dock.
  • the dock 816 may include an added APP area 817 and a recommended APP area 818 .
  • For the added APP area 817 reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned added APP area 617 shown in FIG. 6A.
  • For the recommended APP area 818 reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned recommended APP area 718 shown in FIG. 6A.
  • the APP icons in the recommended APP area 818 may be selected by the electronic device 100 from the currently completely displayed thumbnail desktop pages.
  • the electronic device 100 may display in the recommended APP area 818 an APP icon corresponding to an APP frequently used by the user in a currently displayed desktop page according to the data of the APP used by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 may switch the currently displayed desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may update the APP icon in the recommended APP area 818 , and display in the APP area 818 the APP icon corresponding to the APP frequently used by the user in the switched desktop page.
  • the above-mentioned method for determining frequently used APPs by users in a desktop page may include: determining the longest-used several APPs in a desktop page within a period of time, or determining the most opened several APPs in a desktop page within a period of time wait.
  • the thumbnail desktop page 812 is a page currently completely displayed on the user interface 810 .
  • the electronic device 100 may determine from the thumbnail desktop page 812 frequently used APPs of the user, such as a contacts application, a dialing application, and an application store application.
  • the electronic device 100 may display icons corresponding to the determined APPs frequently used by the user in the recommended APP area 818 .
  • the recommended APP area 818 may include a contact application icon 818A, a dial application icon 818B, and an application store application icon 818C.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 810 shown in FIG. 8B . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may switch the page completely displayed on the user interface 810 to a thumbnail desktop page 813 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 812 is partially displayed on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 813 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 814 is partially displayed on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 813 .
  • the electronic device 100 can determine from the thumbnail desktop page 813 the APPs frequently used by the user, such as AA chat application, AA game application, and music application. Comparing FIG. 8A and FIG.
  • the APP icon in the recommended APP area 818 can be updated along with the switching of the thumbnail desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to frequently used APPs by the user in the thumbnail desktop page 813 in the recommended APP area 818 .
  • the recommended APP area 818 may include the AA chat application icon 818D, the AA game application icon 818E, and the music application icon 818F.
  • the electronic device 100 can recommend the APPs that the user often uses together, the APPs of the same category as the APPs added by the user in the dock, and the APPs that are often used by the user in the dock.
  • Recommendation rules such as APPs used together, APPs frequently used by users in the currently displayed desktop page, etc., recommend APPs for users in the dock.
  • These recommended apps are more likely to be apps that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for apps on the desktop page and drag them to the dock, help users quickly add apps to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
  • a desktop space may also include one or more desktop pages.
  • the electronic device 100 may place some desktop components installed on the electronic device 100 in a page of a desktop space according to the user's selection, and cancel displaying other desktop components in the page of the desktop space. For example, the user may choose to place all desktop components in a scene on the desktop page of a desktop space, and place the most frequently used desktop components in this scene in the dock of this desktop space.
  • the electronic device can display the desktop page of the one desktop space, and fully display the desktop components in the dock of the one desktop space.
  • a desktop space includes a dock but does not include a desktop page
  • the electronic device 100 in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space (such as a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located), the electronic device 100
  • the switched desktop space including the dock can be displayed on the desktop.
  • the desktop page will not change with the switching of the desktop space. That is, one or more pages can be used to place all desktop components in the electronic device 100 , or place desktop components in all desktop components of the electronic device 100 except the desktop components that have been added to each dock.
  • the content of the same desktop page is the same.
  • a desktop space includes a dock and a desktop page
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page and the dock included in the switched desktop space on the desktop. Since the user can select the content placed on the desktop page of one desktop space, the content placed on the desktop page of different desktop spaces may be different. That is, when the electronic device 100 is in different desktop spaces, the contents of the desktop pages may be different.
  • the following describes a scenario in which the electronic device 100 adjusts a desktop page of a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9A to FIG. 9F exemplarily show some schematic diagrams of electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 910 .
  • the desktop 910 may include a desktop page 911 , a page indicator 913 and a dock 912 .
  • the desktop 910 may include multiple docks. Each dock can correspond to a desktop space.
  • the dock 912 is a fully displayed dock on the desktop 910 .
  • the electronic device 100 may switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop 910 in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space. For the above user operation of switching desktop spaces, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9B .
  • the user interface 920 may include a thumbnail desktop page 921 , a thumbnail desktop page 922 , a thumbnail desktop page 923 , and a thumbnail dock 924 .
  • thumbnail desktop page 921 may include a thumbnail desktop page 921 , a thumbnail desktop page 922 , a thumbnail desktop page 923 , and a thumbnail dock 924 .
  • thumbnail dock924 may be a thumbnail of the above-mentioned dock912.
  • the thumbnail dock 924 may contain an added APPs area 924A and a recommended APPs area 924B.
  • Added APPs area 924A may be used to place APP icons that have been added to thumbnail dock 924 .
  • the APP icon in the added APP area 924A may be a thumbnail corresponding to the APP icon in the dock 912 .
  • the recommended APP area 924B can be used to place the APP icons that the electronic device 100 recommends to be added by the user in the thumbnail dock 924 .
  • For the method for the electronic device 100 to recommend an APP icon in the dock reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the thumbnail dock 924 may only include the added APP area 924A, but not the recommended APP area 924B.
  • the thumbnail desktop page 921 to the thumbnail desktop page 923 may be thumbnail images of desktop pages included in the full amount of desktop space.
  • the aforementioned total amount of desktop space may be a desktop space including all desktop components in the electronic device 100 .
  • the full desktop space can contain one or more desktop pages.
  • the one or more desktop pages can be arranged in a certain order.
  • One or more desktop pages of the full desktop space can be used to place all desktop components in the electronic device 100, or place desktop components in all desktop components of the electronic device 100 except the desktop components that have been added to each dock.
  • the aforementioned desktop components can be placed on the aforementioned one or more desktop pages according to specified positions.
  • the specified sequence on which the above-mentioned desktop pages are based and the specified positions on which the above-mentioned desktop components are based may be specified by the user or set by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display thumbnails of desktop pages included in the full desktop space, that is, thumbnails of desktop pages included in the full desktop space.
  • the display styles of the desktop components placed on these thumbnail desktop pages may be determined by the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. Wherein, on the thumbnail desktop page included in the full desktop space, the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located may have different display styles from those not contained in the desktop space.
  • the user can view all desktop components in the electronic device 100 through the above-mentioned full amount of desktop space. Users can select the desktop components that need to be kept or removed in a desktop space on the thumbnail desktop page included in the full desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 creates a blank dock and adds a desktop component to the blank dock, which may indicate that the electronic device 100 has created a new desktop space.
  • This new desktop space is the desktop space to which the above blank dock belongs.
  • this desktop space may include all desktop components in the electronic device 100 . That is, the desktop pages contained in this one desktop space can be the same as the desktop pages contained in the entire desktop space. The user can remove the desktop components included in this desktop space, so that only the desktop components in one scene are placed on the desktop page of this desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may newly create a desktop space, and remove the desktop component from the newly created desktop space in response to the user operation of removing the desktop component by the user, so that Only the desktop components in the learning scene can be placed on the desktop page contained in the newly created desktop space.
  • the thumbnail dock completely displayed in the user interface 920 is the thumbnail dock 924 .
  • the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs.
  • the removal operation performed by the user on the thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 922 ) of the full desktop space can be used to remove the desktop component from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9C .
  • the electronic device 100 switches the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed on the user interface 920 to the thumbnail desktop page 923 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 922 . It can be seen from FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C that all the desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page922 and the thumbnail desktop page923 are not removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display all desktop components contained in the thumbnail desktop page922 and the thumbnail desktop page923 on the desktop of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 9D 920.
  • the user operation for removing a desktop component may be, for example, a touch operation or a click operation on the desktop component when the electronic device 100 is in a desktop editing state.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operation for removing a desktop component.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the removed desktop components (such as music application icons, video application icons, AA game application icons) in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs on the thumbnail desktop page 923 in a removed display style. , BB game application icon and AA music application icon), and display the desktop components contained in the desktop space to which the dock924 belongs (such as the clock application icon, etc.) in an unremoved display style.
  • the above-mentioned removed display style may be a display style that grayscales the desktop component.
  • the above-mentioned non-removed display style may be a non-grayscale display style of a desktop component such as a clock application icon.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above removed display style.
  • the above-mentioned removed display style and non-removed display style can be used to facilitate the user to distinguish between the retained desktop components and the removed desktop components in this desktop space when adjusting the desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may exit the desktop editing state and display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 9E .
  • Desktop 910 may include desktop page 914 , page indicator 913 and dock 912 .
  • Desktop page914 and dock912 belong to the same desktop space.
  • the thumbnail of the desktop page 914 may be the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 9D .
  • the electronic device 100 removes the desktop component displayed in the removed display style on the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 9D from the desktop page 914 . remove.
  • the positions where these removed desktop components were originally displayed can be empty. That is to say, the user operation shown in FIG. 9C to remove the desktop component can remove the desktop component from the desktop space to which the desktop page914 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 9F .
  • desktop 910 may include desktop page 915 , page indicator 913 , and dock 916 .
  • the electronic device 100 can switch from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs to the desktop space to which dock916 belongs.
  • the desktop page915 is the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock916 belongs.
  • the desktop components placed on the desktop page915 are the desktop components included in the desktop space to which the desktop page915 belongs. It can be seen that the desktop space to which dock916 belongs may contain the removed desktop components in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
  • the desktop space to which dock916 belongs may also contain desktop components contained in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. That is, the two desktop spaces can be independent of each other, and the desktop components contained in each do not affect each other.
  • the electronic device 100 can display on the desktop 910 the desktop page (such as desktop page 915 ) and the dock (such as dock 915 ) contained in the switched desktop space.
  • the number of indicators contained in the page indicator 913 in FIG. 9E and the page indicator 913 in FIG. 9F are the same, and the indicator in the selected state is the third indicator on the left.
  • This may indicate that the desktop page 914 in FIG. 9E and the desktop page 915 in FIG. 9F are the same desktop page among the desktop pages included in the full desktop space, for example, desktop pageA.
  • the difference is that, in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs in FIG.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop page and a dock of a desktop space in a period of time. This can simplify the content presented on the desktop, and facilitate users to quickly find desktop components in a scene.
  • the user may trigger the electronic device 100 to be in the desktop space corresponding to the scene. Users can only view the desktop components that need to be used in this scenario, and can quickly find and open the most frequently used desktop components in this scenario through the dock. This can help users focus on one scene, and reduce the situation that desktop components in other scenes interrupt the user's focus on this one scene.
  • the user operation for switching between different desktop spaces is also relatively simple. For example, the user may only need to perform a user operation of sliding left or right in the area where the dock is located, that is, to quickly switch between different desktop spaces.
  • the electronic device 100 can also add back the removed desktop components in a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D . That is to say, when the desktop component is removed from a desktop space, and the electronic device 100 is in the state of exiting desktop editing, the desktop component displayed by the electronic device 100 on the desktop page of this desktop space does not include the aforementioned Removed desktop components. However, when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 can display a thumbnail desktop page of the full desktop space (that is, the electronic device 100 can display the above-mentioned removed desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page).
  • the music application icon, video application icon, AA game application icon, BB game application icon and AA music application icon shown in FIG. 9D are desktop components removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
  • the electronic device may change the display style of this desktop component from a removed display style to an unremoved one. Display styles.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the above-mentioned unremoved display styles.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned desktop component whose display style has been changed to a display style that has not been removed on the desktop page of the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs. That is, this desktop component is added back to the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove one or more desktop pages from the desktop space to which they belong, in units of desktop pages. If a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the desktop components placed on this desktop page are also removed from this desktop space.
  • FIGS. 10A to 10D exemplarily show some other electronic devices 100 schematic diagrams of adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 920 .
  • the user interface 920 can include a page add/remove component 1011 .
  • the page adding/removing component 1011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove a thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 920 in a desktop space.
  • the page add/remove component 1011 can have different display states. Different display states of the page adding/removing component 1011 can be used to indicate whether the corresponding thumbnail desktop page is removed in a desktop space.
  • the corresponding abbreviated desktop page may be a fully displayed abbreviated desktop page on the current user interface.
  • the display state of the page add/remove component 1011 may include an add state and a remove state.
  • the added state of the page adding/removing component 1011 may indicate that the corresponding thumbnail desktop page has not been removed in a desktop space. That is, this desktop space includes the corresponding thumbnail desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may respond to a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011, such as a touch operation, to change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 to move. delete status.
  • the page adding/removing component 1011 being in the removed state may indicate that the corresponding thumbnail desktop page is removed in a desktop space. That is, this desktop space does not include the corresponding thumbnail desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 to the added state in response to a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific display style of the page adding/removing component 1011 in the added state or the removed state.
  • the aforementioned abbreviated desktop page may indicate that a desktop space is not removed, and in the case of exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page when it is in the desktop space.
  • the thumbnail desktop page may be a thumbnail of a desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page.
  • An abbreviated desktop page being removed from a desktop space may indicate that the desktop page displayed by the electronic device 100 in this desktop space does not include the desktop page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page when the desktop editing state is exited. .
  • the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 shown in FIG. 10A is the adding state.
  • the display status of the page adding/removing component 1011 may also be switched accordingly.
  • the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 after switching may indicate whether the fully displayed thumbnail desktop page is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs after the above-mentioned thumbnail desktop page is switched. For example, in response to a user operation of sliding left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may move the thumbnail desktop page 923 to the left to the middle of the user interface 920 to completely display the thumbnail desktop page 923 .
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 according to whether the thumbnail desktop page 923 is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs. If the thumbnail desktop page 923 is not removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs, the electronic device 100 can still display the page adding/removing component 1011 in the added state.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the electronic device 100 can change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from the adding state to the one shown in FIG. 10B The removal status shown.
  • the display styles in which the page adding/removing component 1011 is in the adding state and the removing state may be display styles having the same pattern but different colors.
  • the electronic device 100 may also switch the display style of all desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page 922 to the removed display style.
  • display style of desktop component removal reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the electronic device 100 may add/remove a page indicating the thumbnail desktop page The display state of the component is determined to be removed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 10C .
  • a user operation of exiting the desktop editing state such as a touch operation on a blank area on the thumbnail desktop page 922
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 10C .
  • FIG. 10E For the specific content of the desktop 910, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 9E.
  • FIG. 10C It can be seen from FIG. 10C that the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs.
  • the above-mentioned desktop space to which dock912 belongs is the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 shown in FIG. 10B belongs.
  • the page indicator 1022 shown in FIG. 10C may indicate the positional relationship between various desktop pages included in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs.
  • the page indicator 1022 may include four indicators: the leftmost indicator indicating one screen negative, and the right three indicators indicating the desktop page where desktop components such as APP icons are placed.
  • the page indicators on the desktop may include 5 indicators: the leftmost one indicates minus one screen, and four indicators on the right side indicating the desktop page on which desktop components such as APP icons are placed (refer to the page indicator 913 shown in FIG. 9A ).
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs on the desktop 910 .
  • the desktop page 914 is the desktop page 914 corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 10B .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a negative screen 930 shown in FIG. 10D . It can be understood that after the process of removing the desktop page shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B , the electronic device 100 will replace a desktop page that originally existed between the desktop page 914 and the negative screen 930 (that is, the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in FIG. 10B corresponds to desktop page), removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. This is equivalent to removing all desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page922 from the desktop space to which the dock912 belongs.
  • the user can remove all desktop components placed in a desktop page from a desktop space.
  • the user can quickly remove multiple desktop components through the above method of removing the desktop page. In this way, the user can remove the desktop components that need to be removed from the desktop space one by one without performing multiple user operations.
  • the above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D .
  • the user can view various thumbnail desktop pages in the full desktop space by sliding left or right on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located. That is to say, after a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the user can still view the thumbnail of the desktop page removed from the desktop space when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop editing state. This can facilitate the user to add the removed desktop page back to this desktop space through page adding/removing components.
  • the electronic device 100 may also add one or more desktop components placed on the desktop page back to the desktop space.
  • 11A to 11C exemplarily show some other electronic devices 100 schematic diagrams of adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 920 .
  • the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 is the removed state.
  • the page adding/removing component 1011 being in the removed state may indicate that the thumbnail desktop page 922 is removed in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs. All desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page922 are displayed with the removed display style.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 11B .
  • the electronic device 100 changes the display style of the dialing application icon from the removed display style shown in FIG. 11A to the non-removed display style shown in FIG. 11B .
  • the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 can still be a removed state.
  • the electronic device 100 may not change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011. That is, the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 is still in the removed state.
  • the user operation of adding/removing the component 1011 on the page in the removed state can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the desktop components whose display style is still the removed display style in the above-mentioned abbreviated desktop page as unremoved The style is displayed.
  • the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from a removed state to an added state.
  • the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from the removed state to the added state.
  • the user operation of adding/removing the component 1011 on the page in the added state can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to change the desktop component whose display style is the unremoved display style in the above-mentioned abbreviated desktop page to the removed display style again. show.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 11C .
  • the desktop 910 may include a desktop page1111 and a dock912. page1111 and dock912 can belong to one desktop space. This desktop space is also the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 shown in FIG. 9B belongs.
  • the desktop page 1111 may be the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in FIG. 11B . Wherein, among the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 922, only the dialer application icon is displayed in an unremoved display style. Then, the electronic device 100 may place only the dialing application icon on the desktop page1111.
  • the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs.
  • the desktop page 911 shown in FIG. 9A and the desktop page 1111 shown in FIG. 11C correspond to the same desktop page in the full desktop space. Comparing Fig. 9A and Fig. 11C, it can be seen that after removing the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in Fig. 10A and adding the dialing application back to the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs as shown in Fig.
  • the desktop components are all removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
  • the user can also manually add some desktop components on the desktop page back to the desktop space. Then, when a desktop page contains a large number of desktop components, and only a few desktop components are what the user wants to store in a desktop space, the user can remove all the desktops in this desktop page first by removing the desktop page. Components are removed from this desktop space at one time, and then a few desktop components in this desktop page that want to be stored in this desktop space are manually added back to this desktop component.
  • the above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove one or more desktop pages from the desktop space to which they belong without switching the desktop pages.
  • FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C exemplarily show other electronic devices 100 for adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1210 .
  • a user interface 1210 For the user interface 1210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9C.
  • the user interface 1210 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1211 , a thumbnail desktop page 1212 , a thumbnail desktop page 1213 , a thumbnail dock 1214 and a zoom component 1215 .
  • the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs.
  • the abbreviated desktop page1211 to the abbreviated desktop page1213 and the abbreviated dock1214 belong to the same desktop space.
  • the scaling component 1215 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to further zoom out each thumbnail desktop page, and display thumbnails of multiple desktop pages on one user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1220 shown in FIG. 12B.
  • the user interface 1220 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1221, a page add/remove component 1222, a thumbnail desktop page 1223, a page add/remove component 1224, a thumbnail desktop page 1225, a page add/remove component 1226, a thumbnail desktop page 1227, a page Add/remove components 1228, abbreviated dock 1214. in:
  • the thumbnail desktop page 1221 may be a thumbnail image obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1211 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 1223 may be a thumbnail obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1212 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100.
  • the thumbnail desktop page 1225 may be a thumbnail obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1213 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100 .
  • the thumbnail desktop page 1227 may be a thumbnail obtained by the electronic device 100 further reducing a thumbnail desktop page (not shown in FIG. 12A ) on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 1213 .
  • the page adding/removing component 1222, the page adding/removing component 1224, the page adding/removing component 1226, and the page adding/removing component 1228 can be respectively used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove Except thumbnail desktop page1221, thumbnail desktop page1223, thumbnail desktop page1225, and thumbnail desktop page1227.
  • thumbnail desktop page1221, thumbnail desktop page1223, thumbnail desktop page1225, and thumbnail desktop page1227 are examples of the page adding/removing components.
  • the page adding/removing component 1222 , the page adding/removing component 1224 , the page adding/removing component 1226 , and the page adding/removing component 1228 are all in an adding state.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1220 shown in FIG. 12C . Comparing Fig. 12B and Fig. 12C, it can be known that when detecting the user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1222 in the adding state shown in Fig. 12B, the electronic device 100 can change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1222 to Removed state shown in 12C.
  • the page adding/removing component 1222 being in the removed state may indicate that the thumbnail desktop page 1221 is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may also change the display style of the desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page 1221 to a removed display style.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 10B . Combining the scenarios shown in FIG. 10B to FIG. 10D, it can be known that the electronic device 100 can transfer the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1221 shown in FIG. removed from the .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the user operation for triggering the electronic device 100 to exit the state shown in FIG. 12C where a user interface includes multiple thumbnail desktop pages.
  • the above user operation may also be a user operation acting on the user interface 1220 to spread two fingers outward.
  • the electronic device 100 may shrink all desktop pages included in the full desktop space and display them on a user interface.
  • the display style of the desktop components placed on each desktop page in the full desktop space, and the display status of the page adding/removing components used to add or remove the desktop page can be determined by the electronic device 100
  • the desktop components contained in the current desktop space are determined.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located in the above-mentioned user interface in an unremoved display style.
  • the electronic device 100 may display desktop components not included in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located in a removed display style on the aforementioned one user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine that the display state of the page addition/removal component used to add or remove this desktop page is the aforementioned removal state . Otherwise, the electronic device 100 may determine that the display status of the page adding/removing component for adding or removing this desktop page is the aforementioned adding status.
  • the full amount of desktop space contains a large number of desktop pages
  • the electronic device 100 may also display reduced thumbnails of partial desktop pages of the full amount of desktop space on a user interface.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of thumbnail desktop pages displayed on a user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can display thumbnails of multiple desktop pages on one user interface.
  • the user can preview multiple desktop pages on one user interface, and remove or add back one or more desktop pages in one desktop space.
  • the user can remove or add the multiple desktop pages that need to be removed or added one by one without switching back and forth between different desktop pages on the user interface.
  • the above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop components placed on one or more desktop pages in the entire desktop space of the electronic device 100, that it belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock contained in a desktop space desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the desktop components belonging to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space on the desktop page of the desktop space, and remove the desktop components related to the desktop space in the desktop space.
  • the desktop components added in the dock do not belong to the desktop components of the same scene.
  • FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1210 .
  • a user interface 1210 For the user interface 1210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 12A.
  • the user interface 1210 may include an automatic selection component 1216 .
  • the automatic selection component 1216 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components placed on the fully displayed thumbnail desktop page in the current user interface 1210 in the current desktop space.
  • the one or more desktop components may be desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components added to the dock contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. Subsequent embodiments of the present application will specifically introduce a method for judging whether a desktop component and a desktop component added to a dock belong to the same scene. Let's not expand here.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1210 shown in FIG. 13B .
  • the electronic device 100 will abbreviate some desktop components on the desktop page1212 (such as music application icons, sports health application icons, video application icons, smart life application icons, AA bank application icons, AA game application icons, BB game
  • the display style of the application icon, the map application icon, the AA chat application icon, and the AA music application icon is changed to the removed display style. It can be seen that the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. The electronic device 100 removes some of the above desktop components from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1212 in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs.
  • the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1212 does not include the aforementioned removed partial desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the aforementioned part of the desktop components among all the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 according to the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock 1214 .
  • the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock1214 include three desktop components: AA note application icon, AA reading application icon and document editing application icon. These three desktop components may be desktop components in a learning scenario.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the desktop components belonging to the learning scene and the desktop components not belonging to the learning scene among all the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 . Then, the electronic device 100 may remove the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the learning scene from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 can also retain the above-mentioned desktop components belonging to the learning scene in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1214 belongs, and remove all desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page1212 from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1214 belongs but belong to The desktop components in the learning scene are added back.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine which desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 are manually added or removed by the user after the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state this time.
  • the electronic device 100 can delete the desktop components manually added or removed by the user on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 according to the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock 1214
  • the above-mentioned partial desktop components are determined in the desktop components other than .
  • the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state, and is currently in the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 currently places 20 desktop components on a thumbnail desktop page fully displayed on the user interface. These 20 desktop components are all displayed in the unremoved display style in this thumbnail desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may change the display style of these three desktop components from a non-removed display style to a removed display style. That is, the user manually removes the three desktop components from desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the desktop belonging to the same scene as the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space A among the 17 desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page Components, and desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components placed in the dock of desktop space A.
  • the above-mentioned 17 desktop components are desktop components in this thumbnail desktop page except the above-mentioned 3 desktop components that are manually removed by the user.
  • the user operation acting on the automatically selected component may not change the result of the user manually adding or removing the desktop component after entering the desktop editing state this time.
  • the user operation acting on the automatic selection of components may change the result of adding or removing desktop components before entering the desktop editing state this time.
  • the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state, and is currently in the desktop space B.
  • the electronic device 100 currently places 10 desktop components on a thumbnail desktop page fully displayed on the user interface.
  • Desktop component A among the 10 desktop components is displayed in a removed display style, and the other 9 desktop components are displayed in a non-removed display style.
  • the aforementioned desktop component A is removed from the desktop space B before the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state this time.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the desktop belonging to the same scene as the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space B among the 10 desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page Components, and desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components placed in the dock of desktop space B.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the desktop component A and the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space B belong to the same scene, and the desktop component B and the dock of the desktop space B among the nine desktop components displayed in the unremoved display style The desktop components placed in do not belong to the same scene, the electronic device 100 can change the display style of desktop component A from the removed display style to the non-removed display style, and change the display style of desktop component B from the non-removed The display style changes to the removed display style. That is, the electronic device 100 can add the desktop component A back to the desktop space B, and remove the desktop component B from the desktop space B.
  • the automatic selection component 1216 can be used to completely display the thumbnail desktop page after switching the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located (such as adding, removing).
  • adjusting the desktop component may include: changing the display style of the desktop component from a removed display style to a non-removed display style (that is, adding) on the thumbnail desktop page, changing the display style of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page The style is changed from the non-removed display style to the removed display style (ie, removed).
  • the automatic selection component 1216 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to adjust (such as add, remove) one or more desktop components in all desktop components contained in the entire desktop space in the current desktop space. That is to say, when a user operation acting on the automatic selection component 1216 is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine from all the desktop components contained in the total desktop space that the electronic device 100 is currently located in the desktop space, for example, the thumbnail dock1214 belongs to In the desktop space, the desktop components added in the included dock belong to the desktop components of the same scene. Further, the electronic device 100 may adjust all desktop components in the full desktop space according to the method for adjusting desktop components in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the user may first place one or more desktop components in a scene on a dock of a newly created desktop space. Then, the user may trigger the electronic device 100 to filter all the desktop components in the above-mentioned one scenario from all the desktop components of the electronic device 100 through the automatic selection component 1216 .
  • the electronic device 100 may keep all desktop components in the above-mentioned one scene in this one desktop space, and remove all desktop components that do not belong to the above-mentioned one scene from this one desktop space. In this way, users can realize one-click construction of a desktop space used to describe a scene. This can effectively simplify the user operation for the user to construct the desktop space, and improve the efficiency of constructing the desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may provide an option for the user to select whether the scope to trigger the electronic device 100 to adjust according to the added desktop components in the dock of the current desktop space is all the desktop components contained in the entire desktop space, or the current The desktop component on the desktop page where the user interface is fully displayed.
  • the user interface 1210 may include a global automatic selection component and a current page automatic selection component.
  • the above-mentioned global automatic selection component can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to determine the desktop component that needs to be adjusted among all the desktop components contained in the full desktop space according to the desktop component that has been added in the dock of the current desktop space, and to adjust the above-mentioned desktop component that needs to be adjusted. Components are adjusted.
  • the above-mentioned current page automatic selection component can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to determine the desktop component that needs to be adjusted among the desktop components on the desktop page fully displayed in the current user interface according to the desktop components that have been added in the dock of the current desktop space, and The desktop components that need to be adjusted above are adjusted.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression forms of the above options.
  • the electronic device 100 when in a desktop space, can filter for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, which is the same as the desktop that has been added in the dock of this desktop space.
  • Components belong to the desktop component of the same scene.
  • the electronic device 100 may retain the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that are different from the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space.
  • Desktop components belonging to the same scene The above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
  • FIG. 13C exemplarily shows a flow chart of a method for electronic device 100 to adjust a desktop component in a desktop space according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method for adjusting a desktop component may include steps S1310-S1350. in:
  • the electronic device 100 receives a user operation acting on the automatic selection component.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine whether the added desktop component is included in the dock of the desktop space A, where the desktop space A is the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the current desktop space.
  • the current desktop space may be the desktop space to which the fully displayed dock on the current user interface belongs. For example, the electronic device 100 determines that the current desktop space is desktop space A. The electronic device 100 may determine whether there is a desktop component in the added APP area of the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine, from the desktop component group A, desktop components that belong to the same scene as the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A, and the desktop component group A includes one or more desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine the scene corresponding to the desktop space A. For example, if the added desktop component in the dock of the desktop space A is a desktop component in an entertainment scene, the electronic device 100 can determine that the desktop space A corresponds to an entertainment scene. That is, the user wants to construct the desktop space A as an entertainment desktop space describing an entertainment scene. Then, only the desktop components in the entertainment scene can be placed on the desktop page included in the entertainment desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine a range to adjust the desktop components of the desktop space A according to the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the adjustment range may be the above-mentioned desktop component group A.
  • the desktop components included in the above desktop component group A may be: all desktop components on a fully displayed thumbnail desktop page (eg, thumbnail desktop page 1212 shown in FIG. 13A ) on the current user interface.
  • the desktop components included in the above desktop component group A may be: the desktop components manually added or removed by the user after entering the desktop editing state on the abbreviated desktop page completely displayed on the current user interface External desktop components.
  • the desktop components contained in the above desktop component group A may be: desktop components contained in the global desktop space. This application tries not to limit the desktop components contained in the above desktop component group A.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop component group A the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components added to the dock of the desktop space A.
  • FIG. 13D exemplarily shows a flowchart of a method for the electronic device 100 to determine from the desktop component group A a desktop component belonging to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the method may include steps S1331-S1333. in:
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the categories to which the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A belong, for example category 1 and category 2.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the category to which the desktop component belongs through the application category table. For the specific process, reference may be made to the introduction about the application category table in the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that the categories of the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A belong to category 1 and category 2 .
  • the electronic device 100 may determine a category related to category 1 and category 2, such as category 3.
  • category 3 may include: categories having a containment relationship, and categories that can assist each other in a scene.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine categories related to category 1 and category 2 in the application category table.
  • the categories related to category 1 and category 2 in the application category table include category 3 .
  • the above related categories may include: categories with containment relationship, categories that can assist each other in a scene.
  • the above-mentioned categories having a containment relationship may indicate that one category contains another category.
  • the entertainment category includes a music category, a game category, and the like. Then, the entertainment category has a containment relationship with the music category.
  • the entertainment category also has an inclusion relationship with the game category.
  • the aforementioned categories that can assist each other in a scenario may be represented in a usage scenario of desktop components of one category, and desktop components of another category may provide auxiliary functions.
  • the video category and the screen projection category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene.
  • the user when the user uses the desktop component of the video category to play a video, the user may need to use the desktop component of the screen projection category to project the played video to other display devices.
  • the sports category and the music category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene.
  • the user may need to use the desktop component of the music category to listen to music when using the desktop component of the sports category to exercise.
  • the tourism category and the accommodation category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene.
  • the user uses the desktop component of the tourism category to view tourist attractions, he may need to use the desktop component of the accommodation category to book a hotel at the location of the tourist attraction.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the correlation between categories of desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the desktop components belonging to category 1, category 2, and category 3 in the desktop component group A, wherein the desktop components belonging to any one of category 1, category 2, and category 3 in the desktop component group A are related to the desktop
  • the added desktop components in the dock of space A belong to the same scene.
  • desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to any one of category 1, category 2, and category 3 do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added to the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also determine the desktop components belonging to any one of category 1 and category 2 in the desktop component group A as desktop components belonging to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 can determine whether different desktop components belong to the same scene by judging whether the categories of the desktop components are the same. For example, the electronic device 100 can determine whether the category of a desktop component is the same as that of a desktop component added in a dock. If they are the same, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. If not, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component does not belong to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. Optionally, if the categories of the two desktop components are not the same, the electronic device 100 may also determine whether the two desktop components belong to the same scene by judging whether the categories of the two desktop components are related.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine whether a category of a desktop component is related to a category of a desktop component added in a dock. If relevant, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. If the category of a desktop component is neither the same as nor related to the category of a desktop component added in a dock, the electronic device 100 may determine that the desktop component and the added desktop component in a dock do not belong to the same scene.
  • the electronic device 100 may also use other methods to determine whether a desktop component and a desktop component added in a dock belong to the same scene.
  • the electronic device 100 may prompt to add a desktop component to the dock of the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may prompt the user to add a desktop component in the dock. Understandably, if there is no added desktop component in the dock of desktop space A, the electronic device 100 cannot determine the scene corresponding to the desktop space A, and thus cannot help the user adjust the desktop component on the desktop page of desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove the desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space A from the desktop space A, and remove the The added desktop components in the dock belong to the desktop components of the same scene and are determined as the desktop components included in the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the display style of the desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of the desktop space A to be removed. The display style of . If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the same scene is originally the removed display style, the electronic device 100 keeps the display style of the desktop component as the removed display style. If the display styles of the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the same scene are originally the non-removed display styles, the electronic device 100 changes the display styles of the desktop components from the non-removed display styles to the removed display styles.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the display style of the desktop component in the desktop component group A that belongs to the same scene as the added desktop component in the dock of the desktop space A as the display style that has not been removed. If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene is originally the non-removed display style, the electronic device 100 keeps the display style of the desktop component as the non-removed display style. If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene is the removed display style, the electronic device 100 may change the display style of the desktop component from the removed display style to the non-removed display style.
  • the desktop components displayed by the electronic device 100 on the desktop page of the desktop space A may include the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene, and not include the aforementioned desktop components not belonging to the same scene.
  • the electronic device 100 can filter out for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may retain the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that are different from the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space.
  • the above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop components contained in this desktop space that the removed desktop component belongs to the same category. desktop space. The electronic device 100 may remove the desktop component belonging to the same category as the removed desktop component from this one desktop space. In response to a user operation of adding a desktop to a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may determine a desktop component belonging to the same category as the added desktop component from the removed desktop components in the desktop space. The electronic device 100 may add a desktop component belonging to the same category as the above-mentioned added desktop component to this one desktop space.
  • the above method can help the user adjust the desktop components in the desktop space more quickly, so that the desktop space describing a scene can be efficiently constructed.
  • the electronic device 100 may adjust the positions of the desktop components included in the desktop space on the desktop page. This can make the desktop layout more compact, and reduce the situation that some desktop components are removed and leave empty space on the desktop page, which makes the desktop layout messy.
  • 14A to 14F exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the position of the desktop component on the desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1410 .
  • a user interface 1410 refer to the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D.
  • the user interface 1410 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1411 , a thumbnail dock 1412 and a scene setting component 1413 .
  • the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
  • the desktop components (such as music application icon, video application icon, AA game application icon, BB game application icon and AA music application icon) displayed in the removed display style on the thumbnail desktop page1411 are in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1412 belongs Removed desktop components.
  • the scene setting component 1413 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the arrangement order of the desktop components used to set the desktop space on the desktop page, the name of the desktop space, wallpaper, and the status of the always on display (AOD) state of the desktop space. Set up components.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the scene setting frame 1420 shown in FIG. 14B on the user interface 1410 .
  • the scene setting frame 1420 may include a return component 1421, a screen projection component 1422, a desktop space name setting component 1423, a desktop component sorting setting component 1424, a notification setting component 1425, a wallpaper setting component 1426, an AOD setting component 1427, a theme setting component 1428, and more.
  • Multi-setting component 1429, delete component 1430 in:
  • the return component 1421 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the upper user interface, that is, to display the user interface 1410 shown in FIG. 14A .
  • the screen projection component 1422 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to project the desktop components contained in the current desktop space to other display devices.
  • the desktop space name setting component 1423 can be used to set the name of the desktop space.
  • the desktop space name setting component 1423 may include a renaming component 1423A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for setting the name of the desktop space. This way, the user can set the name of the space on the desktop.
  • the desktop component sorting setting component 1424 can be used to select the sorting method of the desktop components.
  • the desktop component order setting component 1424 may include an expand component 1424A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting a sorting manner of desktop components.
  • the sorting manner of the desktop components may include rearranging on all pages and rearranging only on the current page. This way, the user can set how the desktop components are sorted.
  • a notification settings component 1425 can be used to select from which desktop components notifications are displayed.
  • the notification settings component 1425 may include an expansion component 1425A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from. Wherein, in the case of being in one desktop space, the electronic device 100 may only display notifications of desktop components contained in this one desktop space. Alternatively, the electronic device 100 may display notifications of all desktop components.
  • the wallpaper setting component 1426 can be used to set the wallpaper of the desktop space.
  • the AOD setting component 1427 can be used to set the AOD state of the desktop space.
  • the theme setting component 1428 can be used to set the theme of the desktop space.
  • the theme of the desktop space may include one or more of the following: display style of desktop components, font lock screen wallpaper, lock screen prompt sound and so on.
  • More settings component 1429 can be used to view other components for setting the properties of the desktop space. For example, a component used to set the maximum number of desktop components that can be placed on the desktop page of a desktop space, a component used to set the switching effect of the desktop page of a desktop space, and so on.
  • Delete component 1430 can be used to delete a desktop space.
  • one or more of the components shown in FIG. 14B may be included in the scene setting block 1420 .
  • the usage scenarios of the desktop component sorting setting component 1424 are firstly introduced below.
  • the usage scenarios of other components in the scenario setting block 1420 will be specifically introduced in subsequent embodiments.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the sorting method option box 1440 shown in FIG. 14C on the user interface 1410 .
  • the sort mode option box 1440 may include a return component 1441 , a sort mode A selection component 1442 and a sort mode B selection component 1443 . in:
  • the return component 1441 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the upper user interface, that is, to display the user interface 1410 shown in FIG. 14B .
  • the sort method A selection component 1442 can be used to select the sort method to rearrange on all pages.
  • the selected state of the sorting mode A selection component 1442 may indicate that the electronic device 100 can adjust the positions of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page according to the sorting mode rearranged on all pages.
  • the sorting mode B selection component 1443 can be used to select the sorting mode to be rearranged only on the current page.
  • the selected state of the sorting mode B selection component 1442 may indicate that the electronic device 100 can adjust the position of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page in a sorting mode that only rearranges on the current page.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display style of the selected component for selecting a sorting mode.
  • the display style of the sorting method B selection component 1443 is a selected display style
  • the display style of the sorting method A selection component 1442 is an unselected display style.
  • the electronic device 100 can display all the desktop components contained in a desktop space in order from left to right on the desktop page. , and place them one by one in order from top to bottom. After the position of the desktop components on the desktop page is adjusted according to the above-mentioned sorting method of rearranging on all pages, there is no space between any two adjacent desktop components where one or more desktop components can be placed.
  • a vacancy may refer to the location of the vacancy on the desktop page where a desktop component can be placed, but no desktop component is placed.
  • FIG. 14D exemplarily shows a process in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the positions of the desktop components in a rearranged sorting manner on all pages.
  • a desktop space (such as desktop space A) includes desktop page1 , desktop page2 and desktop page3 . All desktop components of desktop space A can be placed on desktop page1-desktop page3.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove some desktop components in desktop page1 , desktop page2 , and desktop page3 from desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned removed desktop components in a removed display style on the thumbnail desktop pages corresponding to the desktop page1, desktop page2, and desktop page3.
  • the remaining desktop components in desktop space A may include: 6 desktop components that have not been removed on desktop page1, and 6 desktop components that have not been removed on desktop page2 5 desktop components. All desktop components on desktop page3 are removed from desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may rearrange the unremoved desktop components in all desktop pages (ie, the remaining desktop components in the desktop space A) to obtain the desktop page 4 shown in FIG. 14D .
  • the electronic device 100 can place the remaining desktop components in the desktop space A on the desktop page 4 in order from left to right , and place them one by one in order from top to bottom. If the number of remaining desktop components in desktop space A exceeds the maximum number of desktop components that can be placed on a desktop page, the electronic device 100 can place the unplaced desktop components in desktop space A after a desktop page is full. The desktop components on this desktop page are placed in another desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 places the unremoved desktop components in all desktop pages on the desktop page4, the electronic device 100 can follow the steps from left to right and from top to bottom on the desktop page4. In the following position order, the unremoved desktop components on desktop page1 are placed first, and then the unremoved desktop components on desktop page2 are placed.
  • the desktop page1 may be the previous desktop page of the desktop page2.
  • the desktop page2 may be the previous desktop page of the desktop page3.
  • Desktop page1 is a previous desktop page of desktop page2, which can indicate that when displaying desktop page1, electronic device 100 can display desktop page2 in response to the user operation of sliding to the left to switch desktop pages (that is, desktop page1 is located on the left side of desktop page2).
  • the electronic device 100 may place these desktop components on the desktop page4 according to the sequence in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page1.
  • the order in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page 1 can be expressed that the display order of the upper desktop components in the desktop page 1 is prior to the display order of the lower desktop components in the desktop page 1, and the display order of the left desktop components in the desktop page 1 is The order of is prior to the order displayed by the desktop components on the right side of the desktop page1.
  • the process of placing the unremoved desktop components on the desktop page2 by the electronic device 100 may refer to the above-mentioned process of placing the unremoved desktop components on the desktop page1.
  • the electronic device 100 may adjust the positions of the desktop components contained in the desktop space on the desktop page according to the above-mentioned rearrangement manner on all pages, so as to make the desktop layout more compact.
  • desktop page 4 all the desktop components included in the desktop space A can be displayed on a desktop page (ie, desktop page4).
  • desktop page ie, desktop page4
  • This can facilitate the user to view the desktop components of a desktop space, and avoid the situation that the desktop components contained in a desktop space are scattered in different desktop pages, and the user needs to switch desktop pages back and forth to find the desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 may automatically adjust the position of the desktop component on the desktop page for the user. In this way, the user does not need to manually sort and move the desktop components scattered on multiple desktop pages to one desktop page one by one.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the unremoved desktops in each desktop page contained in a desktop space Components are placed one by one on the corresponding desktop page in order of position from left to right and from top to bottom. After the position of the desktop components on the desktop page is adjusted according to the above-mentioned sorting method of rearranging only on the current page, there is no space between any two adjacent desktop components where one or more desktop components can be placed. Moreover, only the desktop components that have not been removed from the desktop page can be placed in a desktop page.
  • FIG. 14E exemplarily shows a process in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the positions of desktop components in a sorting manner that only rearranges on the current page.
  • desktop space A includes desktop page1-desktop page3.
  • desktop page1-desktop page3 For the process that the electronic device 100 removes some desktop components in the desktop page1, desktop page2, and desktop page3 in the desktop space A, reference may be made to the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 14D above. After the above user operation of removing desktop components, there are 6 unremoved desktop components on desktop page1, 5 unremoved desktop components on desktop page2, and all desktop components in desktop page3 are removed.
  • the electronic device 100 may place the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 one by one from left to right and from top to bottom on the desktop page1. Wherein, the electronic device 100 can place the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 on the desktop page1 according to the order in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page1, so that there is no place between any two adjacent desktop components. Empty slots for several desktop components.
  • the method for the electronic device 100 to adjust the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page2 on the desktop page2 reference may be made to the above-mentioned method for adjusting the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 on the desktop page1.
  • the desktop components in the desktop page3 are all removed, which may be equivalent to the removal of the desktop page3 in the desktop space A.
  • the desktop pages displayed may include desktop page1 and desktop page2, but not desktop page3.
  • the electronic device 100 can adjust the desktop components on each desktop page included in a desktop space, so that the layout of the unremoved desktop components in a desktop page is more compact in this desktop page. Moreover, after removing a desktop component in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may automatically adjust the positions of the desktop component on each desktop page for the user. In this way, the user does not need to sort manually, and arranges the scattered desktop components on a desktop page compactly and neatly.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the status of the sorting mode B selection component 1443 as a selected state. Further, in response to the user operation acting on the return component 1441, the electronic device 100 may display the user operation described in FIG. 14B.
  • the desktop component sorting setting component 1424 may include the sorting manner of the desktop components currently used by the electronic device 100 .
  • the rearranged sort method changes to the rearranged sort method only on the current page.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1450 shown in FIG. 14F .
  • the desktop 1450 may include a desktop page1451 and a dock1452.
  • the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1452 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 can adjust the position of the unremoved desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page 1411 shown in FIG. 14A according to the aforementioned sorting method of rearranging only on the current page, to obtain the desktop page 1451 shown in FIG. 14F .
  • the positions of the desktop components on the desktop page 914 shown in FIG. 9E are not adjusted by the electronic device 100 . Comparing the desktop page 914 shown in FIG. 9E with the desktop page 1451 shown in FIG. 14F , it can be seen that the position where the removed desktop component was originally displayed in the desktop page 914 is a vacancy. The unremoved desktop components in the desktop page914 are distributed in scattered positions, which affects the beauty of the desktop. The positions of the desktop components that have not been removed in the desktop page 1451 are adjusted by the electronic device 100, and the distribution positions are relatively compact.
  • the electronic device 100 can still display a thumbnail desktop page with full desktop space when entering the desktop editing state again.
  • the display style of the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page may be determined by the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. That is, the position of the desktop component of a desktop space on the desktop page is changed without affecting the position of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page in the desktop editing state.
  • the position of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page in the desktop editing state may also be changed as the position of the desktop component on the desktop page changes after exiting the desktop editing state.
  • a desktop space may include a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components.
  • the desktop components in the dock where the resident desktop components are placed and the desktop components in the dock where the most recently used desktop components are placed are desktop components included in the aforementioned one desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may first display a blank dock for placing resident desktop components. Users can add desktop components to this blank dock where resident desktop components are placed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display on the desktop a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for recently used desktop components in this desktop space when it is in the desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine which desktop components are recently used in this desktop space, and place the recently used desktop components in this desktop space in the dock where the recently used desktop components are placed in this desktop space. When the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may change the desktop component in the dock where the most recently used desktop component is placed to the most recently used desktop component in the desktop space after switching.
  • the user can quickly find and open the recently used desktop component in the desktop space through the dock where the recently used desktop component is placed in the desktop space. This can help users focus on one scene and reduce the interference of desktop components in other scenes to users.
  • a desktop space may also include a negative screen.
  • the negative screen of a desktop space may contain relevant content of the desktop component in this desktop space.
  • the relevant content of the above-mentioned desktop component may include the entry of one or more functions in the desktop component (such as the bus card in the wallet APP), the running status of the desktop component, the message notification of the desktop component, and so on. That is to say, the negative one screen in the electronic device 100 can be switched along with the switching of the desktop space. When the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may display a negative screen of the desktop space after switching.
  • the electronic device 100 can project a single desktop space to other display devices.
  • the above display device may be an electronic device with a display screen.
  • 15A to 15D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios where the electronic device 100 projects a desktop space to the display device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1410 .
  • a user interface 1410 For the user interface 1410, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 14B.
  • a scene setting box 1420 and a thumbnail dock 1412 may be included in the user interface 1410 .
  • the scene setting box 1420 can include a screen casting component 1422 .
  • the electronic device 100 may search for display devices available for screen casting, and display a device option box 1510 shown in FIG. 15B on the user interface 1410 .
  • the device option box 1510 may include a device option display area 1511 , a search component 1512 and a cancel component 1513 . in:
  • the device option display area 1511 may contain device options corresponding to one or more display devices. For example, display device 200 option, display device 201 option, display device 202 option.
  • the one or more display devices may be searched by the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may project the desktop space to the display device.
  • the search component 1512 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for display devices that can be used for screen projection.
  • the cancel component 1512 can be used to cancel screen projection.
  • the electronic device 100 may project the current desktop space (ie, the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs) to the display device 200 .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation manner of screen projection by the electronic device 100 .
  • the implementation manner of screen projection may include: screen projection by miracast, screen projection by digital living network alliance (DLAN) projection, screen projection by AirPlay, and the like.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 1520 .
  • Desktop 1520 may include dock 1521 .
  • the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs.
  • the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs is the desktop space to which the aforementioned abbreviated dock1412 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 projects the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs to the display device 200 .
  • the display device 200 may display a desktop 1530 . It can be seen that only the dock and the desktop page contained in the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs are displayed on desktop 1530 .
  • the simplified displayed dock next to the dock 1521 on the desktop 1520 is not projected on the display device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 opens a desktop component included in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs, and displays the user interface of the desktop component, the content displayed on the screen of the display device 200 may be updated accordingly, and the user interface of the desktop component is also displayed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the dock and the desktop page included in the non-projected desktop space after switching.
  • the display device 200 may still display the projected desktop space.
  • the dock and the desktop page included in the above-mentioned unprojected desktop space will not be displayed on the display device 200 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1520 shown in FIG. 15D .
  • the electronic device 100 fully displays the desktop components contained in the dock1522 and simplifies the display of the dock1521 shown in FIG. 15C .
  • the electronic device 100 switches from the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs to the desktop space to which dock1522 belongs.
  • the desktop space that dock1521 belongs to is the desktop space that the user chooses to cast the screen.
  • the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs is the desktop space that has not been projected.
  • the display device 200 may still display the desktop 1530 . That is, the display device 200 can display the dock and the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs.
  • a screen-casting APP is installed in the electronic device 100 .
  • the screen-casting APP can provide the function of selecting one or more desktop spaces for screen-casting. That is to say, when the electronic device 100 includes multiple desktop spaces, the user can choose to project one or more desktop spaces to other display devices.
  • each desktop space can contain desktop components in different scenarios.
  • the user can select the desktop space to be cast when casting the screen.
  • the desktop space in the electronic device 100 that is not selected for screen projection will not be projected to other display devices. This can meet the requirement that the user does not want to cast relatively private content in the electronic device 100 on other display devices during the screen casting process.
  • the user can freely switch between the projected desktop space and the non-projected desktop space in the electronic device 100, and does not need to worry about content that is inconvenient to project on the non-projected desktop space displayed on other display devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may also share one or more desktop spaces among the multiple desktop spaces with other electronic devices.
  • the process of the electronic device 100 sharing a desktop space with other electronic devices reference may be made to the above-mentioned process of projecting a desktop space to other display devices. I won't go into details here.
  • the user can use the notification setting component 1425 shown in FIG. 14B to select whether the electronic device 100 is in a desktop space, whether to display only the message notifications of the desktop components contained in this desktop space, or to display the message notification of the desktop components contained in the electronic device 100. Message notifications for all desktop components in .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from.
  • the user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from reference may be made to the user interface for selecting a sorting manner of desktop components shown in FIG. 14C .
  • the user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from may include options: only display message notifications of desktop components included in the current desktop space, and display message notifications of all desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 can only display this desktop space when it is in this desktop space Message notifications for included desktop components.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive message notifications of all desktop components in the electronic device 100 . If the message notification display range of the desktop space A is to only display the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space A, then the electronic device 100 may filter out the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space A and present them immediately.
  • the electronic device 100 may temporarily store received but not yet displayed message notifications, for example, message notifications of desktop components included in desktop spaces other than desktop space A.
  • the message notifications that have been received but not yet displayed may be stored in the message storage module to be displayed. After a message notification in the message storage module to be displayed is displayed, the electronic device 100 may remove the displayed message notification from the message storage module to be displayed.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the display range of the message notification of desktop space B. If the message notification display range of the desktop space B is to only display the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space B, then the electronic device 100 can filter out the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space B from the above-mentioned display message storage module, And display after switching to desktop space B. When in the desktop space B, the electronic device 100 may filter out the message notifications of the desktop components included in the desktop space B from all received message notifications, and present them immediately. The electronic device 100 may store the message notifications that do not belong to the desktop components contained in the desktop space B among all the message notifications received when it is in the desktop space B to the above-mentioned message storage module to be displayed.
  • electronic device 100 may display all message notifications in the message storage module to be displayed after switching to desktop space B. When in the desktop space B, the electronic device 100 may immediately present the received message notification of the desktop component without storing it in the to-be-displayed message storage module.
  • the message notifications stored in the message storage module to be displayed may have a storage time limit.
  • the electronic device 100 may remove message notifications that have not been displayed beyond the storage time limit from the message storage module to be displayed.
  • different types of message notifications may have different storage time limits in the message storage module to be displayed.
  • Types of message notifications may include social communication, service reminders, and information marketing.
  • the aforementioned social communication message notifications may include point-to-point chat messages between users, voice call invitations, video call invitations, incoming call reminders, and the like.
  • the message notifications of the above-mentioned service reminders can include thematic content subscribed by the user (such as live broadcast start reminders, book updates), travel notifications (such as flight change reminders, hotel check-in reminders), health data notifications (such as steps, calories burned), Work item notifications (such as meeting reminders, to-do reminders), order information and logistics status notifications, financial change notifications (such as funds arriving, transaction reminders), system notifications (such as low battery reminders), etc.
  • the above-mentioned information marketing notifications may include news, financial trends, product promotions, content recommendations not subscribed by users themselves, and the like.
  • the storage time limit of the above-mentioned social communication message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may be infinitely long. That is, the electronic device 100 will not remove the message notification belonging to the social communication category in the message storage module to be displayed before it is displayed. This can prevent the user from missing messages sent to the user by relatives, friends, and the like.
  • the storage time limit of the above-mentioned message notifications of the service reminder type in the message storage module to be displayed may also be infinite. This prevents users from missing important service reminders.
  • the storage time limit for the above-mentioned service reminder type message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may also be a preset time period. The aforementioned preset duration may be set by the user.
  • the storage time limit for the above-mentioned information marketing message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may be a preset time period. It is understandable that information marketing notifications are often time-sensitive. Information marketing messages that are seen by users after a certain period of time may not be useful to users. If a large number of outdated information marketing messages (such as news from a week ago, product promotions, etc.) are presented on the interface after the user switches the desktop space, it may cause trouble to the user. If the message notification of the information marketing category exceeds the preset time period in the message storage module to be displayed, the electronic device 100 can delete the message notification of the information marketing category. This can reduce the interference of expired information marketing messages to users.
  • the electronic device 100 when it is in a desktop space, it may only display the message notifications of the desktop components included in the desktop space. This can help the user to better focus on one scene, and reduce the desktop components contained in the desktop space corresponding to other scenes from disturbing the user's focus on this one scene.
  • one or more of the following attributes of a desktop space can be modified: name, wallpaper, AOD status, theme, desktop page switching effect, and the like.
  • the attributes of different desktop spaces are independent of each other. Users can set the properties of each desktop space individually.
  • 16A to 16G exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenes in which the electronic device 100 modifies the wallpaper of the desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1410 .
  • User interface 1410 may include a scene settings box 1420 and a thumbnail dock 1412 .
  • the scene setting frame 1420 may include a wallpaper setting component 1426 , an AOD setting component 1427 , and a theme setting component 1428 .
  • the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
  • the components for setting properties in the scene setting box 1420 can be used to set the properties of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
  • the wallpaper component 1426 can display the wallpaper used by the desktop space to which the dock 1412 belongs. As shown in FIG. 16A, the wallpaper component 1426 contains a solid color (eg, white) picture without a pattern. This may indicate that the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1412 belongs is a solid color picture without a pattern.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a wallpaper setting frame 1610 shown in FIG. 16B on the user interface 1410 .
  • One or more wallpaper options may be included in the wallpaper setting box 1610 .
  • the wallpaper setting frame 1610 may also include a determining component 1614 and a canceling component 1615 . in:
  • the one or more wallpaper options may include wallpaper options 1611 , wallpaper options 1612 , wallpaper options 1613 .
  • the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1611 is a solid color picture without a pattern.
  • the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1612 is a picture with a cat pattern.
  • the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1613 is a picture with a puppy pattern.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the display state of the one wallpaper option as a selected state.
  • the determining component 1612 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to set the wallpaper corresponding to the selected wallpaper option as the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
  • Cancel 1615 can be used to cancel the wallpaper of the desktop space to which dock1412 belongs.
  • the wallpaper option 1611 is selected.
  • the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1611 is the wallpaper currently used by the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 16C. Wherein, the electronic device 100 may change the selected wallpaper option from wallpaper option 1611 to wallpaper option 1612 .
  • the electronic device 100 may set the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1612 as the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the dock 1412 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16D .
  • the desktop 1620 may include a desktop dock 1621 , a page 1622 , and a page indicator 1624 .
  • the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs.
  • Desktop page1622 and dock1621 belong to the same desktop space.
  • the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs is the desktop space to which the aforementioned abbreviated dock1412 belongs.
  • the wallpaper currently used in the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs is a picture with a cat pattern.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16E .
  • the desktop 1620 includes a desktop page 1623 .
  • the electronic device 100 switches the desktop page displayed on the desktop 1620 from the desktop page 1622 to the desktop page 1623 .
  • Desktop page1623 is still the desktop page of the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 can still display the wallpaper (ie, a picture with a cat pattern) of the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs on the desktop 1620 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16G .
  • the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs on the desktop 1620 .
  • the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which dock1625 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display 1625 on the desktop 1620 the wallpaper (that is, a solid color picture without a pattern) of the desktop space to which it belongs. It can be seen that when the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may also change the wallpaper displayed on the desktop to the wallpaper of the switched desktop space.
  • the user can respectively set the AOD state and theme of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs through the above-mentioned AOD setting component 1427 and theme setting component 1428 .
  • AOD setting component 1427 and theme setting component 1428 For the setting process of AOD state and theme, please refer to the above setting process of wallpaper.
  • the user can manually set attributes such as the name, wallpaper, AOD status, and theme of a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may present the attributes of the desktop space on the desktop. Different desktop spaces can have different properties. In this way, different desktop spaces can bring different visual effects to users. Users can more clearly perceive the differences between different desktop spaces, as well as the effect after switching desktop spaces.
  • the electronic device 100 may delete the desktop space.
  • FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B exemplarily show a scenario where the electronic device 100 deletes a desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1710 .
  • the user interface 1710 may include a scene setting frame 1420 , a simplified display thumbnail dock 1711 and a fully displayed thumbnail dock 1712 . It can be seen that the electronic device 100 includes two desktop spaces. The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs. The components contained in the scene setting box 1420 can be used to set the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs.
  • a delete component 1430 may be included in the scene setup box 1420 .
  • the electronic device 100 may delete the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1720 shown in FIG. 17B .
  • the desktop 1720 may include a dock 1721 .
  • the electronic device 100 only includes one desktop space, which is the desktop space to which dock1721 belongs.
  • the desktop space to which the dock1721 belongs is the desktop space to which the above-mentioned abbreviated dock1711 belongs.
  • a desktop space is a combination of some desktop components in the electronic device 100 .
  • the user may divide the desktop components of the electronic device 100 according to scenarios by creating different desktop spaces.
  • what the electronic device 100 deletes is a combination of desktop components, but does not delete the desktop components contained in this desktop space from the electronic device 100 . Users can still find the desktop components included in the deleted desktop space from the full desktop space.
  • the desktop space may also be deleted.
  • the above-mentioned operation of deleting the desktop space is also relatively simple.
  • the full desktop space may be the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is located before the desktop space is manually created by the user.
  • the full amount of desktop space can be used to view all desktop components in the electronic device 100 .
  • the full amount of desktop space cannot be deleted.
  • the desktop components in the entire desktop space are removed, which may be equivalent to being deleted from the electronic device 100 (for example, the APP is uninstalled).
  • the electronic device 100 may hide the entire desktop space.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the full desktop space on the desktop.
  • the electronic device 100 can change the full amount of desktop space from the hidden state to the displayed state, and display the dock of the full amount of desktop space on the desktop. and desktop page.
  • the electronic device 100 may delete the one desktop component from the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may remove this one desktop component from all desktop spaces.
  • the full amount of desktop space may include a dock.
  • the electronic device 100 can switch between the full desktop space and the desktop space manually created by the user.
  • the electronic device 100 may place this desktop component on a desktop page of the full desktop space.
  • the desktop space manually created by other users may not contain the newly installed desktop component.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a thumbnail desktop page of the full desktop space.
  • the display state of the newly installed desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page may be a removed display state.
  • the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the newly installed desktop component to an unremoved display state. That is, the electronic device 100 can add the newly installed desktop component to the desktop space A.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the newly installed desktop component on the desktop page of the desktop space A.

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a desktop management method, a graphical user interface, and an electronic device. The electronic device can create different desktop spaces, wherein one desktop space may include one application dock bar and one or more desktop pages; different desktop spaces may include desktop components in different scenarios; the electronic device can switch the desktop spaces; and the application dock bars and the desktop pages on the desktop of the electronic device can be switched with the switching of the desktop spaces. By means of the method, the content of a desktop can be simplified, so as to help a user quickly find desktop components in a scenario, and help the user focus on a scenario.

Description

桌面管理方法、图形用户界面及电子设备Desktop management method, graphical user interface and electronic device
本申请要求于2021年11月12日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111344234.4、申请名称为“桌面管理方法、图形用户界面及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to a Chinese patent application with application number 202111344234.4 and titled "Desktop Management Method, Graphical User Interface, and Electronic Device" filed with the China Patent Office on November 12, 2021, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference In this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及桌面管理方法、图形用户界面及电子设备。The present application relates to the field of terminal technology, in particular to a desktop management method, a graphical user interface and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着手机、平板电脑等电子设备的发展,应用在这些电子设备上的应用程序(application,APP)的数量呈现爆炸式的增长。电子设备的桌面上承载了大量的APP图标、小工具(widget)、服务卡片等桌面组件。这使得用户需要花费大量时间从桌面上众多的桌面组件中寻找一个桌面组件。With the development of electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablet computers, the number of application programs (applications, APPs) applied to these electronic devices shows explosive growth. The desktop of the electronic device carries a large number of desktop components such as APP icons, small tools (widgets), and service cards. This makes the user need to spend a lot of time looking for a desktop component from the numerous desktop components on the desktop.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供桌面管理方法、图形用户界面及电子设备。电子设备可以创建桌面空间。不同的桌面空间的桌面上可以显示不同场景下的桌面组件。用户可以通过切换桌面空间来查看不同桌面空间包含的桌面组件。这可以简化桌面内容,帮助用户快速找到一个场景下的桌面组件,并且帮助用户聚焦于一个场景。The application provides a desktop management method, a graphical user interface and an electronic device. Electronic devices can create desk space. Desktop components in different scenarios may be displayed on the desktops of different desktop spaces. Users can view desktop components contained in different desktop spaces by switching desktop spaces. This can simplify desktop content, help users quickly find desktop components in a scene, and help users focus on a scene.
第一方面,本申请提供一种桌面管理方法。该方法可应用于电子设备。电子设备可包括用于显示桌面组件的第一桌面page、第一dock和第二dock。第一dock可包含X个桌面组件。第二dock可包含M个桌面组件,X和M均为正整数。其中,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示第一桌面page和第一dock,第一dock中显示有X个桌面组件。电子设备接收用户对第一dock的第一操作。上述第一操作可用于切换屏幕上显示的dock。响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示第二dock。第二dock中显示有M个桌面组件。In a first aspect, the present application provides a desktop management method. The method can be applied to electronic devices. The electronic device may include a first desktop page, a first dock, and a second dock for displaying desktop components. The first dock may contain X desktop components. The second dock can contain M desktop components, and both X and M are positive integers. Wherein, the electronic device may display the first desktop page and the first dock on the screen, and X desktop components are displayed on the first dock. The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first dock. The above-mentioned first operation can be used to switch the dock displayed on the screen. In response to the above first operation, the electronic device may display the second dock on the screen. There are M desktop components displayed in the second dock.
上述第一操作可以包括作用在上述第一dock所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作。The above-mentioned first operation may include a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the above-mentioned first dock is located.
上述切换屏幕上显示的dock可以包括:将在屏幕上显示第一dock切换为在屏幕上显示指示第一dock的标识和第二dock、将在屏幕上显示第一dock切换为在屏幕上显示第一dock和第二dock、将在屏幕上显示第一dock切换为在屏幕上仅显示第二dock。可选的,在接收到上述第一操作之前,屏幕上除了显示有上述第一dock,还显示有第七dock。上述切换屏幕上显示的dock还可包含:将在屏幕上显示第七dock和第一dock切换为在屏幕上显示第一dock和第二dock。The aforementioned switching of the docks displayed on the screen may include: switching from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the logo indicating the first dock and the second dock on the screen, switching from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the second dock on the screen One dock and second dock, switch from showing the first dock on the screen to only showing the second dock on the screen. Optionally, before the first operation is received, besides the first dock, a seventh dock is displayed on the screen. The aforementioned switching of docks displayed on the screen may further include: switching from displaying the seventh dock and the first dock on the screen to displaying the first dock and the second dock on the screen.
其中,一个桌面空间可以包含一个dock。用户可以通过切换屏幕上显示的dock来切换桌面空间。例如,第一dock对应第一桌面空间。第二dock对应第二桌面空间。响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以将屏幕上显示的dock切换为第二dock。电子设备所处的桌面空间也从第一桌面空间切换为第二桌面空间。一个桌面空间的桌面page上可以显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件(如一个桌面空间可以包含一个场景下的桌面组件)。那么,用户切换不同的桌面空间可以查看不同场景下的桌面组件。Wherein, a desktop space may include a dock. Users can switch desktop spaces by switching the dock displayed on the screen. For example, the first dock corresponds to the first desktop space. The second dock corresponds to the second desktop space. In response to the above first operation, the electronic device may switch the dock displayed on the screen to the second dock. The desktop space where the electronic device is located is also switched from the first desktop space to the second desktop space. The desktop page of a desktop space can display the desktop components contained in this desktop space (for example, a desktop space can contain desktop components in a scene). Then, the user can view desktop components in different scenarios by switching between different desktop spaces.
由上述方法可知,用户可以在一个桌面空间中放置一个场景下的桌面组件,并将这一个场景下的桌面组件放置在这一个桌面空间包含的dock中。上述切换桌面空间的用户操作比较简便。用户可以快速地切换不同的桌面空间,从而快速找到一个桌面空间对应场景下的桌面组件。上述方法可以简化桌面上呈现的内容,帮助用户聚焦于一个桌面空间对应的场景,减少其它桌面空间的应用程序打扰用户聚焦于这一个桌面空间对应的场景的情况。It can be seen from the above method that the user can place a desktop component in a scene in a desktop space, and place the desktop component in this scene in the dock included in the desktop space. The above-mentioned user operation of switching the desktop space is relatively simple. Users can quickly switch between different desktop spaces, so as to quickly find a desktop component in a scene corresponding to a desktop space. The above method can simplify the content presented on the desktop, help the user focus on the scene corresponding to one desktop space, and reduce the situation that applications in other desktop spaces interrupt the user's focus on the scene corresponding to this desktop space.
可选的,一个桌面空间也可以包含多个dock。响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以继续显示第一桌面page。也即是说,当切换屏幕上显示的dock,屏幕上显示的桌面page可以不变。Optionally, a desktop space can also contain multiple docks. In response to the foregoing first operation, the electronic device may continue to display the first desktop page. That is to say, when the dock displayed on the screen is switched, the desktop page displayed on the screen may not change.
下面具体介绍切换屏幕上显示的dock的一些实施例。Some embodiments of switching the dock displayed on the screen are specifically introduced below.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示用于指示第一dock的标识。其中,电子设备可以取消显示上述第一dock。上述第一dock的标识可用于指示第一dock的存在。也即是说,在存在多个dock的情况下,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示一个dock。这一个dock中可显示有这一个dock包含的所有桌面组件。电子设备可以在屏幕上显示这一个dock以外其它dock的标识。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the foregoing first operation, the electronic device may display on a screen an identifier for indicating the first dock. Wherein, the electronic device may cancel displaying the above-mentioned first dock. The above identifier of the first dock may be used to indicate the existence of the first dock. That is to say, when there are multiple docks, the electronic device can display one dock on the screen. All desktop components included in this dock can be displayed in this dock. The electronic device can display the logos of other docks other than the dock on the screen.
这可以方便用户知晓自己在电子设备中创建的桌面空间,并快速切换到自己需要使用的桌面空间。This can facilitate the user to know the desktop space created by himself in the electronic device, and quickly switch to the desktop space he needs to use.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以继续显示上述第一dock。其中,第一dock中显示有Y个桌面组件。Y小于等于X。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the above first operation, the electronic device may continue to display the above first dock. Wherein, Y desktop components are displayed in the first dock. Y is less than or equal to X.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在接收到上述第一操作之前,电子设备的屏幕上仅显示有第一dock。响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以将在屏幕上显示第一dock切换为在屏幕上显示第一dock和第二dock。第一dock中显示有上述Y个桌面组件。In a possible implementation manner, before receiving the foregoing first operation, only the first dock is displayed on the screen of the electronic device. In response to the above first operation, the electronic device may switch from displaying the first dock on the screen to displaying the first dock and the second dock on the screen. The above Y desktop components are displayed in the first dock.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备的屏幕上可同时显示多个dock。上述多个dock中可显示有各自包含的所有桌面组件。或者,上述多个dock的一部分dock中可显示有各自包含的所有桌面组件,另一部分dock中可显示有各自包含的部分桌面组件。响应于切换屏幕上显示的dock的操作,电子设备可以将在屏幕上显示上述多个dock切换为在屏幕上显示上述第二dock和上述多个dock中的一个或多个dock。经过上述切换操作之后屏幕上显示的上述多个dock中的一个或多个dock中可以显示有各自包含的全部或部分桌面组件。In another possible implementation manner, multiple docks can be displayed on the screen of the electronic device at the same time. All the desktop components contained in each of the above multiple docks can be displayed. Alternatively, all of the desktop components included in each of the above multiple docks may be displayed in a part of the docks, and part of the desktop components included in each of the docks may be displayed in another part of the docks. In response to the operation of switching the docks displayed on the screen, the electronic device may switch from displaying the above-mentioned multiple docks on the screen to displaying the above-mentioned second dock and one or more docks among the above-mentioned multiple docks on the screen. After the above switching operation, one or more of the above multiple docks displayed on the screen may display all or part of the desktop components contained in each of them.
例如,在接收到上述第一操作之前,电子设备的屏幕上除了显示有第一dock,还显示有第七dock。第七dock中显示有第七dock包含的X1个桌面组件。X1为正整数。响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以将在屏幕上显示第七dock和第一dock切换为在屏幕上显示上述第一dock和上述第二dock。其中,第一dock中可显示上述Y个桌面组件。For example, before receiving the above-mentioned first operation, in addition to displaying the first dock, a seventh dock is also displayed on the screen of the electronic device. The seventh dock displays X1 desktop components included in the seventh dock. X1 is a positive integer. In response to the above-mentioned first operation, the electronic device may switch from displaying the seventh dock and the first dock on the screen to displaying the above-mentioned first dock and the above-mentioned second dock on the screen. Wherein, the above Y desktop components can be displayed in the first dock.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于上述第一操作,电子设备可以在屏幕上取消显示第一dock。其中,电子设备可以不显示指示第一dock的标识。这样可以减少在切换至第二dock时,第一dock分散用户注意力的情况,帮助用户更好地聚焦于第二dock所属桌面空间对应的场景。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the foregoing first operation, the electronic device may cancel displaying the first dock on the screen. Wherein, the electronic device may not display the logo indicating the first dock. This can reduce the distraction of the user's attention by the first dock when switching to the second dock, and help the user better focus on the scene corresponding to the desktop space to which the second dock belongs.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备进入桌面编辑状态,并在桌面编辑状态下显示第二dock。第二dock可包含第一区域和第二区域,第一区域可用于显示已添加至第二dock的M个桌面组件,第二区域可用于显示电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。类似地,当在桌面编辑状态下显示第一dock时,电子设备也可以分区域显示第一dock。例如,在桌面编辑状态下,第一dock可以包含第三区域和第四区域。第三区域可用于显示已添加至第一dock的X个桌面组件。第四区域可用于显示电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。电子设备在不 同dock中推荐的桌面组件可以是不同的。可选的,电子设备在桌面编辑状态下也可以仅分区域显示第二dock,而不分区域显示第一dock。也即是说,当在桌面编辑状态下显示第一dock,电子设备可以在第一dock中显示第一dock包含的X个桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device enters the desktop editing state, and displays the second dock in the desktop editing state. The second dock may include a first area and a second area, the first area may be used to display M desktop components added to the second dock, and the second area may be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device. Similarly, when the first dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device may also display the first dock in different regions. For example, in the desktop editing state, the first dock may include a third area and a fourth area. A third area can be used to display the X number of desktop components that have been added to the first dock. The fourth area can be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device. The desktop components recommended by the electronic device in different docks may be different. Optionally, in the desktop editing state, the electronic device may only display the second dock by area, and not display the first dock by area. That is to say, when the first dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device may display X desktop components included in the first dock in the first dock.
其中,在创建新的dock时,电子设备可以进入桌面编辑状态,并显示该新创建的dock。在第二dock被新创建时,第二dock中的第一区域可以为空。即第二dock中还未添加桌面组件。第二dock中的第二区域可用于显示电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。上述第二区域中的桌面组件可以方便用户快速在第二dock中添加桌面组件。若用户需要添加的桌面组件位于第二区域,那么用户可以不用在桌面page上寻找该桌面组件。Wherein, when creating a new dock, the electronic device can enter a desktop editing state and display the newly created dock. When the second dock is newly created, the first area in the second dock may be empty. That is, no desktop components have been added to the second dock. The second area in the second dock can be used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device. The above-mentioned desktop components in the second area can facilitate users to quickly add desktop components in the second dock. If the desktop component to be added by the user is located in the second area, the user does not need to search for the desktop component on the desktop page.
电子设备可以根据用户使用桌面组件的使用习惯在一个dock中推荐一个或多个桌面组件。下面具体介绍电子设备确定推荐桌面组件的方式。The electronic device may recommend one or more desktop components in a dock according to the usage habits of the user in using the desktop components. The following specifically introduces the manner in which the electronic device determines the recommended desktop component.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备将第一时间段内被使用过的桌面组件按照使用情况划分为多个桌面组件包,一个桌面组件包包含一个或多个桌面组件;使用情况包括以下一项或多项:使用时间、使用地点。上述第一时间段可以例如是一天、两天、一周等时间段。电子设备根据电子设备包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件,确定多个桌面组件包的重复程度,一个桌面组件包包含的与电子设备包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件相同的桌面组件数量越多,一个桌面组件包的重复程度越高。电子设备根据桌面组件的使用时长,确定多个桌面组件包的使用率,一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的使用时长越长,一个桌面组件包的使用率越高。其中,一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的使用时长可以为,这一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的总使用时长。或者,一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的使用时长可以为,这一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的使用时长均值。电子设备可以将多个桌面组件包中重复程度低于第一重复程度阈值,且使用率最高的第一桌面组件包确定为电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。其中,上述电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件可以是上述第一桌面组件包包含的一个或多个桌面组件。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device divides the used desktop components in the first period of time into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include the following One or more: time of use, place of use. The above-mentioned first time period may be, for example, one day, two days, one week and other time periods. The electronic device determines the degree of duplication of multiple desktop component packages according to the added desktop components in the dock contained in the electronic device. , the more repetitive a desktop component package is. The electronic device determines the usage rates of multiple desktop component packages according to the usage time of the desktop components, and the longer the usage time of the desktop components included in a desktop component package, the higher the usage rate of a desktop component package. Wherein, the usage duration of the desktop components included in one desktop component package may be, the total usage duration of the desktop components included in this desktop component package. Alternatively, the usage duration of the desktop components included in a desktop component package may be an average usage duration of the desktop components included in the desktop component package. The electronic device may determine the first desktop component package whose repetition degree is lower than the first repetition degree threshold and has the highest usage rate among the plurality of desktop component packages as one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device. Wherein, the one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device may be one or more desktop components included in the first desktop component package.
可以看出,在确定上述第一桌面组件包的过程中,电子设备可以根据电子设备包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件计算重复程度。这可以减少在推荐桌面组件时重复推荐的情况,以及推荐的桌面组件属于已经建立的dock所属桌面空间对应的场景的情况。并且,上述方法可以根据用户经常一起使用的多个桌面组件等用户习惯来确定上述电子设备推荐的桌面组件,上述被推荐的桌面组件有较大可能是用户想添加至dock中的桌面组件。这可以减少用户在桌面page中寻找桌面组件并将桌面组件拖拽至dock中的时间,帮助用户快速在dock中添加桌面组件,提高构建描述一个场景的桌面空间的效率。It can be seen that, in the process of determining the above-mentioned first desktop component package, the electronic device can calculate the degree of repetition according to the added desktop components in the dock included in the electronic device. This can reduce the situation of repeated recommendation when recommending desktop components, and the situation that the recommended desktop components belong to the scene corresponding to the established desktop space to which the dock belongs. Moreover, the above method can determine the desktop component recommended by the electronic device according to user habits such as multiple desktop components that the user often uses together, and the above-mentioned recommended desktop component is likely to be a desktop component that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for desktop components in the desktop page and drag the desktop components to the dock, help users quickly add desktop components to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
在另一种实现的方式中,电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件可以为第一桌面page上使用时长最长,或者使用次数最多的一个或多个桌面组件。In another implementation manner, the one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device may be the one or more desktop components that have been used for the longest time or used the most times on the first desktop page.
进一步的,电子设备接收到第二操作。上述第二操作可用于切换屏幕上显示的桌面page。响应于第二操作,电子设备可以将屏幕上显示的第一桌面page切换为第二桌面page。电子设备可以将第二区域中显示的桌面组件更新为第二桌面page上使用时长最长,或者使用次数最多的一个或多个桌面组件。Further, the electronic device receives the second operation. The above-mentioned second operation can be used to switch the desktop page displayed on the screen. In response to the second operation, the electronic device may switch the first desktop page displayed on the screen to the second desktop page. The electronic device may update the desktop components displayed in the second area to one or more desktop components that have been used the longest or used the most times on the second desktop page.
也即是说,电子设备可以根据当前屏幕显示的桌面page上桌面组件的使用时长或使用次数来确定推荐的桌面组件。若当前屏幕显示的桌面page变化,电子设备可以根据变化之后屏幕上显示的桌面page更新推荐的桌面组件。That is to say, the electronic device can determine the recommended desktop component according to the usage time or the number of usage times of the desktop component on the desktop page currently displayed on the screen. If the desktop page currently displayed on the screen changes, the electronic device may update recommended desktop components according to the desktop page displayed on the screen after the change.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第三操作。上述第三操作可用于在第二dock添加第一桌面组件,第一桌面组件是屏幕显示的桌面page上的一个桌面组件。响应 于第三操作,电子设备在第二dock中显示M个桌面组件和第一桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives the third operation. The above third operation may be used to add the first desktop component on the second dock, and the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen. In response to the third operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the second dock.
其中,在创建新的dock时,电子设备也可以不进入桌面编辑状态。当接收到用于创建dock的操作,电子设备可以在桌面上显示新创建的dock。在第二dock被新创建时,第二dock可以为空。即第二dock中还未添加桌面组件。响应于将桌面page上的桌面组件拖拽至第二dock的操作,电子设备可以在第二dock中显示上述被拖拽至第二dock的桌面组件。这样,用户可以快速将桌面page上的桌面组件添加至第二dock,而无需先进入桌面编辑状态,再在第二dock中添加桌面组件。Wherein, when creating a new dock, the electronic device may not enter the desktop editing state. When receiving an operation for creating a dock, the electronic device may display the newly created dock on the desktop. The second dock may be empty when the second dock is newly created. That is, no desktop components have been added to the second dock. In response to the operation of dragging the desktop component on the desktop page to the second dock, the electronic device may display the desktop component dragged to the second dock in the second dock. In this way, the user can quickly add the desktop components on the desktop page to the second dock, without first entering the desktop editing state, and then adding the desktop components in the second dock.
那么,在接收到上述第三操作时,电子设备可以处于桌面编辑状态,并响应上述第三操作在第二dock中添加第一桌面组件。或者,在接收到上述第三操作时,电子设备也可以未处于桌面编辑状态,并响应上述第三操作在第二dock中添加第一桌面组件。Then, when receiving the above-mentioned third operation, the electronic device may be in the desktop editing state, and respond to the above-mentioned third operation to add the first desktop component in the second dock. Alternatively, when receiving the above third operation, the electronic device may not be in the desktop editing state, and respond to the above third operation to add the first desktop component in the second dock.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第四操作。上述第四操作可用于在第一区域添加第一桌面组件,第一桌面组件是第二区域中显示的桌面组件。响应于第四操作,电子设备在第一区域中显示M个桌面组件和第一桌面组件,在第二区域取消显示第一桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives a fourth operation. The above fourth operation may be used to add a first desktop component in the first area, and the first desktop component is a desktop component displayed in the second area. In response to the fourth operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area, and cancels displaying the first desktop component in the second area.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第五操作。上述第五操作可用于在第一区域添加第一桌面组件,第一桌面组件是屏幕显示的桌面page上的一个桌面组件,第一桌面组件未显示在第二区域中。响应于第五操作,电子设备在第一区域中显示M个桌面组件和第一桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives the fifth operation. The above fifth operation may be used to add a first desktop component in the first area, the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen, and the first desktop component is not displayed in the second area. In response to the fifth operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area.
可以看出,在处于桌面编辑状态下,电子设备可以在第二dock的第二区域显示推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。用户既可以将电子设备推荐的桌面组件添加至第二dock,也可以将桌面page上的桌面组件添加至第二dock。It can be seen that, in the desktop editing state, the electronic device can display one or more recommended desktop components in the second area of the second dock. The user can either add the desktop component recommended by the electronic device to the second dock, or add the desktop component on the desktop page to the second dock.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,响应于用户在第一区域添加第一桌面组件之后,电子设备根据第一桌面组件,更新在第二区域中显示的一个或多个桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in response to the user adding the first desktop component in the first area, the electronic device updates one or more desktop components displayed in the second area according to the first desktop component.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备将第二时间段内被使用过的桌面组件按照使用情况划分为多个桌面组件包,一个桌面组件包包含一个或多个桌面组件;使用情况包括以下一项或多项:使用时间、使用地点。电子设备在多个桌面组件包中确定出包含第一桌面组件的第二桌面组件包。其中,仅有一个桌面组件包包含第一桌面组件时,电子设备确定包含第一桌面组件的桌面组件包为第二桌面组件包;有多个桌面组件包包含第一桌面组件时,电子设备确定第一桌面组件的使用时长最长的桌面组件包为第二桌面组件包。电子设备在第二区域中显示第二桌面组件包中除第一桌面组件以外的一个或多个桌面组件。In a possible implementation, the electronic device divides the desktop components used within the second time period into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include the following One or more: time of use, place of use. The electronic device determines a second desktop component package including the first desktop component among the plurality of desktop component packages. Wherein, when only one desktop component package contains the first desktop component, the electronic device determines that the desktop component package containing the first desktop component is the second desktop component package; when multiple desktop component packages contain the first desktop component, the electronic device determines The desktop component package with the longest usage time of the first desktop component is the second desktop component package. The electronic device displays one or more desktop components in the second desktop component package except the first desktop component in the second area.
可以看出,当用户在第二dock中添加了桌面组件,电子设备可以根据第二dock中添加的桌面组件来更新电子设备在第二dock中推荐的桌面组件。电子设备根据用户添加的桌面组件来更新推荐的桌面组件可以提高电子设备推荐的桌面组件为用户想要添加至第二dock的桌面组件的概率。用户可以直接从推荐的桌面组件中将需要添加的桌面组件添加至第二dock,而无需在桌面page上显示的众多桌面组件中寻找需要添加的桌面组件。这可以帮助用户更快速地在第二dock中添加桌面组件。It can be seen that when the user adds a desktop component in the second dock, the electronic device can update the desktop component recommended by the electronic device in the second dock according to the desktop component added in the second dock. The electronic device updating the recommended desktop component according to the desktop component added by the user can increase the probability that the desktop component recommended by the electronic device is the desktop component that the user wants to add to the second dock. The user can directly add the desktop component that needs to be added to the second dock from the recommended desktop components, without looking for the desktop component that needs to be added among the many desktop components displayed on the desktop page. This can help users add desktop components to the second dock more quickly.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备的桌面page上可以不包含电子设备中已经建立的dock中添加的桌面组件。例如,在将上述第一桌面组件添加至第二dock之后,电子设备可以在桌面page上取消显示第一桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain the desktop components added in the dock already established in the electronic device. For example, after the above-mentioned first desktop component is added to the second dock, the electronic device may cancel displaying the first desktop component on the desktop page.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在上述屏幕显示有第一dock的情况下,电子设备的桌面page上可以不包含第一dock包含的所有桌面组件。在上述屏幕显示有第二dock的情况下, 电子设备的桌面page上可以不包含第二dock包含的所有桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, when the above-mentioned screen displays the first dock, the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain all the desktop components included in the first dock. In the case where the second dock is displayed on the above screen, the desktop page of the electronic device may not contain all the desktop components included in the second dock.
下面介绍电子设备切换桌面空间的一些实施例。The following introduces some embodiments of electronic devices switching desktop spaces.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第一dock所属的第一桌面空间包含第一组桌面page,第一组桌面page包含的一个或多个桌面page用于放置第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件,第一组桌面page包含第一桌面page,第二dock所属的第二桌面空间包含第二组桌面page,第二组桌面page包含的一个或多个桌面page用于放置第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件。响应于用于切换屏幕上显示的dock的第一操作,电子设备可以将屏幕上显示的第一桌面page切换为第三桌面page,第三桌面page是第二组桌面page中的一个桌面page。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first desktop space to which the first dock belongs includes a first group of desktop pages, and one or more desktop pages included in the first group of desktop pages are used to place desktops included in the first desktop space Components, the first group of desktop pages contains the first desktop page, the second desktop space to which the second dock belongs contains the second group of desktop pages, and one or more desktop pages contained in the second group of desktop pages are used to place the second desktop space contains desktop components. In response to the first operation for switching the dock displayed on the screen, the electronic device may switch the first desktop page displayed on the screen to a third desktop page, the third desktop page being one desktop page in the second group of desktop pages.
即一个桌面空间可以包含一个dock,一个或多个桌面page。当切换dock,桌面空间可以随之切换。那么,当电子设备将屏幕上显示的dock由第一dock切换为第二dock,电子设备可以将桌面page由第一桌面空间包含的桌面page切换为第二桌面空间包含的桌面page。That is, a desktop space can contain a dock and one or more desktop pages. When switching the dock, the desktop space can be switched accordingly. Then, when the electronic device switches the dock displayed on the screen from the first dock to the second dock, the electronic device may switch the desktop page from the desktop page contained in the first desktop space to the desktop page contained in the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在屏幕上显示有第二dock的情况下,电子设备接收到第六操作。响应于第六操作,电子设备进入桌面编辑状态,显示第二dock和Q个桌面组件,其中,第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件以第一显示样式显示,第二桌面空间不包含的桌面组件以第二显示样式显示,Q为正整数。上述第一显示样式可以为本申请实施例中未移除的显示样式。上述第二显示样式可以为本申请呢实施例中移除的显示样式。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, when the second dock is displayed on the screen, the electronic device receives a sixth operation. In response to the sixth operation, the electronic device enters the desktop editing state, and displays the second dock and Q desktop components, wherein, the desktop components contained in the second desktop space are displayed in the first display style, and the desktop components not contained in the second desktop space are displayed in the The second display style shows that Q is a positive integer. The above-mentioned first display style may be a display style that is not removed in the embodiment of the present application. The above-mentioned second display style may be the display style removed in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,上述屏幕上显示有第二dock的情况即为电子设备处于第二桌面空间的情况。在桌面编辑状态下,电子设备可以在桌面page上显示电子设备包含的桌面组件。上述显示在桌面page上的桌面组件既可包含第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件,也可包含第二桌面空间不包含的桌面组件。这样,用户可以对第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件进行操作,将桌面组件从第二桌面空间移除。用户可以对第二桌面空间不包含的桌面组件进行操作,将桌面组件添加至第二桌面空间。Wherein, the case where the second dock is displayed on the above screen is the case where the electronic device is in the second desktop space. In the desktop editing state, the electronic device can display the desktop components contained in the electronic device on the desktop page. The aforementioned desktop components displayed on the desktop page may include desktop components included in the second desktop space, or include desktop components not included in the second desktop space. In this way, the user can operate the desktop components included in the second desktop space, and remove the desktop components from the second desktop space. The user can operate the desktop components not included in the second desktop space, and add desktop components to the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在桌面编辑状态下显示第二dock时,电子设备接收到第七操作。响应于第七操作,电子设备在桌面编辑状态下显示第一dock和P个桌面组件,其中第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件以第一显示样式显示,第一桌面空间不包含的桌面组件以第二显示样式显示,P为正整数。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, when the second dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device receives a seventh operation. In response to the seventh operation, the electronic device displays the first dock and P desktop components in the desktop editing state, wherein the desktop components contained in the first desktop space are displayed in the first display style, and the desktop components not contained in the first desktop space are displayed in the first display style. Two display styles display, P is a positive integer.
可以看出,在处于第二桌面空间的情况下,电子设备可以根据第七操作从第二桌面空间切换至第一桌面空间。在桌面编辑状态下,电子设备可以在桌面page上显示电子设备包含的桌面组件。上述显示在桌面page上的桌面组件既可包含第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件,也可包含第一桌面空间不包含的桌面组件。这样,用户可以对第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件进行操作,将桌面组件从第一桌面空间移除。用户可以对第一桌面空间不包含的桌面组件进行操作,将桌面组件添加至第一桌面空间。It can be seen that, in the case of being in the second desktop space, the electronic device may switch from the second desktop space to the first desktop space according to the seventh operation. In the desktop editing state, the electronic device can display the desktop components contained in the electronic device on the desktop page. The aforementioned desktop components displayed on the desktop page may include desktop components included in the first desktop space, or include desktop components not included in the first desktop space. In this way, the user can operate the desktop components included in the first desktop space, and remove the desktop components from the first desktop space. The user can operate desktop components not included in the first desktop space, and add desktop components to the first desktop space.
其中,上述Q个桌面组件可以是电子设备包含的所有桌面组件。或者Q个桌面组件可以是电子设备包含的部分桌面组件,例如使用时长超过预设阈值的桌面组件,使用次数超过预设阈值的桌面组件。上述P个桌面组件也可以是电子设备包含的所有桌面组件。或者P个桌面组件可以是电子设备包含的部分桌面组件,例如使用时长超过预设阈值的桌面组件,使用次数超过预设阈值的桌面组件。上述Q个桌面组件与上述P个桌面组件可以相同。Wherein, the aforementioned Q desktop components may be all desktop components included in the electronic device. Alternatively, the Q desktop components may be part of the desktop components included in the electronic device, for example, desktop components whose use time exceeds a preset threshold, or desktop components whose use times exceed a preset threshold. The above P desktop components may also be all desktop components included in the electronic device. Alternatively, the P desktop components may be some desktop components included in the electronic device, for example, desktop components whose use time exceeds a preset threshold, or desktop components whose use times exceed a preset threshold. The aforementioned Q desktop components may be the same as the aforementioned P desktop components.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在显示第二dock时,电子设备接收第二桌面组件的第一消息和第三桌面组件的第二消息。第二桌面空间包含第二桌面组件,不包含第三桌面组件。电子设备显示第一消息,不显示第二消息。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, when the second dock is displayed, the electronic device receives the first message of the second desktop component and the second message of the third desktop component. The second desktop space contains the second desktop component and does not contain the third desktop component. The electronic device displays the first message and does not display the second message.
进一步的,当电子设备所处的桌面空间由第二桌面空间切换至包含上述第三桌面组件的 桌面空间,电子设备可以显示上述第二消息。Further, when the desktop space where the electronic device is located is switched from the second desktop space to the desktop space containing the above-mentioned third desktop component, the electronic device may display the above-mentioned second message.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第八操作,第八操作用于删除第二桌面空间。响应于第八操作,电子设备删除第二dock和第二组桌面page。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives an eighth operation, and the eighth operation is used to delete the second desktop space. In response to the eighth operation, the electronic device deletes the second dock and the second group of desktop pages.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二桌面空间包含第四桌面组件。在处于第二桌面空间的情况下,电子设备在桌面编辑状态下在桌面page上以上述第一显示样式显示第四桌面组件。电子设备接收到对第四桌面组件的操作。该对第四桌面组件的操作可用于将第四桌面组件从第二桌面空间中移除。其中,响应于该对第四桌面组件的操作,电子设备可以在桌面page上将第四桌面组件的显示样式由上述第一显示样式切换为上述第二显示样式。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可以显示第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件。第二桌面空间包含的桌面page上不包含上述第四桌面组件。即第四桌面组件从第二桌面空间被移除。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the second desktop space includes a fourth desktop component. In the case of the second desktop space, the electronic device displays the fourth desktop component on the desktop page in the above-mentioned first display style in the desktop editing state. The electronic device receives an operation on the fourth desktop component. The operation on the fourth desktop component can be used to remove the fourth desktop component from the second desktop space. Wherein, in response to the operation on the fourth desktop component, the electronic device may switch the display style of the fourth desktop component from the first display style to the second display style on the desktop page. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device can display the desktop components included in the second desktop space. The desktop page contained in the second desktop space does not contain the above-mentioned fourth desktop component. That is, the fourth desktop component is removed from the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二桌面空间不包含第五桌面组件。在处于第二桌面空间的情况下,电子设备在桌面编辑状态下在桌面page上以上述第二显示样式显示第五桌面组件。电子设备接收到对第五桌面组件的操作。该对第五桌面组件的操作可用于将第五桌面组件添加至第二桌面空间。其中,响应于该对第五桌面组件的操作,电子设备可以在桌面page上将第五桌面组件的显示样式由上述第二显示样式切换为上述第一显示样式。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可以显示第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件。第二桌面空间包含的桌面page上包含上述第五桌面组件。即第五桌面组件被添加至第二桌面空间。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the second desktop space does not include the fifth desktop component. In the case of the second desktop space, the electronic device displays the fifth desktop component in the second display style on the desktop page in the desktop editing state. The electronic device receives an operation on the fifth desktop component. The manipulation of the fifth desktop component can be used to add the fifth desktop component to the second desktop space. Wherein, in response to the operation on the fifth desktop component, the electronic device may switch the display style of the fifth desktop component from the second display style to the first display style on the desktop page. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device can display the desktop components included in the second desktop space. The desktop page included in the second desktop space includes the above-mentioned fifth desktop component. That is, a fifth desktop component is added to the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二桌面空间包含桌面pageB1。电子设备接收到对桌面pageB1的操作。该对桌面pageB1的操作用于将桌面pageB1从第二桌面空间移除。响应于该对桌面pageB1的操作,电子设备可以在桌面编辑状态下以上述第二显示样式显示桌面pageB1上的所有桌面组件。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可以显示第二桌面空间包含的桌面page。第二桌面空间包含的桌面page中不包含上述桌面pageB1。即桌面pageB1从第二桌面空间中被移除。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the second desktop space includes the desktop pageB1. The electronic device receives an operation on the desktop pageB1. The operation on the desktop pageB1 is used to remove the desktop pageB1 from the second desktop space. In response to the operation on the desktop pageB1, the electronic device may display all desktop components on the desktop pageB1 in the above-mentioned second display style in the desktop editing state. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device may display a desktop page included in the second desktop space. The above-mentioned desktop page B1 is not included in the desktop pages included in the second desktop space. That is, the desktop pageB1 is removed from the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,第二桌面空间不包含桌面pageB2。电子设备接收到对桌面pageB2的操作。该对桌面pageB2的操作用于将桌面pageB2添加至第二桌面空间。响应于该对桌面pageB2的操作,电子设备可以在桌面编辑状态下以上述第一显示样式显示桌面pageB2上的所有桌面组件。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可以显示第二桌面空间包含的桌面page。第二桌面空间包含的桌面page中包含上述桌面pageB2。即桌面pageB2被添加至第二桌面空间。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the second desktop space does not include the desktop pageB2. The electronic device receives the operation on the desktop pageB2. The operation on the desktop pageB2 is used to add the desktop pageB2 to the second desktop space. In response to the operation on the desktop pageB2, the electronic device may display all desktop components on the desktop pageB2 in the desktop editing state in the above-mentioned first display style. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device may display a desktop page included in the second desktop space. The desktop page included in the second desktop space includes the above-mentioned desktop page B2. That is, the desktop pageB2 is added to the second desktop space.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收第九操作,第九操作用于创建第三dock和第三dock所属的第三桌面空间。响应于第九操作,电子设备显示第三dock和W个桌面组件,第三dock中显示有Y个桌面组件。电子设备接收第十操作,响应于第十操作,电子设备以第三显示样式显示O个桌面组件中与Y个桌面组件相关的Z个桌面组件,上述W、上述Y、上述O和上述Z均为正整数。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives a ninth operation, and the ninth operation is used to create a third dock and a third desktop space to which the third dock belongs. In response to the ninth operation, the electronic device displays a third dock and W desktop components, and Y desktop components are displayed on the third dock. The electronic device receives the tenth operation, and in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays Z desktop components related to Y desktop components among the O desktop components in a third display style, and the above-mentioned W, the above-mentioned Y, the above-mentioned O, and the above-mentioned Z are all is a positive integer.
上述第九操作用于创建第三dock具体可以表示,电子设备创建一个空白的dock,并在该空白的dock中添加上述Y个桌面组件。添加有上述Y个桌面组件的dock即为上述第三dock。The above-mentioned ninth operation for creating a third dock may specifically mean that the electronic device creates a blank dock, and adds the above-mentioned Y desktop components to the blank dock. The dock added with the above Y desktop components is the above third dock.
上述W个桌面组件可以是显示在桌面page上的桌面组件。The above W desktop components may be desktop components displayed on the desktop page.
其中,响应于第十操作,电子设备还可以以第四显示样式显示上述O个桌面组件中除上述Z个桌面组件外的其它桌面组件。上述第三显示样式可以为本申请实施例中未移除的显示样式。上述第四显示样式可以为本申请实施例中移除的显示样式。Wherein, in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device may also display other desktop components in the O desktop components except the Z desktop components in the fourth display style. The foregoing third display style may be a display style that is not removed in the embodiment of the present application. The foregoing fourth display style may be a display style removed in the embodiment of the present application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述与Y个桌面组件相关,具体包括:与Y个桌面组件中的 一个或多个桌面组件的类别相同或相近。In a possible implementation manner, the foregoing is related to Y desktop components, specifically including: being the same or similar to one or more desktop components in the Y desktop components.
其中,两个桌面组件的类别相近可以包括,这两个桌面组件的类别具有包含关系。具有包含管理的类别可以表示一个类别包含另一个类别。例如,娱乐类别包含音乐类别。那么,娱乐类别与音乐类别具有包含关系。两个桌面组件的类别相近还可以包括,这两个桌面组件的类别为能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。上述能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别可以表示在一个类别的桌面组件的使用场景中,另一个类别的桌面组件可以提供辅助的功能。例如,视频类别和投屏类别可以为能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。其中,用户在使用视频类别的桌面组件播放视频时,可能需要使用投屏类别的桌面组件将被播放的视频投影至其它显示设备。Wherein, the categories of the two desktop components are similar may include, and the categories of the two desktop components have an inclusion relationship. Categories with containment management can indicate that a category contains another category. For example, the Entertainment category contains the Music category. Then, the entertainment category has a containment relationship with the music category. The category of the two desktop components being similar may also include that the categories of the two desktop components are categories that can assist each other in a scene. The aforementioned categories that can assist each other in a scenario may be represented in a usage scenario of desktop components of one category, and desktop components of another category may provide auxiliary functions. For example, the video category and the screen projection category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene. Wherein, when the user uses the desktop component of the video category to play a video, the user may need to use the desktop component of the screen projection category to project the played video to other display devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述O个桌面组件可以为电子设备中的所有桌面组件。或者,上述O个桌面组件可以为桌面pageA1上的所有桌面组件。上述桌面pageA1可以是电子设备接收到上述第十操作时在屏幕上显示的桌面page。In a possible implementation manner, the above O desktop components may be all desktop components in the electronic device. Alternatively, the above O desktop components may be all desktop components on the desktop pageA1. The aforementioned desktop pageA1 may be the desktop page displayed on the screen when the electronic device receives the aforementioned tenth operation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在响应于第九操作,电子设备显示第三dock和W个桌面组件之后,电子设备接收到将W1个桌面组件从第三桌面空间移除的操作,以及将W2个桌面组件添加至第三桌面空间的操作,电子设备可以将上述W1个桌面组件从第三桌面空间移除,并将上述W2个桌面组件添加至第三桌面空间。然后,响应于上述第十操作,电子设备以第三显示样式显示O个桌面组件中与Y个桌面组件相关的Z个桌面组件。上述O个桌面组件可以为电子设备中除上述W1个桌面组件和上述W2个桌面组件之外的所有桌面组件。或者,上述O个桌面组件可以为桌面pageA1上,除上述W1个桌面组件和上述W2个桌面组件之外的所有桌面组件。上述桌面pageA1可以是电子设备接收到上述第十操作时在屏幕上显示的桌面page。In a possible implementation, after the electronic device displays the third dock and W desktop components in response to the ninth operation, the electronic device receives an operation of removing W1 desktop components from the third desktop space, and In the operation of adding W2 desktop components to the third desktop space, the electronic device may remove the aforementioned W1 desktop components from the third desktop space, and add the aforementioned W2 desktop components to the third desktop space. Then, in response to the above tenth operation, the electronic device displays Z desktop components related to Y desktop components among the O desktop components in a third display style. The above-mentioned O desktop components may be all desktop components in the electronic device except the above-mentioned W1 desktop components and the above-mentioned W2 desktop components. Alternatively, the above-mentioned O desktop components may be all desktop components on the desktop pageA1 except the above-mentioned W1 desktop components and the above-mentioned W2 desktop components. The aforementioned desktop pageA1 may be the desktop page displayed on the screen when the electronic device receives the aforementioned tenth operation.
由上述方法可知,当处于一个桌面空间,电子设备可以在这一个桌面空间的桌面page上为用户筛选出,与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件具有相同或相近类别的桌面组件。电子设备可以在这一个桌面空间中保留上述与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件具有相同或相近类别的桌面组件,并移除与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件的类别既不相同也不相近的桌面组件。上述方法可以帮助用户高效地构建描述一个场景的桌面空间,用户可以不用手动地对一个一个桌面组件进行移除操作。It can be seen from the above method that when in a desktop space, the electronic device can filter out desktop components for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, which have the same or similar category as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space. The electronic device can retain the desktop components of the same or similar category as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that have the same category as the added desktop components in the dock of this desktop space Desktop components that are neither identical nor similar. The above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在处于第二桌面空间时,电子设备接收到第十一操作,并响应与第十一操作在屏幕上显示S个桌面page。这S个桌面page中有S1个桌面page包含于第二桌面空间,且有S2个桌面page不包含于第二桌面空间。S、S1和S2均为正整数。S为S1与S2之和。电子设备接收到对上述S1个桌面page中T1个桌面page的操作,将这T1个桌面page从第二桌面空间中移除。电子设备接收到对上述S2个桌面page中T2个桌面page的操作,将T2个桌面page添加至第二桌面空间。上述T1为小于S1的正整数。上述T2为小于S2的正整数。进一步的,当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可以显示第二桌面空间包含的桌面page。第二桌面空间包含的桌面page不包含上述T1个桌面组件,包含上述T2个桌面组件。其中,上述S个桌面page可以是电子设备包含的所有桌面page。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, when in the second desktop space, the electronic device receives the eleventh operation, and displays S desktop pages on the screen in response to the eleventh operation. Among the S desktop pages, S1 desktop pages are included in the second desktop space, and S2 desktop pages are not included in the second desktop space. S, S1 and S2 are all positive integers. S is the sum of S1 and S2. The electronic device receives an operation on the T1 desktop pages among the S1 desktop pages, and removes the T1 desktop pages from the second desktop space. The electronic device receives an operation on the T2 desktop pages among the S2 desktop pages, and adds the T2 desktop pages to the second desktop space. The above T1 is a positive integer smaller than S1. The above T2 is a positive integer smaller than S2. Further, when the desktop editing state is exited, the electronic device may display the desktop page included in the second desktop space. The desktop page included in the second desktop space does not include the above T1 desktop components, but includes the above T2 desktop components. Wherein, the above S desktop pages may be all desktop pages included in the electronic device.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在处于第二桌面空间的情况下,当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可调整第二组桌面page包含的桌面page上桌面组件的位置。其中,第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件在第二组桌面page包含的桌面page上按照从左至右、从上之下的位置顺序挨个显示。第二组桌面page包含的桌面page上任意两个相邻的桌面组件之间不存在空位。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in the case of the second desktop space, when exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device can adjust the positions of the desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages. Wherein, the desktop components included in the second desktop space are displayed one by one on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages in order of positions from left to right and from top to bottom. There is no space between any two adjacent desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,在处于第二桌面空间的情况下,当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备可调整第二组桌面page包含的桌面page上桌面组件的位置。其中,第二桌面空间 包含的且显示在第四桌面page上的桌面组件,在第四桌面page上按照从左至右、从上之下的位置顺序挨个显示。第四桌面page上任意两个相邻的桌面组件之间不存在空位。第四桌面page为第二组桌面page中的任意一个桌面page。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, in the case of the second desktop space, when exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device can adjust the positions of the desktop components on the desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages. Wherein, the desktop components included in the second desktop space and displayed on the fourth desktop page are displayed one by one on the fourth desktop page according to the order of positions from left to right and from top to bottom. There is no space between any two adjacent desktop components on the fourth desktop page. The fourth desktop page is any desktop page in the second group of desktop pages.
可以看出,电子设备可以对一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置进行调整。当一个桌面空间中的桌面组件经过移除、添加的操作后,上述对桌面组件的位置进行调整,可以使得桌面page上桌面组件的布局更加紧凑。这样,用户无需手动排序,将一个桌面page上零散放置的桌面组件排布紧凑与整齐。It can be seen that the electronic device can adjust the positions of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page. After the desktop components in a desktop space are removed or added, the above adjustments to the positions of the desktop components can make the layout of the desktop components on the desktop page more compact. In this way, the user does not need to sort manually, and arranges the scattered desktop components on a desktop page compactly and neatly.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备在屏幕上显示第四dock,第四dock中显示有最近使用的桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device displays a fourth dock on the screen, and the fourth dock displays recently used desktop components.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述最近使用的桌面组件,具体可包括:在屏幕上显示有第一dock中已添加的所有桌面组件时,最近使用的桌面组件为第一dock所属第一桌面空间中开启时间最晚的L1个桌面组件,或者电子设备在第三时间段内开启的L2个桌面组件,L1和L2均为正整数。或者,在屏幕上显示有第二dock中已添加的所有桌面组件时,最近使用的桌面组件为第二桌面空间中开启时间最晚的L3个桌面组件,或者电子设备在第四时间段内开启的L4个桌面组件,L3和L4均为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the above recently used desktop components may specifically include: when all desktop components added in the first dock are displayed on the screen, the recently used desktop components are the first desktop to which the first dock belongs The L1 desktop components with the latest opening time in the space, or the L2 desktop components opened by the electronic device within the third time period, both L1 and L2 are positive integers. Or, when all desktop components added in the second dock are displayed on the screen, the most recently used desktop components are the L3 desktop components with the latest opening time in the second desktop space, or the electronic device is opened within the fourth time period L4 desktop components, L3 and L4 are both positive integers.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,上述最近使用的桌面组件是根据第五dock所属桌面空间包含的桌面组件确定的。上述第五dock所属的桌面空间为电子设备所处的桌面空间。进一步的,电子设备将所处的桌面空间从第五dock所属的桌面空间切换为第六dock所属的桌面空间。电子设备可以更新第四dock中显示的最近使用的桌面组件。更新之后的最近使用的桌面组件可以是根据第六dock所属桌面空间包含的桌面组件确定的。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the above-mentioned recently used desktop components are determined according to the desktop components included in the desktop space to which the fifth dock belongs. The desktop space to which the fifth dock belongs is the desktop space where the electronic device is located. Further, the electronic device switches the desktop space where the fifth dock belongs to the desktop space to which the sixth dock belongs. The electronic device may update the most recently used desktop components displayed in the fourth dock. The recently used desktop component after the update may be determined according to the desktop component included in the desktop space to which the sixth dock belongs.
由上述方法可知,用户可以通过一个桌面空间中放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock,快速找到并开启自己在这一个桌面空间内最近使用的桌面组件。这可以帮助用户聚焦于一个场景,减少其它场景的桌面组件对用户的干扰。It can be known from the above method that the user can quickly find and open the recently used desktop component in the desktop space through the dock where the recently used desktop component is placed in the desktop space. This can help users focus on one scene and reduce the interference of desktop components in other scenes to users.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第十二操作。该第十二操作用于将第二桌面空间投屏至显示设备。响应于该第十二操作,电子设备可以将电子设备处于第二桌面空间时屏幕上显示的内容发送给显示设备。显示设备可以显示上述电子设备处于第二桌面空间时屏幕上显示的内容(如第二桌面空间包含的第二dock和第二组桌面page中的一个桌面page)。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives the twelfth operation. The twelfth operation is used to project the second desktop space to the display device. In response to the twelfth operation, the electronic device may send the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space to the display device. The display device may display the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space (such as the second dock included in the second desktop space and a desktop page in the second group of desktop pages).
进一步的,在电子设备将第二桌面空间投屏至显示设备的过程中,电子设备接收到第十三操作。响应于该第十三操作,电子设备可以将所处的桌面空间从第二桌面空间切换为第一桌面空间。电子设备可以显示第一桌面空间包含的第一dock和第一组桌面page中的一个桌面page。其中,显示设备仍显示上述电子设备处于第二桌面空间时屏幕上显示的内容。Further, when the electronic device projects the second desktop space to the display device, the electronic device receives a thirteenth operation. In response to the thirteenth operation, the electronic device may switch the desktop space it is in from the second desktop space to the first desktop space. The electronic device may display the first dock included in the first desktop space and one desktop page in the first group of desktop pages. Wherein, the display device still displays the content displayed on the screen when the electronic device is in the second desktop space.
由上述实施例可知,用户可以在电子设备中创建多个桌面空间。每一个桌面空间可以包含不同场景下的桌面组件。用户可以在投屏时选择需要投屏的桌面空间。电子设备中未被选中进行投屏的桌面空间则不会被投屏至其它显示设备。这可以满足投屏过程中用户并不想将电子设备中比较私密的内容投屏在其它显示设备上的需求。在投屏过程中,用户可以在电子设备中被投屏的桌面空间和未被投屏的桌面空间之间随意切换,且不用担心在未被投屏的桌面空间上不便于投屏的内容显示在其它显示设备上。It can be known from the above embodiments that the user can create multiple desktop spaces in the electronic device. Each desktop space can contain desktop components in different scenarios. The user can select the desktop space to be cast when casting the screen. The desktop space in the electronic device that is not selected for screen projection will not be projected to other display devices. This can meet the requirement that the user does not want to cast relatively private content in the electronic device on other display devices during the screen casting process. During the screen casting process, the user can freely switch between the screened desktop space and the non-projected desktop space in the electronic device, and there is no need to worry about displaying content that is not convenient for the screen projection on the non-projected desktop space on other display devices.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备接收到第十三操作,将第二桌面空间的属性的值设置为第一属性值。上述属性可以包括以下一项或多项:名称、壁纸、熄屏显示状态、主题。当处于第二桌面空间,电子设备可以在屏幕上按照上述第一属性值显示第二桌面空间 的属性。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device receives the thirteenth operation, and sets the attribute value of the second desktop space as the first attribute value. The above attributes may include one or more of the following: name, wallpaper, off-screen display status, and theme. When in the second desktop space, the electronic device can display the attributes of the second desktop space on the screen according to the above-mentioned first attribute value.
由上述实施例可知,用户可以手动设置一个桌面空间的名称、壁纸、AOD状态、主题等属性。在处于一个桌面空间时,电子设备可以在桌面上呈现这一个桌面空间的属性。不同的桌面空间可以具有不同的属性。这样,不同的桌面空间可以给用户带来不同的视觉效果。用户可以更加清楚地感知到不同桌面空间之间的差异,以及切换桌面空间之后的效果。It can be known from the above embodiments that the user can manually set attributes such as the name, wallpaper, AOD status, and theme of a desktop space. When in a desktop space, the electronic device may present the attributes of the desktop space on the desktop. Different desktop spaces can have different properties. In this way, different desktop spaces can bring different visual effects to users. Users can more clearly perceive the differences between different desktop spaces, as well as the effect after switching desktop spaces.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,电子设备可以在屏幕上显示第四桌面空间包含的dock和桌面page。上述第四桌面空间可以包含电子设备所有的桌面组件。第四桌面空间包含的桌面page上可显示有电子设备所有的桌面组件。或者,第四桌面空间包含的桌面page上可显示有电子设备所有桌面组件中除显示在第四桌面空间包含的dock中的桌面组件以外的桌面组件。电子设备接收到第十四操作。该第十四操作可用于下载第六桌面组件。响应于该第十操作,电子设备可以下载第六桌面组件,并在第四桌面空间包含的桌面page上显示第六桌面组件。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device may display the dock and the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space on the screen. The above fourth desktop space may include all desktop components of the electronic device. All desktop components of the electronic device can be displayed on the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space. Alternatively, the desktop page contained in the fourth desktop space may display desktop components among all desktop components of the electronic device except the desktop components displayed in the dock contained in the fourth desktop space. The electronic device receives a fourteenth operation. The fourteenth operation may be used to download the sixth desktop component. In response to the tenth operation, the electronic device may download the sixth desktop component, and display the sixth desktop component on the desktop page included in the fourth desktop space.
第二方面,本申请提供一种图形用户界面(GUI)。图形用户界面存储在电子设备中,电子设备包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,一个或多个处理器可用于执行存储在存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序。其中,图形用户界面可包括:显示在触摸屏上的第一GUI,第一GUI包括第一桌面page和第一dock,第一dock中显示有X个桌面组件。响应于第一操作,在触摸屏上显示的第二GUI,第一操作用于切换触摸屏上显示的dock,第二GUI包括第二dock,第二dock中显示有M个桌面组件。In a second aspect, the present application provides a graphical user interface (GUI). The graphical user interface is stored in an electronic device that includes a touch screen, memory, and one or more processors operable to execute one or more computer programs stored in the memory. Wherein, the graphical user interface may include: a first GUI displayed on the touch screen, the first GUI includes a first desktop page and a first dock, and X desktop components are displayed in the first dock. In response to the first operation, a second GUI is displayed on the touch screen, the first operation is used to switch the dock displayed on the touch screen, the second GUI includes the second dock, and M desktop components are displayed in the second dock.
第三方面,本申请提供一种电子设备。该电子设备包括:触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器。存储器可用于存储计算机程序。上述一个或多个处理器可用于调用计算机程序,使得上述电子设备执行如第一方面中任一可能的实现方法。In a third aspect, the present application provides an electronic device. The electronic device includes: a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors. Memory can be used to store computer programs. The above-mentioned one or more processors may be used to call a computer program, so that the above-mentioned electronic device executes any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
第四方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令。当上述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行如第一方面中任一可能的实现方法。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium including instructions. When the above instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
第五方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品。上述计算机程序产品包含计算机指令。当上述计算机指令在电子设备上运行,使得电子设备执行如第一方面中任一可能的实现方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product. The above-mentioned computer program product comprises computer instructions. When the above computer instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute any possible implementation method in the first aspect.
第六方面,本申请提供一种芯片,该芯片应用于电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该电子设备执行如第一方面中任一可能的实现方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to an electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processor is used to invoke computer instructions to make the electronic device perform any possible Implementation.
可以理解地,上述第三方面提供的电子设备、第四方面提供的计算机可读存储介质、第五方面提供的计算机程序产品、第六方面提供的芯片均用于执行本申请实施例所提供的方法。因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。It can be understood that the electronic device provided in the third aspect, the computer-readable storage medium provided in the fourth aspect, the computer program product provided in the fifth aspect, and the chip provided in the sixth aspect are all used to execute the method. Therefore, the beneficial effects that it can achieve can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, and will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的结构示意图;FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图1B是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的软件结构框图;FIG. 1B is a software structural block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图2A~图2H是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100创建桌面空间的场景示意图;2A to 2H are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 creating desktop spaces according to the embodiments of the present application;
图3A~图3D是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100创建桌面空间的场景示意图;3A to 3D are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 creating desktop spaces according to the embodiments of the present application;
图4A~图4C是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100切换桌面空间的场景示意图;4A to 4C are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 switching desktop spaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100桌面的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a desktop of an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图6A~图6E是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100在dock中推荐桌面组件的场景示意图;6A to 6E are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 recommending desktop components in the dock according to the embodiment of the present application;
图7A是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100推荐APP图标的方法流程图;FIG. 7A is a flow chart of a method for recommending an APP icon by an electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7B是本申请实施例提供的一种推荐规则;Figure 7B is a recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7C是本申请实施例提供的另一种推荐规则;Fig. 7C is another recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8A和图8B是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100在dock中推荐桌面组件的场景示意图;FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 recommending desktop components in the dock according to the embodiment of the present application;
图9A~图9F是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图;9A to 9F are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
图10A~图10D是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图;10A to 10D are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
图11A~图11C是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图;11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
图12A~图12C是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图;12A to 12C are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
图13A和图13B是本申请实施例提供的另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图;FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are schematic diagrams of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space according to the embodiment of the present application;
图13C是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100在一个桌面空间调整桌面组件的方法流程图;FIG. 13C is a flow chart of a method for adjusting desktop components in a desktop space by the electronic device 100 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13D是本申请实施例提供的一种确定一个桌面组件分组中确定与一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件的方法流程图;Fig. 13D is a flow chart of a method for determining a desktop component in a desktop component group that belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock of a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图14A~图14F是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100调整桌面组件在桌面page上的位置的场景示意图;14A to 14F are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 adjusting the positions of desktop components on the desktop page according to the embodiments of the present application;
图15A~图15D是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100将一个桌面空间投屏至显示设备200的场景示意图;15A to 15D are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 projecting a desktop space to the display device 200 according to the embodiment of the present application;
图16A~图16G是本申请实施例提供的一些电子设备100修改桌面空间的壁纸的场景示意图;16A to 16G are schematic diagrams of some electronic devices 100 modifying the wallpaper of the desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图17A和图17B是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100删除桌面空间的场景示意图。FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B are schematic diagrams of a scene where the electronic device 100 deletes a desktop space according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a description of associated objects The association relationship indicates that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the "multiple" The meaning is two or more.
本申请中的术语“用户界面”,是应用程序或操作系统与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面常用的表现形 式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI)。GUI是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面,可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的一个图标、窗口、控件等界面元素。其中,上述控件可以包含图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、导航栏、widget等可视的界面元素。The term "user interface" in this application is a media interface for interaction and information exchange between an application program or an operating system and a user, and it realizes the conversion between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to the user. The commonly used form of user interface is the graphical user interface (graphic user interface, GUI). The GUI refers to a user interface related to computer operations displayed in a graphical manner, and may be an icon, window, control, and other interface elements displayed on a display screen of an electronic device. Wherein, the above controls may include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface elements.
电子设备中的桌面是用户经常会使用到的一种用户界面。桌面也可称为主屏幕界面、主界面等等。桌面中可显示有APP图标、widget、服务卡片等桌面组件。上述桌面组件可以指GUI应用程序,可用于提供可视信息和/或功能的快捷入口。例如,日程widget可以显示用户日程安排。相机应用图标、联系人应用图标等APP图标可用于提供开启相应APP的快捷入口。其中,在电子设备显示其它用户界面的情况下,电子设备可以响应于作用在主屏键回到电子设备的桌面。上述主屏键也可称为home键等。A desktop in an electronic device is a user interface that users often use. The desktop may also be referred to as a home screen interface, a main interface, and the like. Desktop components such as APP icons, widgets, and service cards can be displayed on the desktop. The aforementioned desktop component may refer to a GUI application program, which may be used to provide quick access to visual information and/or functions. For example, a calendar widget can display the user's schedule. APP icons such as a camera application icon and a contact application icon may be used to provide a quick entry for opening a corresponding APP. Wherein, when the electronic device displays other user interfaces, the electronic device may return to the desktop of the electronic device in response to the home screen key. The above-mentioned home screen key may also be called a home key or the like.
由于现在的APP数量越来越多,大量的APP图标杂乱无章地分布在电子设备的桌面上使得用户在寻找APP图标时比较浪费时间,用户使用体验差。Due to the increasing number of APPs now, a large number of APP icons are distributed in a disorderly manner on the desktop of the electronic device, which makes it a waste of time for users to search for APP icons, and the user experience is poor.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以创建多个桌面页面(page)。一个桌面page可用于放置多个APP图标、widget、服务卡片等桌面组件。其中,一个桌面组件可以从一个桌面page移动至另一个桌面page。示例性的,用户可以将同一个场景下的多个桌面组件,或者经常一起使用的多个桌面组件移动至一个桌面page中。例如,一个桌面page中放置有学习场景下的一个或多个桌面组件。另一个桌面page中放置有运动场景下的一个或多个桌面组件。再一个桌面page中放置有娱乐场景下的多个桌面组件。在一些实施例中,用户可以通过左右滑动来切换不同的桌面page,从而寻找不同场景下的应用。In some embodiments, the electronic device can create multiple desktop pages. A desktop page can be used to place multiple app icons, widgets, service cards and other desktop components. Wherein, a desktop component can be moved from one desktop page to another desktop page. Exemplarily, the user can move multiple desktop components in the same scene, or multiple desktop components that are often used together, to a desktop page. For example, one or more desktop components in a learning scene are placed in a desktop page. One or more desktop components under the motion scene are placed in another desktop page. Multiple desktop components in the entertainment scene are placed in a desktop page. In some embodiments, the user can switch between different desktop pages by swiping left and right, so as to find applications in different scenarios.
上述方法可以帮助用户按照不同的使用场景对桌面组件进行分类,并且创建场景以及切换场景的用户操作均比较简便。但在一个场景下的桌面组件较多的情况下,用户仍然难以快速找到一个桌面组件。并且上述方法也难以帮助用户聚焦于一个场景。例如,在用户想要聚焦于学习场景的情况下,用户使用电子设备很容易查看到包含其它场景下的桌面组件的桌面page。The above method can help users classify desktop components according to different usage scenarios, and the user operations of creating scenarios and switching scenarios are relatively simple. However, when there are many desktop components in a scene, it is still difficult for the user to quickly find a desktop component. And the above method is also difficult to help the user focus on one scene. For example, when the user wants to focus on the learning scene, the user can easily view the desktop page including the desktop components in other scenes by using the electronic device.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以创建多个桌面文件夹。一个桌面文件夹中可包含多个APP图标。桌面文件夹可放置于桌面page上。其中,用户可以先打开桌面文件夹,再通过桌面文件夹中的APP图标来开启该APP图标对应的APP。用户可以将同一个场景下的多个APP图标、或者经常一起使用的多个APP图标移动至一个桌面文件夹中。In some embodiments, the electronic device can create multiple desktop folders. A desktop folder can contain multiple APP icons. Desktop folders can be placed on the desktop page. Wherein, the user may first open the desktop folder, and then open the APP corresponding to the APP icon through the APP icon in the desktop folder. The user can move multiple APP icons in the same scene, or multiple APP icons that are often used together, to a desktop folder.
上述方法可以帮助用户按照不同的使用场景对桌面组件进行分类,并且创建场景以及切换场景的用户操作均比较简便。但上述方法需要用户先寻找桌面文件夹,再从该桌面文件夹包含的多个APP图标中寻找自己需要的APP图标。在用户建立的桌面文件夹较多,一个桌面文件夹包含的APP图标较多的情况下,用户寻找APP图标比较浪费时间。另外,上述方法也难以帮助用户聚焦于一个场景。The above method can help users classify desktop components according to different usage scenarios, and the user operations of creating scenarios and switching scenarios are relatively simple. However, the above method requires the user to first search for the desktop folder, and then find the APP icon he needs from among the multiple APP icons contained in the desktop folder. When there are many desktop folders created by the user, and one desktop folder contains many APP icons, it is time-consuming for the user to search for the APP icons. In addition, the above method is also difficult to help the user focus on one scene.
在一些实施例中,电子设备的桌面上可包含有一个应用停靠栏(dock)。dock中可用于放置一个或多个APP图标。dock可以固定在桌面上(如桌面底部)。dock中的APP图标在桌面page切换时可以保持显示。用户可以将自己最常使用的APP图标放置于dock中。这样,用户可以通过dock快速找到并开启自己最常使用的APP。In some embodiments, the desktop of the electronic device may include an application dock. The dock can be used to place one or more APP icons. The dock can be fixed on the desktop (such as the bottom of the desktop). The APP icon in the dock can be kept displayed when the desktop page is switched. Users can place their most frequently used APP icons in the dock. In this way, users can quickly find and open their most frequently used APPs through the dock.
但dock中可放置的APP图标数量通常是有限的,难以对APP进行场景划分,无法帮助用户聚焦于一个场景。However, the number of APP icons that can be placed in the dock is usually limited, and it is difficult to divide the APP into scenes, and cannot help users focus on one scene.
在一些实施例中,电子设备可以隐藏一个或多个桌面page。上述被隐藏的桌面page可以是由用户选择的。这样,用户可以选择电子设备仅显示当前场景下需要使用的桌面page。In some embodiments, the electronic device can hide one or more desktop pages. The aforementioned hidden desktop page may be selected by the user. In this way, the user can select the electronic device to display only the desktop pages that need to be used in the current scene.
但上述方法需要用户将需要隐藏的桌面组件移动至被隐藏的桌面page中,用户操作比较繁琐,不便于用户快速切换不同场景下需要使用的桌面组件。However, the above method requires the user to move the desktop component to be hidden to the hidden desktop page, and the user operation is cumbersome, which is inconvenient for the user to quickly switch between the desktop components that need to be used in different scenarios.
本申请提供一种桌面管理方法。在该方法中,电子设备可以创建不同的桌面空间。一个桌面空间可以包含一个dock。一个dock中可放置一个或多个桌面组件(如一个场景下的一个或多个桌面组件)。即电子设备可以通过创建dock的方式来实现创建一个新的桌面空间,并通过切换不同的dock来实现切换不同的桌面空间。其中,电子设备可以响应于切换dock的预设用户操作(如向左滑动、向右滑动等)来切换不同的dock。This application provides a desktop management method. In this method, the electronic device can create different desktop spaces. A desktop space can contain a dock. One or more desktop components can be placed in a dock (for example, one or more desktop components in one scene). That is, the electronic device can create a new desktop space by creating a dock, and switch between different desktop spaces by switching different docks. Wherein, the electronic device may switch different docks in response to a preset user operation of switching docks (such as sliding to the left, sliding to the right, etc.).
上述创建和切换桌面空间的用户操作均比较简便。一个桌面空间中可以包含一个场景下的一个或多个桌面组件。用户可以快速地切换至不同的桌面空间,并通过一个桌面空间中的dock快速找到这一个桌面空间对应场景下最常使用的桌面组件。The above user operations for creating and switching desktop spaces are relatively simple. A desktop space can contain one or more desktop components in a scene. Users can quickly switch to different desktop spaces, and quickly find the most commonly used desktop components in the corresponding scene of a desktop space through the dock in a desktop space.
在一些实施例中,除了上述dock,一个桌面空间还可以包含一个或多个桌面page。用户可以选择将一个场景,例如场景A,会使用到的所有桌面组件放置在一个桌面空间的桌面page中,并将在场景A中最常使用的桌面组件放置在这一个桌面空间的dock中。那么,这一个桌面空间为与场景A对应的桌面空间。在处于一个桌面空间的情况下,电子设备可以显示这一个桌面空间的桌面page,并完整显示这一个桌面空间的dock中的桌面组件。响应于切换桌面空间的用户操作,电子设备可以在桌面上显示被切换之后的桌面空间包含的桌面page以及dock。In some embodiments, in addition to the aforementioned dock, a desktop space may also include one or more desktop pages. The user can choose to place all the desktop components used in a scene, such as scene A, on the desktop page of a desktop space, and place the most frequently used desktop components in scene A on the dock of this desktop space. Then, this desktop space is the desktop space corresponding to scenario A. In the case of one desktop space, the electronic device can display the desktop page of the one desktop space, and fully display the desktop components in the dock of the one desktop space. In response to the user operation of switching the desktop space, the electronic device may display the desktop page and the dock included in the switched desktop space on the desktop.
可以看出,电子设备在一个时间段可以显示一个桌面空间的桌面page以及dock,且一个桌面空间可以仅包含一个场景下的桌面组件。这可以简化桌面上呈现的内容,帮助用户聚焦于一个桌面空间对应的场景,减少其它桌面空间的应用程序打扰用户聚焦于这一个桌面空间对应的场景的情况。It can be seen that the electronic device can display a desktop page and a dock of a desktop space in a period of time, and a desktop space can only include desktop components in one scene. This can simplify the content presented on the desktop, help the user focus on a scene corresponding to a desktop space, and reduce the situation that applications in other desktop spaces interrupt the user's focus on the scene corresponding to this desktop space.
在一些实施例中,在处于一个桌面空间的情况下,电子设备可以仅显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知。这可以更好地帮助用户聚焦于一个桌面空间对应的场景。In some embodiments, when in a desktop space, the electronic device may only display message notifications of desktop components included in this desktop space. This can better help users focus on the scene corresponding to a desktop space.
本申请提供的桌面管理方法可以应用于电子设备100。电子设备100可以是搭载
Figure PCTCN2022130644-appb-000001
或者其它操作系统的便携式电子设备,例如手机、平板电脑、智能手表、智能手环等等,还可以是具有触敏表面或触控面板的膝上型计算机(Laptop)、具有触敏表面或触控面板的台式计算机等非便携式电子设备。本申请实施例对电子设备100的类型不作限定。
The desktop management method provided in this application can be applied to the electronic device 100 . Electronic device 100 may be equipped with
Figure PCTCN2022130644-appb-000001
Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems, such as mobile phones, tablet computers, smart watches, smart bracelets, etc., can also be laptop computers (Laptop) with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels, with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels. Non-portable electronic devices such as desktop computers with control panels. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the electronic device 100 .
请参考图1A,图1A示例性示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。Please refer to FIG. 1A . FIG. 1A schematically shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 .
电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申 请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the illustration, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU) wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。Wherein, the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 . In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。 Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT), 全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。The ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 . For example, when taking a picture, open the shutter, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By referring to the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other files in the external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存 储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . The internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data. Wherein, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) and the like. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal. The audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors. A capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. The electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其 上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also known as "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like. The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 .
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of the present application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
请参考图1B,图1B示例性示出了电子设备100的软件结构框图。Please refer to FIG. 1B , which schematically shows a software structural block diagram of the electronic device 100 .
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, which are respectively the application program layer, the application program framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer from top to bottom.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
如图1B所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,短信息,桌面管理应用等应用程序。As shown in FIG. 1B , the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, short message, and desktop management applications.
上述桌面管理应用可用于提供创建桌面空间以及切换桌面空间等管理桌面的功能。The above-mentioned desktop management application can be used to provide desktop management functions such as creating desktop spaces and switching desktop spaces.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图1B所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器,活动管理器等。As shown in Fig. 1B, the application framework layer may include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, activity manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构 建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
活动管理器用于负责管理活动(activity),负责系统中各组件的启动、切换、调度以及应用程序的管理和调度等工作。活动管理器可供上层应用调用以打开对应的activity。The activity manager is used to manage activities, and is responsible for the starting, switching, scheduling of each component in the system, and the management and scheduling of application programs. The activity manager can be called by the upper application to open the corresponding activity.
示例性的,当检测到用于创建桌面空间的用户操作,桌面管理应用可以调用活动管理器,打开与创建桌面空间相关的activity(如使得桌面进入编辑状态的activity、绘制用于创建桌面空间的用户界面的activity等),为用户提供创建桌面空间的服务。Exemplarily, when a user operation for creating a desktop space is detected, the desktop management application may invoke an activity manager to open an activity related to creating a desktop space (such as an activity that makes the desktop enter an editing state, draws an activity for creating a desktop space activity of the user interface, etc.), providing users with the service of creating a desktop space.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example. The camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种创建桌面空间的场景。The following describes a scenario of creating a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图2A~图2H示例性示出了一些电子设备100创建桌面空间的场景示意图。FIG. 2A to FIG. 2H exemplarily show some schematic diagrams of scenarios in which electronic devices 100 create desktop spaces.
阶段一(图2A~图2C):创建一个空白的dock。Stage 1 (Figure 2A ~ Figure 2C): Create a blank dock.
如图2A所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面210。桌面210可以包括状态栏211、桌面page212、页面指示符213和dock214。其中:As shown in FIG. 2A , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 210 . The desktop 210 may include a status bar 211 , a desktop page 212 , a page indicator 213 and a dock 214 . in:
状态栏211可包括移动通信信号(也可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符、无线高保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)信号的一个或多个信号强度指示符、电池状态指示符、时间指示符等。 Status bar 211 may include one or more signal strength indicators for mobile communication signals (also may be referred to as cellular signals), one or more signal strength indicators for wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) signals, battery status indicator, time indicator, etc.
桌面page212可包含widget、APP图标等桌面组件。例如,桌面page212中的widget可以包括时间widget212A、天气widget212B、日历widget212C。桌面page212中的APP图标可以包括联系人应用图标212D、拨号应用图标212E、信息应用图标212F、应用商城应用图标212G。The desktop page 212 may include desktop components such as widgets and APP icons. For example, the widgets in the desktop page 212 may include a time widget 212A, a weather widget 212B, and a calendar widget 212C. The APP icons on the desktop page 212 may include a contact application icon 212D, a dial application icon 212E, an information application icon 212F, and an application store application icon 212G.
页面指示符213可以表示当前显示的桌面page(如桌面page212)与其它桌面page的位置关系。通过页面指示符213,用户可以知道当前浏览的是哪一个桌面page。示例性的,页面指示符213中包含5个指示符。其中,页面指示符213中最左侧的指示符与另外4个指示符的显示样式可以不同。该最左侧的指示符可用于指示电子设备100的负一屏。页面指示符213中右侧的4个指示符可用于指示包含APP图标等桌面组件的桌面page。The page indicator 213 may indicate the positional relationship between the currently displayed desktop page (such as the desktop page 212 ) and other desktop pages. Through the page indicator 213, the user can know which desktop page is being browsed currently. Exemplarily, the page indicator 213 includes 5 indicators. Wherein, the display style of the leftmost indicator among the page indicators 213 may be different from that of the other four indicators. The leftmost indicator can be used to indicate the negative one screen of the electronic device 100 . The four indicators on the right side of the page indicator 213 can be used to indicate the desktop page containing desktop components such as APP icons.
由图2A可以看出,电子设备100在桌面210上显示桌面page212。页面指示符213中从左至右第二个指示符处于选中状态。即页面指示符213中从左至右第二个指示符可用于指示桌面page212。It can be seen from FIG. 2A that the electronic device 100 displays a desktop page 212 on the desktop 210 . The second indicator from left to right among the page indicators 213 is selected. That is, the second indicator from left to right among the page indicators 213 can be used to indicate the desktop page 212 .
响应于用于切换桌面page的用户操作(如作用在桌面page所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作),电子设备100可以切换呈现在桌面上的桌面page。其中,页面指示符213中处于被选中状态的指示符随桌面page的切换而变化。In response to a user operation for switching desktop pages (such as a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the desktop page is located), the electronic device 100 may switch the desktop page presented on the desktop. Among the page indicators 213, the indicator in the selected state changes with the switching of the desktop page.
dock214可用于放置一个或多个桌面组件,例如,视频应用图标214A、音乐应用图标214B和AA视频应用图标214C。dock214可以固定在桌面210的底部。dock214中的桌面组件在桌面page切换时可以保持显示。应用停靠栏也可以称为应用程序托盘、应用程序导航栏等等。Dock 214 may be used to house one or more desktop components, such as video application icon 214A, music application icon 214B, and AA video application icon 214C. The dock 214 can be fixed on the bottom of the desktop 210 . The desktop components in dock214 can keep displaying when the desktop page is switched. The application dock can also be called the application tray, application navigation bar, and so on.
本申请以应用停靠栏中放置的桌面组件为APP图标为例进行说明。不限于APP图标,应用停靠栏中还可以放置widget、服务卡片等桌面组件。In this application, the desktop component placed in the application dock is an APP icon as an example for illustration. Not limited to APP icons, desktop components such as widgets and service cards can also be placed in the application dock.
在一些实施例中,桌面210还可以显示有导航栏,例如采用虚拟按键进行导航。导航栏中可以包括后退(back)键、主屏幕(home)键、最近任务(recent)键。其中,后退键可用于触发电子设备100返回上一级用户界面。主屏幕键可用于触发电子设备100返回桌面。最近任务键可用于触发电子设备100显示最近使用过的应用程序。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以采用手势导航。例如,在电子设备100屏幕左边或右边向内滑动的手势可用于触发电子设备100返回上一级用户界面。在电子设备100屏幕底部向上滑动的手势可用于触发电子设备100返回桌面。在电子设备100屏幕底部向上滑动并停住的手势可用于触发电子设备100显示最近使用过的应用程序。本申请实施例对电子设备中的导航方式不作具体限定。In some embodiments, the desktop 210 may also display a navigation bar, such as using virtual keys for navigation. The navigation bar may include a back (back) key, a main screen (home) key, and a recent task (recent) key. Wherein, the back key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the previous user interface. The home key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the desktop. The recent task key can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display recently used applications. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may use gesture navigation. For example, a gesture of sliding inward on the left or right side of the screen of the electronic device 100 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the previous user interface. A gesture of sliding up at the bottom of the screen of the electronic device 100 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the desktop. A gesture of sliding up and stopping at the bottom of the screen of the electronic device 100 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display recently used applications. The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the navigation manner in the electronic device.
桌面210中还可以包含更多或更少的内容,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The desktop 210 may also include more or less content, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
如图2A所示,桌面210中包含一个dock,即dock214。响应于作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以在桌面210上显示图2B所示的添加控件215。上述添加控件215可以位于dock214的右侧。As shown in FIG. 2A , the desktop 210 includes a dock, namely dock 214 . In response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the dock 214 is located, the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 shown in FIG. 2B on the desktop 210 . The aforementioned add control 215 may be located on the right side of the dock 214 .
在一些实施例中,响应于作用在dock214所在区域向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock214的左侧显示添加控件215。本申请实施例对添加控件215的显示位置不作限定。In some embodiments, in response to the user operation of sliding right on the area where the dock 214 is located, the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 on the left side of the dock 214 . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the display position of the added control 215 .
不限于上述作用在dock214所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100还可以响应于其它用于创建桌面空间的用户操作,显示上述添加控件215。例如作用在dock所在区域长按的用户操作。Not limited to the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock 214 is located, the electronic device 100 may also display the above adding control 215 in response to other user operations for creating a desktop space. For example, it acts on the user operation of long-pressing the area where the dock is located.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以在预设时间段内没有用户操作作用在添加控件215的情况下,在桌面210上取消显示添加控件215。也即是说,若用户在添加控件215在桌面210上显示的预设时间段内没有对添加控件215进行用户操作(如触摸操作),添加控件215将从桌面210上消失。本申请实施例对上述预设时间段的长度不作限定。例如,上述预设时间段可以是3秒、5秒等。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may cancel the display of the adding control 215 on the desktop 210 when there is no user operation on the adding control 215 within a preset period of time. That is to say, if the user does not perform any user operation (such as a touch operation) on the added control 215 within the preset time period when the added control 215 is displayed on the desktop 210 , the added control 215 will disappear from the desktop 210 . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the foregoing preset time period. For example, the aforementioned preset time period may be 3 seconds, 5 seconds and so on.
如图2B所示,响应于作用在添加控件215的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图2C所示的用户界面220。用户界面220为处于可编辑状态下的桌面210。也即是说,电子设备100可以响应于作用在添加控件215的用户操作进入桌面编辑状态。As shown in FIG. 2B , in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the adding control 215 , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2C . The user interface 220 is the desktop 210 in an editable state. That is to say, the electronic device 100 may enter the desktop editing state in response to a user operation acting on the adding control 215 .
如图2C所示,用户界面220可包括缩略桌面page221、缩略桌面page222、缩略桌面page223、页面添加/移除组件224、自动选择组件225、缩放组件226、缩略页面指示符227、缩略dock228、待编辑dock229和场景设置组件230。其中:As shown in FIG. 2C, the user interface 220 may include a thumbnail desktop page 221, a thumbnail desktop page 222, a thumbnail desktop page 223, a page addition/removal component 224, an automatic selection component 225, a zoom component 226, a thumbnail page indicator 227, The thumbnail dock228, the dock to be edited229 and the scene setting component230. in:
缩略桌面page222可以是上述桌面page212的缩略图。缩略桌面page222中包含的桌面组件为桌面page212的桌面组件的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 222 may be a thumbnail of the aforementioned desktop page 212 . The desktop components included in the thumbnail desktop page 222 are thumbnails of the desktop components on the desktop page 212 .
缩略桌面page221可以是桌面page212左侧的桌面page的缩略图。在一些实施例中,桌面page212左侧的桌面page为负一屏,缩略桌面page221也可以是用于添加桌面page的页面。The thumbnail desktop page 221 may be a thumbnail of the desktop page on the left side of the desktop page 212 . In some embodiments, the desktop page on the left side of the desktop page 212 is negative one screen, and the thumbnail desktop page 221 may also be a page for adding a desktop page.
缩略桌面page223可以是桌面page212右侧的桌面page的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 223 may be a thumbnail of the desktop page on the right side of the desktop page 212 .
其中,缩略桌面page222在用户界面220的中间完整显示。缩略桌面page221和缩略桌面page223分别部分显示在用户界面220的两侧。这可以表示缩略桌面page222的左侧和右侧均存在缩略桌面page。用户可以通过作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作,来切换完整显示在用户界面220中的缩略桌面page。Wherein, the thumbnail desktop page 222 is completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 220 . The thumbnail desktop page 221 and the thumbnail desktop page 223 are partially displayed on both sides of the user interface 220 respectively. This may indicate that there are thumbnail desktop pages on the left and right sides of the thumbnail desktop page 222 . The user can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 through a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located.
页面添加/移除组件224可用于触发电子设备100在一个桌面空间中添加或移除完整显示在用户界面220中间的缩略桌面page(如缩略桌面page222)。The page adding/removing component 224 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove a thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 222 ) completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 220 in a desktop space.
自动选择组件225可用于触发电子设备100移除完整显示在用户界面220中间的缩略桌面page上的一个或多个桌面组件。可选的,自动选择组件225也可以用于触发电子设备100移除所有缩略桌面page上的一个或多个桌面组件。The automatic selection component 225 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components completely displayed on the thumbnail desktop page in the middle of the user interface 220 . Optionally, the automatic selection component 225 may also be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components on all thumbnail desktop pages.
缩放组件226可用于触发电子设备100在一个用户界面上显示多个完整的桌面page的缩略图,以便于用户快速移除多个桌面page。The zoom component 226 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display thumbnails of multiple complete desktop pages on a user interface, so that the user can quickly remove multiple desktop pages.
场景设置组件230可用于触发电子设备100显示用于设置桌面空间的桌面组件在桌面page上的排列顺序,桌面空间的名称、壁纸、熄屏显示(always on display,AOD)状态等桌面空间属性的设置组件。The scene setting component 230 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the arrangement order of the desktop components for setting the desktop space on the desktop page, the name of the desktop space, the wallpaper, the status of the always on display (AOD) and other properties of the desktop space. Set up components.
上述页面添加/移除组件224、自动选择组件225、缩放组件226、场景设置组件230将在后续实施例中具体介绍。这里先不展开。可选的,用户界面220中可不包含页面添加/移除组件224、自动选择组件225、缩放组件226、场景设置组件230这四个组件,或者包含这四个组件中的一个或多个。The above-mentioned page adding/removing component 224, automatic selection component 225, scaling component 226, and scene setting component 230 will be specifically introduced in subsequent embodiments. Let's not expand here. Optionally, the user interface 220 may not include the four components of the page adding/removing component 224 , the automatic selection component 225 , the scaling component 226 , and the scene setting component 230 , or may contain one or more of these four components.
缩略页面指示符227可以表示当前完整显示的缩略桌面page(如缩略桌面page222)与其它缩略桌面page的位置关系。示例性的,缩略页面指示符227中包含6个指示符。其中,缩略页面指示符227中最左侧和最右侧的指示符呈现“+”的显示样式。这两个指示符指示的缩略桌面page可以均可以是用于添加桌面page的页面。缩略页面指示符227中位于中间的4 个指示符可以指示包含APP图标等桌面组件的桌面page的缩略图。本申请实施例对缩略页面指示符227的显示样式不作限定。The thumbnail page indicator 227 may represent the positional relationship between the currently fully displayed thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 222 ) and other thumbnail desktop pages. Exemplarily, the thumbnail page indicator 227 includes 6 indicators. Wherein, the leftmost and rightmost indicators among the thumbnail page indicators 227 present a display style of "+". The thumbnail desktop pages indicated by the two indicators may both be pages for adding desktop pages. The four middle indicators among the thumbnail page indicators 227 may indicate thumbnails of desktop pages containing desktop components such as APP icons. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the display style of the thumbnail page indicator 227 .
缩略dock228可以是上述dock214的缩略图。其中,dock214是一个完整显示的应用停靠栏,dock214中放置的APP图标均完整呈现在桌面210上。 Thumbnail dock 228 may be a thumbnail image of dock 214 described above. Wherein, the dock 214 is a fully displayed application dock bar, and the APP icons placed in the dock 214 are fully presented on the desktop 210 .
在一些实施例中,缩略dock228中的APP图标可以是如图2C所示重叠显示的。其中,缩略dock228中的各个APP图标可以显示在不同层上,位于上层的APP图标可以部分覆盖位于下层的APP图标。本申请实施例对缩略dock228中置于最上层的APP图标不作限定。例如,在待编辑dock229位于缩略dock228右侧的情况下,缩略dock228中置于最上层的APP图标可以是dock214中最右侧APP图标的缩略图,即AA视频应用图标214C的缩略图。在待编辑dock229位于缩略dock228左侧的情况下,缩略dock228中置于最上层的APP图标可以是dock214中最左侧APP图标的缩略图,即视频应用图标214A的缩略图。In some embodiments, the APP icons in the thumbnail dock 228 may be overlapped and displayed as shown in FIG. 2C . Wherein, each APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 can be displayed on different layers, and the APP icons on the upper layer can partially cover the APP icons on the lower layer. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the APP icon placed on the top layer in the thumbnail dock 228 . For example, when the dock 229 to be edited is located on the right side of the thumbnail dock 228, the top APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 may be the thumbnail of the rightmost APP icon in the dock 214, that is, the thumbnail of the AA video application icon 214C. When the dock 229 to be edited is located on the left side of the thumbnail dock 228, the topmost APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 may be the thumbnail of the leftmost APP icon in the dock 214, that is, the thumbnail of the video application icon 214A.
在另一些实施例中,缩略dock228中的APP图标也可以均完整呈现在用户界面220上。其中,缩略dock228中的APP图标是dock214中APP图标的缩略图。一个APP图标的缩略图可以是这一个APP图标变小之后的图像。即一个APP图标的缩略图的大小略小于这一个APP图标的大小。本申请实施例对电子设备100对一个APP图标进行缩略处理,得到这一个APP图标的缩略图的实现方式不作限定。In some other embodiments, the APP icons in the thumbnail dock 228 may also be fully presented on the user interface 220 . Wherein, the APP icon in the thumbnail dock228 is a thumbnail of the APP icon in the dock214. The thumbnail image of an APP icon may be a reduced image of the APP icon. That is, the size of the thumbnail of an APP icon is slightly smaller than the size of the APP icon. In this embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 performs thumbnail processing on an APP icon to obtain a thumbnail image of the APP icon.
待编辑dock229即为电子设备100创建的空白的dock。如图2C所示,待编辑dock229中还未添加桌面组件。用户可以通过预设的用户操作(如将缩略桌面page中的桌面组件拖拽至待编辑dock229)在待编辑dock229中添加桌面组件。The dock 229 to be edited is a blank dock created by the electronic device 100 . As shown in FIG. 2C , no desktop component has been added to the dock 229 to be edited. The user can add a desktop component in the dock 229 to be edited through a preset user operation (such as dragging a desktop component in the thumbnail desktop page to the dock 229 to be edited).
在一些实施例中,若电子设备100在待编辑dock229中未添加有桌面组件的情况下退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示图2A所示的桌面210。即电子设备100并未完成dock的创建。可以理解的,经过图2A和图2B所示的用户操作,电子设备100仅创建了一个空白的dock,还未完成dock的创建。在待编辑dock229中添加有桌面组件的情况下,该dock完成创建。In some embodiments, if the electronic device 100 exits the desktop editing state without adding a desktop component in the dock 229 to be edited, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2A . That is, the electronic device 100 has not completed the creation of the dock. It can be understood that after the user operations shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B , the electronic device 100 only creates a blank dock, and the creation of the dock has not been completed yet. In the case that a desktop component is added to the dock 229 to be edited, the dock is created.
阶段二(图2D~图2H):在空白的dock中添加桌面组件。Stage 2 (Fig. 2D-2H): add desktop components in the blank dock.
如图2C所示,响应于作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以切换完整显示在用户界面220中的缩略桌面page,显示图2D所示的用户界面220。As shown in FIG. 2C, in response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220, and display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2D. .
如图2D所示,电子设备100将缩略桌面page223完整显示在用户界面220,并在缩略桌面page223的左侧部分显示缩略桌面page222,在缩略桌面page223的右侧部分显示缩略桌面page231。经过上述图2C至图2D所示缩略桌面page的切换过程,缩略页面指示符227中被选中的指示符从缩略页面指示符227左侧第二个指示符变化为缩略页面指示符227左侧第三个指示符。As shown in FIG. 2D , the electronic device 100 completely displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the user interface 220, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 222 on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 223, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 223. page231. After the above-mentioned switching process of the thumbnail desktop page shown in FIG. 2C to FIG. 2D , the selected indicator in the thumbnail page indicator 227 changes from the second indicator on the left side of the thumbnail page indicator 227 to the thumbnail page indicator 227 is the third indicator from the left.
缩略桌面page223中可包含多个桌面组件的缩略图,例如运动健康缩略图标223A。运动健康缩略图标223A可以是运动健康应用图标的缩略图。响应于作用在运动健康缩略图标223A上,将运动健康缩略图标223A拖拽至待编辑dock229的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图2E所示的用户界面220。The thumbnail desktop page 223 may contain thumbnails of multiple desktop components, such as the sports and health thumbnail icon 223A. The fitness and fitness thumbnail icon 223A may be a thumbnail of a fitness and fitness application icon. In response to the user's operation of dragging the exercise and health thumbnail icon 223A to the dock 229 to be edited, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2E .
如图2E所示,待编辑dock229中包含运动健康缩略图标229A。该运动健康缩略图标229A可以是运动健康应用图标的缩略图。As shown in FIG. 2E , the dock 229 to be edited includes a sports health thumbnail icon 229A. The fitness and fitness thumbnail icon 229A may be a thumbnail of a fitness and fitness application icon.
在一些实施例中,当一个桌面组件被添加至一个dock中,电子设备100仍可将这一个桌面组件放置于桌面page中。其中,响应于将一个桌面组件拖拽至一个dock的用户操作,电 子设备100可以复制这一个桌面组件,并将复制得到的桌面组件添加至这一个dock中。用户可以通过添加有这一个桌面组件的dock快速找到这一个桌面组件。当用户浏览其它不包含这一个桌面组件的dock时,用户仍可在桌面page上找到这一个桌面组件。In some embodiments, when a desktop component is added to a dock, the electronic device 100 can still place this desktop component on the desktop page. Wherein, in response to a user operation of dragging a desktop component to a dock, the electronic device 100 may copy the desktop component, and add the copied desktop component to the dock. Users can quickly find this desktop component by adding the dock with this desktop component. When the user browses other docks that do not contain this desktop component, the user can still find this desktop component on the desktop page.
在一些实施例中,当一个桌面组件被添加至一个dock中,电子设备100也可以不再将这一个桌面组件放置于桌面page中。其中,当用户浏览包含一个桌面组件的dock时,桌面page中可不包含这一个桌面组件。当用户浏览不包含这一个桌面组件的dock时,桌面page中可以包含这一个桌面组件。可选的,在一个桌面组件被添加至一个dock的情况下,用户浏览包含这一个桌面组件的dock或者浏览不包含这一个桌面组件的dock时,桌面page中均可不包含这一个桌面组件。In some embodiments, when a desktop component is added to a dock, the electronic device 100 may no longer place this desktop component on the desktop page. Wherein, when the user browses a dock including a desktop component, the desktop page may not include the desktop component. When the user browses a dock that does not contain this desktop component, the desktop page can include this desktop component. Optionally, when a desktop component is added to a dock, when the user browses a dock containing the desktop component or a dock not containing the desktop component, the desktop page may not contain the desktop component.
如图2E所示,响应于作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以切换完整显示在用户界面220中的缩略桌面page,显示图2F所示的用户界面220。As shown in FIG. 2E , in response to the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 can switch the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 and display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2F .
如图2F所示,电子设备100将缩略桌面page231完整显示在用户界面220,并在缩略桌面page231的左侧部分显示缩略桌面page223,在缩略桌面page231的右侧部分显示缩略桌面page232。缩略页面指示符227中被选中的指示符为缩略页面指示符227左侧第四个指示符。As shown in FIG. 2F , the electronic device 100 completely displays the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the user interface 220, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 223 on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 231, and displays the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 231. page232. The selected indicator among the thumbnail page indicators 227 is the fourth indicator from the left of the thumbnail page indicator 227 .
缩略桌面page231中可包含多个桌面组件的缩略图,例如AA运动缩略图标231A。响应于作用在AA运动缩略图标231A上,将AA运动缩略图标231A拖拽至待编辑dock229的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图2G所示的用户界面220。The thumbnail desktop page 231 may include multiple thumbnail images of desktop components, such as the AA motion thumbnail icon 231A. In response to a user operation acting on the AA sports thumbnail icon 231A, dragging the AA sports thumbnail icon 231A to the dock 229 to be edited, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2G .
如图2G所示,待编辑dock229中包含运动健康缩略图标229A和AA运动缩略图标229B。该AA运动缩略图标229B可以是AA运动应用图标的缩略图。As shown in FIG. 2G , the dock 229 to be edited includes a sports health thumbnail icon 229A and an AA sports thumbnail icon 229B. The AA Sports thumbnail icon 229B may be a thumbnail image of the AA Sports application icon.
在一些实施例中,不限于将缩略桌面page中的桌面组件添加至待编辑dock229,其它dock中包含的桌面组件也可被添加至待编辑dock229中。示例性的,缩略dock228中的APP图标完整呈现的用户界面220上。响应于将缩略dock228中的视频缩略图标拖拽至待编辑dock229的用户操作,电子设备100可以在待编辑dock229中添加该视频缩略图标。上述视频缩略图标可以是视频应用图标214A的缩略图。其中,当将上述缩略dock228中的视频缩略图标添加至待编辑dock229,缩略dock228中仍可包含视频缩略图标。可选的,当将上述缩略dock228中的视频缩略图标添加至待编辑dock229,缩略dock228中可不包含视频缩略图标。In some embodiments, it is not limited to add the desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page to the dock 229 to be edited, and desktop components contained in other docks can also be added to the dock 229 to be edited. Exemplarily, the APP icon in the thumbnail dock 228 is fully presented on the user interface 220 . In response to the user operation of dragging the video thumbnail icon in the thumbnail dock 228 to the dock 229 to be edited, the electronic device 100 may add the video thumbnail icon in the dock 229 to be edited. The aforementioned video thumbnail icon may be a thumbnail of the video application icon 214A. Wherein, when the video thumbnail icon in the above-mentioned thumbnail dock 228 is added to the dock 229 to be edited, the thumbnail dock 228 can still include the video thumbnail icon. Optionally, when the video thumbnail icon in the thumbnail dock 228 is added to the dock 229 to be edited, the video thumbnail icon may not be included in the thumbnail dock 228.
响应于用于退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作,例如作用在桌面page所在区域的触摸操作,电子设备100可以退出桌面编辑状态,显示图2H所示的桌面210。本申请实施例对上述用于退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作不作限定。例如,上述用于退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作还可以是双指向外张开(即双指按下,然后将手指分开,然后抬起)的用户操作。In response to a user operation for exiting the desktop editing state, such as a touch operation on the area where the desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may exit the desktop editing state and display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2H . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operations for exiting the desktop editing state. For example, the above-mentioned user operation for exiting the desktop editing state may also be a user operation of spreading two fingers outward (that is, pressing two fingers, then separating the fingers, and then lifting them).
如图2H所示,桌面210中可包括桌面page218、页面指示符213、简化dock216和dock217。其中:As shown in FIG. 2H , the desktop 210 may include a desktop page 218 , a page indicator 213 , a simplified dock 216 and a dock 217 . in:
桌面page218可以是缩略桌面page231对应的页面。即缩略桌面page231是桌面page218的缩略图。可以理解的,在退出桌面编辑状态时,用户界面220中完整显示的缩略桌面page为缩略桌面page231。那么在退出桌面编辑状态后,电子设备100可以在桌面210上显示缩略桌面page231对应的页面,即桌面page218。桌面page218中可包含APP图标等桌面组件。The desktop page 218 may be a page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page 231 . That is, the thumbnail desktop page 231 is a thumbnail image of the desktop page 218 . It can be understood that when the desktop editing state is exited, the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the user interface 220 is the thumbnail desktop page 231 . Then, after exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 231 on the desktop 210 , that is, the desktop page 218 . The desktop page 218 may include desktop components such as APP icons.
页面指示符213可以参考前述图1A所示实施例的介绍。For the page indicator 213, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 1A.
简化dock216可以是对上述dock214的简化显示。上述缩略dock228也可以是简化dock216的缩略图。简化dock216中的APP图标可以是如图2H所示重叠显示的。其中,简化dock216中的各个APP图标可以显示在不同层上,位于上层的APP图标可以部分覆盖位于下层的APP图标。本申请实施例对简化dock216中置于最上层的APP图标不作限定。例如,在一个完整 显示的dock(如dock217)位于简化dock216的右侧的情况下,简化dock216中置于最上层的APP图标可以是dock214中最右侧的APP图标,即AA视频应用图标。在一个完整显示的dock(如dock217)位于简化dock216的左侧的情况下,简化dock216中置于最上层的APP图标可以是dock214中最左侧的APP图标,即视频应用图标。 Simplified dock 216 may be a simplified display of dock 214 described above. The aforementioned thumbnail dock 228 may also be a thumbnail image of the simplified dock 216 . The APP icons in the simplified dock 216 may be overlapped and displayed as shown in FIG. 2H . Wherein, each APP icon in the simplified dock 216 can be displayed on different layers, and the APP icons on the upper layer can partially cover the APP icons on the lower layer. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the APP icon placed on the top layer in the simplified dock 216 . For example, in the case that a fully displayed dock (such as dock217) is located on the right side of the simplified dock216, the APP icon placed on the top layer in the simplified dock216 can be the rightmost APP icon in the dock214, that is, the AA video application icon. In the case that a fully displayed dock (such as dock 217 ) is located on the left side of the simplified dock 216 , the topmost APP icon in the simplified dock 216 may be the leftmost APP icon in the dock 214 , that is, the video application icon.
dock217即为经过上述图2A~图2F所示的过程创建的dock。dock中包含有用户添加的APP图标:运动健康应用图标217A和AA运动应用图标217B。在一些实施例中,dock中APP图标的显示样式可以与桌面page中APP图标的显示样式相同。可选的,dock中APP图标的显示样式与桌面page中APP图标的显示样式也可以不同。例如,dock中APP图标的大小略小于桌面page中APP图标的大小。The dock217 is the dock created through the process shown in the above-mentioned Fig. 2A to Fig. 2F. The dock contains APP icons added by users: sports and health application icon 217A and AA sports application icon 217B. In some embodiments, the display style of the APP icon in the dock may be the same as the display style of the APP icon in the desktop page. Optionally, the display style of the APP icon in the dock may also be different from the display style of the APP icon in the desktop page. For example, the size of the APP icon in the dock is slightly smaller than the size of the APP icon in the desktop page.
桌面210的其它内容可以参考前述图1A所示实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。For other contents of the desktop 210, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 1A. I won't go into details here.
由图2H可以看出,在一些实施例中,由于桌面210的显示区域有限,在存在多个dock的情况下,电子设备100可以仅在桌面210上完整显示一个dock,对其它dock简化显示。上述被简化显示的简化dock既可以节省桌面210的显示区域,便于电子设备100能完整显示上述一个dock,又可以提醒用户这些简化dock的存在。在一些实施例中,由于桌面210的显示区域有限,在存在多个dock的情况下,电子设备100可以仅在桌面210上完整显示一个dock。其它dock不呈现在桌面210上。在一些实施例中,在存在多个dock的情况下,电子设备100可以在桌面210上完整显示两个及以上数量的dock,其它未完整显示的dock可以被简化显示在桌面210上或者不呈现在桌面210上。示例性的,dock214中包含3个APP图标。dock217中包含2个APP图标。桌面210有足够的显示区域来显示dock214和dock217。那么,电子设备100可将dock214和dock217均完整显示在桌面210上。这样,用户可以同时浏览两个dock或者更多数量的dock。其中,在上述dock显示方式不同的各实施例中,用户均可以通过预设的用户操作(如向左或向右滑动dock)来触发电子设备100切换在桌面210上完整显示的dock,从而浏览不同的dock。电子设备100切换dock的场景将在后续实施例中具体说明。这里先不展开介绍。It can be seen from FIG. 2H that, in some embodiments, due to the limited display area of the desktop 210, in the case of multiple docks, the electronic device 100 may only fully display one dock on the desktop 210, and simplify the display for other docks. The above-mentioned simplified display of the simplified dock can not only save the display area of the desktop 210, so that the electronic device 100 can fully display the above-mentioned dock, but also remind the user of the existence of these simplified docks. In some embodiments, since the display area of the desktop 210 is limited, if there are multiple docks, the electronic device 100 may completely display only one dock on the desktop 210 . Other docks are not presented on the desktop 210 . In some embodiments, when there are multiple docks, the electronic device 100 can fully display two or more docks on the desktop 210, and other incompletely displayed docks can be simplified and displayed on the desktop 210 or not presented on the desktop 210 . Exemplarily, the dock214 contains 3 APP icons. There are 2 APP icons in dock217. Desktop 210 has enough display area to display dock 214 and dock 217 . Then, the electronic device 100 can completely display both the dock 214 and the dock 217 on the desktop 210 . In this way, the user can browse two docks or more docks at the same time. Among them, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments with different dock display modes, the user can trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop 210 through a preset user operation (such as sliding the dock to the left or right), so as to browse Different docks. The scenario in which the electronic device 100 switches the dock will be specifically described in subsequent embodiments. Let’s not start the introduction here.
可以理解的,一个桌面空间可包含一个dock。上述图2A~图2H所示创建一个dock的过程即为创建一个桌面空间的过程。用户可以将一个场景下最常使用的APP的图标放置于一个dock中。这一个场景即为这一个dock所属桌面空间对应的场景。例如,dock214中包含视频类、音乐类等娱乐场景下的APP图标。dock214所属的桌面空间即为娱乐桌面空间。dock217中包含运动类等运动场景下的APP图标。dock217所属的桌面空间即为运动桌面空间。Understandably, a desktop space may include a dock. The process of creating a dock shown in FIGS. 2A to 2H above is the process of creating a desktop space. Users can place the icons of the most frequently used APPs in a scene in a dock. This scene is the scene corresponding to the desktop space to which the dock belongs. For example, the dock 214 includes APP icons in entertainment scenarios such as videos and music. The desktop space to which dock214 belongs is the entertainment desktop space. Dock217 contains APP icons in sports scenes such as sports. The desktop space to which dock217 belongs is the motion desktop space.
上述创建桌面空间的用户操作比较简单,用户可以快速地创建不同的桌面空间来对桌面组件进行场景划分,并通过桌面空间的dock快速找到该桌面空间对应场景下最常使用的桌面组件。The above-mentioned user operation of creating a desktop space is relatively simple. The user can quickly create different desktop spaces to divide the desktop components into scenes, and quickly find the most frequently used desktop components in the corresponding scene of the desktop space through the dock of the desktop space.
在一些实施例中,在创建dock的过程中,电子设备100仍可显示图2B所示的桌面210,而不进入桌面编辑状态。示例性的,响应于作用在图2B所示添加控件215的用户操作,电子设备100可以在桌面210上显示一个空白的dock。例如,添加控件215从桌面210上消失,上述一个空白的dock可以显示在dock214的右侧。其中,dock214可以是如图2B所示完整显示在桌面210上。或者,dock214也可以被简化显示,以图2H所示简化dock216的样式呈现在桌面210上。用户可以将桌面page(如桌面page212、桌面page218等)上的桌面组件添加至上述空白的dock,从而完成桌面空间的创建。上述将桌面page上的桌面组件添加至空 白的dock的方式可以例如是将桌面组件拖拽至该空白的dock中。本申请实施例对将桌面组件添加至新创建的dock中的方法不作限定。In some embodiments, during the process of creating a dock, the electronic device 100 can still display the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 2B without entering the desktop editing state. Exemplarily, in response to a user operation acting on the add control 215 shown in FIG. 2B , the electronic device 100 may display a blank dock on the desktop 210 . For example, the add control 215 disappears from the desktop 210 , and a blank dock as described above can be displayed on the right side of the dock 214 . Wherein, the dock 214 may be completely displayed on the desktop 210 as shown in FIG. 2B . Alternatively, the dock 214 can also be displayed in a simplified manner, and presented on the desktop 210 in the style of the simplified dock 216 shown in FIG. 2H . The user can add desktop components on the desktop page (such as desktop page 212, desktop page 218, etc.) to the blank dock, thereby completing the creation of the desktop space. The above-mentioned mode of adding the desktop component on the desktop page to the blank dock can be, for example, dragging the desktop component into the blank dock. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the method for adding the desktop component to the newly created dock.
其中,电子设备100可以在预设时间段内上述一个空白的dock中未添加有桌面组件的情况下,在桌面210上取消显示上述一个空白的dock。也即是说,若用户通过图2A和图2B所示的用户操作触发电子设备100显示一个空白的dock后,在预设时间段内未在这一个空白的dock中添加桌面组件,这一个空白的dock将从桌面210消失。本申请实施例对上述预设时间段的长度不作限定。例如,上述预设时间段可以是15秒、30秒等。可选的,响应于其它用于删除空白的dock的用户操作,电子设备100可以在桌面210上取消显示该空白的dock。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may cancel the display of the blank dock on the desktop 210 when no desktop component is added to the blank dock within a preset period of time. That is to say, if the user triggers the electronic device 100 to display a blank dock through the user operation shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. The dock will disappear from the desktop 210. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the length of the foregoing preset time period. For example, the aforementioned preset time period may be 15 seconds, 30 seconds and so on. Optionally, in response to other user operations for deleting the blank dock, the electronic device 100 may cancel displaying the blank dock on the desktop 210 .
可以理解的,上述用于将桌面组件添加至新创建的dock中的方法也可用于将桌面组件添加至已经存在的dock中。It can be understood that the above method for adding a desktop component to a newly created dock can also be used to add a desktop component to an existing dock.
例如,图2H所示的桌面中已经存在dock217。响应于将桌面page中的一个桌面组件拖拽至dock217的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock217中添加这一个桌面组件。For example, dock217 already exists in the desktop shown in FIG. 2H. In response to the user operation of dragging a desktop component in the desktop page to the dock 217 , the electronic device 100 can add the desktop component in the dock 217 .
再例如,图2H所示的桌面中已经存在简化dock216。响应于将桌面page中的一个桌面组件拖拽至简化dock216的用户操作,电子设备100可以在简化dock216中添加这一个桌面组件。在一种可能的实现方式中,当向简化dock216中添加桌面组件,电子设备100可以将简化dock216中的桌面组件完整显示,以图2A所示dock214的样式呈现在桌面210上。dock214中可包含上述被添加的桌面组件。在另一种可能的实现方式中,当向简化dock216中添加桌面组件,电子设备100仍可以简化显示的样式显示简化dock216,并将新添加的桌面组件与简化dock216中已经存在的桌面组件重叠显示。例如,新添加的桌面组件可以置于简化dock216中的最上层,部分覆盖位于下层的其它桌面组件。这样,用户可以确定桌面组件已经被添加至简化dock216中。For another example, the simplified dock 216 already exists in the desktop shown in FIG. 2H . In response to the user operation of dragging a desktop component in the desktop page to the simplified dock 216 , the electronic device 100 can add this desktop component in the simplified dock 216 . In a possible implementation manner, when desktop components are added to the simplified dock 216, the electronic device 100 may fully display the desktop components in the simplified dock 216, and present them on the desktop 210 in the style of the dock 214 shown in FIG. 2A. The dock 214 may contain the above-mentioned added desktop components. In another possible implementation, when desktop components are added to the simplified dock 216, the electronic device 100 can still display the simplified dock 216 in a simplified display style, and overlap and display the newly added desktop components with the existing desktop components in the simplified dock 216 . For example, a newly added desktop component can be placed on top of the simplified dock 216, partially covering other desktop components located below. In this way, the user can be sure that desktop components have been added to the simplified dock 216 .
在一些实施例中,一个dock中可放置的桌面组件的数量是有限的。在dock中已经存在的桌面组件的数量未超过限制时,用户可以通过上述实施例中的方法在该dock中添加桌面组件。In some embodiments, the number of desktop components that can be placed in a dock is limited. When the number of existing desktop components in the dock does not exceed the limit, the user can add desktop components to the dock through the method in the foregoing embodiment.
由上述实施例可知,用户可以不用触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态,即可将桌面page中的桌面组件添加至dock中。It can be known from the above embodiments that the user can add the desktop components in the desktop page to the dock without triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state.
图3A~图3D示例性示出了另一些电子设备100创建桌面空间的场景示意图。FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which other electronic devices 100 create a desktop space.
如图3A所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面210。桌面210包含的内容可以参考前述实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。As shown in FIG. 3A , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 210 . For the content contained in the desktop 210, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
响应于作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock214的左侧显示图3B所示的添加控件215。在添加控件215出现后,响应于上述作用在dock214所在区域持续向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以将添加控件215拉宽,显示图3C所示的添加控件215A。其中,在图3A~图3C所示触发电子设备100显示添加控件215A的过程中,上述作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动的用户操作是连续的。即在进行上述向左滑动的用户操作的过程中,用户的手并未离开电子设备100的屏幕。电子设备100可以持续检测到作用在屏幕上的向左滑动的用户操作。In response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the dock 214 is located, the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 shown in FIG. 3B on the left side of the dock 214 . After the add control 215 appears, in response to the above user operation of continuously sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located, the electronic device 100 may widen the add control 215 to display the add control 215A shown in FIG. 3C . Wherein, during the process of triggering the electronic device 100 to display the adding control 215A shown in FIG. 3A to FIG. 3C , the above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located is continuous. That is, during the above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left, the user's hand does not leave the screen of the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can continuously detect the user operation of sliding to the left on the screen.
上述作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动的用户操作可以指:滑动起点位于dock214所在区域向左滑动的用户操作。可以理解的,dock214所在区域的大小有限,在向左滑动的过程中,用户操作的作用范围可能超出dock所在区域。但若该向左滑动的用户操作的滑动起点位于dock214所在的区域,该向左滑动的用户操作即可触发电子设备100显示添加控件215。The above-mentioned user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock214 is located may refer to: a user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock214 is located. It can be understood that the size of the area where the dock214 is located is limited, and during the process of sliding to the left, the scope of the user's operation may exceed the area where the dock is located. However, if the sliding start point of the user operation of sliding to the left is located in the area where the dock 214 is located, the user operation of sliding to the left can trigger the electronic device 100 to display the adding control 215 .
上述作用在dock214所在区域持续向左滑动的用户操作可以为向左滑动的距离达到或者超过预设距离的用户操作。当接收到作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动,但滑动距离未达到上述预设距离的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示添加控件215。当该用户操作持续向左滑动使得滑动距离达到预设距离,电子设备100可以显示添加控件215A。可选的,上述作用在dock214所在区域持续向左滑动的用户操作可以为向左滑动的时间达到或者超过预设时间长度的用户操作。本申请实施例对上述预设距离、预设时间长度的取值不作限定。The above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located may be a user operation in which the distance of sliding to the left reaches or exceeds a preset distance. When receiving a user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located, but the sliding distance does not reach the preset distance, the electronic device 100 may display the add control 215 . When the user continues to slide to the left so that the sliding distance reaches the preset distance, the electronic device 100 may display the adding control 215A. Optionally, the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left in the area where the dock 214 is located may be a user operation in which the time of sliding to the left reaches or exceeds a preset time length. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the value of the preset distance and the preset time length.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100将添加控件215拉宽,显示图3C所示的添加控件215A的情况下,电子设备100可以将dock214变窄,并将dock214中的一部分APP重叠显示。In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 widens the add control 215 to display the add control 215A shown in FIG. 3C , the electronic device 100 may narrow the dock 214 and overlap and display a part of APP in the dock 214 .
在电子设备100显示添加控件215A的情况下,当检测到上述持续向左滑动的用户操作被释放,电子设备100可以显示图3D所示的用户界面220。用户界面220中可包含待编辑dock229。用户可以在该待编辑dock229中添加桌面组件。用户界面220中包含的内容可以参考前述图2C所示实施例的介绍。在待编辑dock229中添加桌面组件的实现方式也可以参考前述实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。In the case that the electronic device 100 displays the adding control 215A, when it is detected that the user operation of continuously sliding to the left is released, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 3D . The user interface 220 may include a dock 229 to be edited. The user can add desktop components in the dock 229 to be edited. For the content contained in the user interface 220, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2C. For the implementation of adding a desktop component in the dock 229 to be edited, reference may also be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
上述持续向左滑动的用户操作被释放即为用户持续向左滑动的手指离开电子设备100的屏幕。The release of the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left means that the user's finger that continues to slide to the left leaves the screen of the electronic device 100 .
可选的,当检测到上述持续向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以在桌面上显示一个空白的dock,而不进入图3D所示的桌面编辑状态。用户可以将桌面page中的桌面组件添加至这一个空白的dock中。Optionally, when detecting the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left, the electronic device 100 may display a blank dock on the desktop without entering the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 3D . Users can add desktop components in the desktop page to this blank dock.
不限于上述持续向左滑动的用户操作,作用在dock214所在区域持续向右滑动的用户操作也可以触发电子设备100创建一个空白的dock。Not limited to the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left, the user operation of continuously sliding to the right in the area where the dock 214 is located may also trigger the electronic device 100 to create a blank dock.
由上述实施例可以看出,上述持续向左滑动(或向右滑动)的用户操作可以直接触发电子设备100创建一个空白的dock。用户可以不用再对添加控件215进行用户操作。也即是说,上述持续向左滑动(或向右滑动)的用户操作可以相当于,图2A和图2B所示作用在dock214所在区域向左滑动(或向右滑动)的用户操作与作用在添加控件215A上的触摸操作的结合。相比于图2A和图2D,图3A~图3D所示实施例中的用户操作更加简单,可以帮助用户更便捷地创建桌面空间。It can be seen from the above embodiments that the user operation of continuously sliding to the left (or sliding to the right) may directly trigger the electronic device 100 to create a blank dock. The user may no longer perform user operations on the adding control 215 . That is to say, the above-mentioned user operation of continuously sliding to the left (or sliding to the right) may be equivalent to that shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. A combination of touch operations on control 215A is added. Compared with FIG. 2A and FIG. 2D , the user operation in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A to FIG. 3D is simpler, which can help the user to create a desktop space more conveniently.
在一些实施例中,当处于桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以在用户界面上显示用于创建桌面空间的创建组件。响应于作用在该创建组件的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以创建一个空白的dock。In some embodiments, when in the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display a creation component for creating a desktop space on the user interface. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the creation component, the electronic device 100 may create a blank dock.
示例性的,响应于用于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作,电子设备100可以进入图2C所示的桌面编辑状态。上述用于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作可以包括在桌面空白位置长按的用户操作、双指向内捏合的用户操作、点击指定按钮的用户操作、按压指定物理按键(或物理按键组合)的用户操作等等。本申请实施例对此不作限定。与图2C所示的用户界面220不同的是,电子设备100响应于用于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作所显示的用户界面中,可包含上述创建组件,但不包含上述待编辑dock229。响应于作用在上述创建组件的用户操作,电子设备100可以创建一个空白的dock,在用户界面上显示图2C所示的待编辑dock229。然后,用户可以在该待编辑dock229中添加桌面组件,完成桌面空间的创建。Exemplarily, in response to a user operation for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may enter the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 2C . The above-mentioned user operations for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state may include user operations of long pressing on a blank position of the desktop, user operations of pinching two fingers inward, user operations of clicking a specified button, pressing a specified physical button (or a combination of physical buttons) ) user actions and so on. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it. Different from the user interface 220 shown in FIG. 2C, the user interface displayed by the electronic device 100 in response to the user operation for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state may include the above-mentioned creating components, but not the above-mentioned to-be-edited dock229. In response to the user operation acting on the above creation component, the electronic device 100 may create a blank dock, and display the dock 229 to be edited shown in FIG. 2C on the user interface. Then, the user can add desktop components in the dock 229 to be edited to complete the creation of the desktop space.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种切换桌面空间的场景。The following describes a scenario of switching desktop spaces provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图4A~图4C示例性示出了一些电子设备100切换桌面空间的场景示意图。FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C exemplarily show some scenarios where electronic devices 100 switch desktop spaces.
如图4A所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面410。桌面410可以包含dock411、简化dock412A、简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A。其中:As shown in FIG. 4A , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 . Desktop 410 may include dock 411 , simplified dock 412A, simplified dock 413A, simplified dock 414A, and simplified dock 415A. in:
在存在多个dock的情况下,电子设备100可以仅在桌面410上完整显示一个dock,对其它dock简化显示。In the case that there are multiple docks, the electronic device 100 may only fully display one dock on the desktop 410 and simplify the display for other docks.
dock411是完整显示在桌面410上的dock。dock411中包含视频类、音乐类等娱乐场景下的APP图标。dock411所属的桌面空间可以是娱乐桌面空间。用户可以将娱乐场景下最常使用的APP的图标放置于dock411中。通过dock411,用户可以快速找到并开启娱乐场景下自己最常使用的APP。The dock 411 is a dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 . Dock411 contains APP icons in entertainment scenarios such as video and music. The desktop space to which dock411 belongs may be an entertainment desktop space. The user can place the icons of the most frequently used APPs in the entertainment scene in the dock 411 . Through dock411, users can quickly find and open their most frequently used apps in entertainment scenarios.
简化dock412A、简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A均是简化显示的dock。简化dock中桌面组件的显示方式可以参考前述实施例的介绍。这4个简化显示的dock可以重叠显示,以节省桌面410的显示区域。显示在上层的简化dock可以部分覆盖显示在下层的简化dock。Simplified dock412A, simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are docks with simplified display. For simplifying the display manner of the desktop components in the dock, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. The four simplified display docks can be overlapped to save the display area of the desktop 410 . The simplified dock displayed on the upper layer can partially cover the simplified dock displayed on the lower layer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在完整显示的dock位于多个简化dock的左侧的情况下,这多个简化dock的重叠层次可以为按照从左至右的排列顺序,排在最左侧的简化dock显示在最上层,排在最右侧的简化dock显示在最下层。在完整显示的dock位于多个简化dock的右侧的情况下,这多个简化dock的重叠层次可以为按照从左至右的排列顺序,排在最右侧的简化dock显示在最上层,排在最左侧的简化dock显示在最下层。In a possible implementation, when the fully displayed dock is located on the left side of multiple simplified docks, the overlapping levels of the multiple simplified docks may be arranged on the leftmost side in an order from left to right The simplified dock of is displayed at the top, and the simplified dock at the far right is displayed at the bottom. In the case that the fully displayed dock is located on the right side of multiple simplified docks, the overlapping layers of the simplified docks can be arranged in the order from left to right, the simplified dock on the far right is displayed on the top layer, and the The simplified dock on the far left is displayed at the bottom.
这样,响应于作用在dock(完整显示的dock以及简化显示的dock)所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100切换dock后完整显示的dock均为简化dock中位于最上层的简化dock所对应的dock。用户可以在切换桌面空间之前提前了解到切换后的桌面空间对应哪个场景。In this way, in response to a user operation that slides left or right on the area where the dock (the fully displayed dock and the simplified displayed dock) is located, the fully displayed dock after the electronic device 100 switches the dock is the simplified one located at the top of the simplified dock. The dock corresponding to the dock. The user can know in advance which scene the switched desktop space corresponds to before switching the desktop space.
示例性的,简化dock412A、简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A均位于完整显示的dock411的右侧。简化dock412A是dock411右侧且与dock411相邻的一个dock。简化dock412A、简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A按照从左至右的排列顺序,简化dock412A位于这四个简化dock的最左侧,简化dock415A位于这四个简化dock的最右侧。那么,根据上述实施例中重叠显示的规则,简化dock412A在重叠显示的四个简化dock中显示在最上层。简化dock412A中的一个APP图标(即运动健康应用图标421)完整显示在简化dock412A中。简化dock415A在重叠显示的四个简化dock中显示在最下层。简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A均被部分遮挡,有一部分区域是可见的。Exemplarily, simplified dock 412A, simplified dock 413A, simplified dock 414A, and simplified dock 415A are located to the right of fully displayed dock 411 . Simplified dock412A is a dock to the right of dock411 and adjacent to dock411. Simplified dock412A, simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are arranged in order from left to right, simplified dock412A is located at the far left of these four simplified docks, and simplified dock415A is located at the far right of these four simplified docks. Then, according to the overlapping display rule in the above-mentioned embodiment, the simplified dock 412A is displayed on the uppermost layer among the four simplified docks that are overlapped and displayed. An APP icon in the simplified dock 412A (that is, the sports and health application icon 421 ) is completely displayed in the simplified dock 412A. The simplified dock 415A is displayed at the bottom among the four simplified docks displayed in an overlapping manner. Simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are all partially blocked, and some areas are visible.
根据简化dock412A中可见的APP图标,用户可以知道若将完整显示的dock切换为dock411右侧的dock,电子设备100显示的桌面空间为简化dock412A所属的桌面空间,例如运动桌面空间。According to the APP icon visible in the simplified dock 412A, the user can know that if the fully displayed dock is switched to the dock on the right side of the dock 411, the desktop space displayed by the electronic device 100 is the desktop space to which the simplified dock 412A belongs, such as the sports desktop space.
桌面410中包含的其它内容可以参考前述图1A所示桌面210的介绍。For other content included in the desktop 410, reference may be made to the introduction of the desktop 210 shown in FIG. 1A.
如图4A所示,响应于作用在dock所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图4B所示的桌面410。其中,电子设备100在桌面410上完整显示简化dock412A,并简化显示dock411。As shown in FIG. 4A , in response to a user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4B . Wherein, the electronic device 100 fully displays the simplified dock 412A on the desktop 410 , and the simplified display dock 411 .
其中,简化dock412A完整显示的样式可以为图4B所示的dock412。dock412中可包含运动健康应用图标421和AA运动应用图标422。可以看出,dock412中包含的是运动场景下的APP图标。dock412所属的桌面空间可以是运动桌面空间。Wherein, the complete display style of the simplified dock412A may be the dock412 as shown in FIG. 4B . The dock 412 may include a sports health application icon 421 and an AA sports application icon 422 . It can be seen that the dock412 contains the APP icon in the sports scene. The desktop space to which dock412 belongs may be a motion desktop space.
dock411简化显示的样式可以为图4B所示的简化dock411A。简化dock411A中的APP 图标可以是重叠显示的。简化dock411A可以显示在完整显示的dock412的左侧。The simplified display style of the dock 411 may be the simplified dock 411A shown in FIG. 4B . The APP icons in the simplified dock 411A can be displayed overlappingly. Simplified dock 411A may be displayed to the left of fully displayed dock 412.
简化dock413A、简化dock414A和简化dock415A仍然重叠显示。与图4A不同的是,在图4B中,由于简化dock412A被完整显示,简化dock412A不再与其它简化显示的dock重叠显示。与简化dock412A相邻且位于简化dock412A下层的简化dock,即简化dock413A,可以显示在仍然重叠显示的多个简化dock的最上层。可以看出,简化dock413A中的一个APP图标(即AA聊天应用图标431)完整显示在简化dock413A中。简化dock414A和简化dock415A显示在简化dock413A的下层,均被部分遮挡,有一部分区域是可见的。Simplified dock413A, simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are still displayed overlapping. Different from FIG. 4A , in FIG. 4B , since the simplified dock 412A is completely displayed, the simplified dock 412A is no longer overlapped with other simplified displayed docks. The simplified dock adjacent to the simplified dock 412A and located under the simplified dock 412A, that is, the simplified dock 413A, can be displayed on the uppermost layer of the multiple simplified docks that are still overlapped. It can be seen that an APP icon (ie AA chat application icon 431 ) in the simplified dock 413A is completely displayed in the simplified dock 413A. Simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are displayed on the lower layer of simplified dock413A, both of which are partially blocked, and a part of the area is visible.
如图4B所示,响应于作用在dock所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示如图4C所示的桌面410。其中,电子设备100可以在桌面410上完整显示简化dock413A,并简化显示dock412。As shown in FIG. 4B , in response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C . Wherein, the electronic device 100 can completely display the simplified dock 413A on the desktop 410 and simplify the displayed dock 412 .
其中,简化dock413A完整显示的样式可以为图4C所示的dock413。dock413中可包含AA聊天应用图标431、BB聊天应用图标432、拨号应用图标433。可以看出,dock413中包含的是通讯场景下的APP图标。dock413所属的桌面空间可以是通讯桌面空间。Wherein, the complete display style of the simplified dock413A may be the dock413 shown in FIG. 4C . The dock 413 may include an AA chat application icon 431 , a BB chat application icon 432 , and a dial application icon 433 . It can be seen that what is contained in dock413 is the APP icon in the communication scene. The desktop space to which dock413 belongs may be a communication desktop space.
图4B所示向左滑动的用户操作可以相当于,将dock412向左简化显示。在完整显示的dock的左侧已经存在简化显示的简化dock的情况下,电子设备100可以将dock412简化显示的简化dock与上述左侧已经存在的简化dock重叠显示。示例性的,dock412向左简化显示的样式可以为图4C所示的简化dock412B。简化dock412B与简化dock411A重叠显示。其中,简化dock412B可以显示在简化dock411A的上层,并部分遮挡简化dock411A。The user operation of sliding to the left shown in FIG. 4B may be equivalent to simplifying the display of the dock 412 to the left. In a case where a simplified dock already exists on the left side of the fully displayed dock, the electronic device 100 may overlap and display the simplified dock displayed on the dock 412 with the existing simplified dock on the left. Exemplarily, the leftward simplified display style of the dock 412 may be the simplified dock 412B shown in FIG. 4C . Simplified dock412B is displayed overlapping with simplified dock411A. Wherein, the simplified dock 412B can be displayed on the upper layer of the simplified dock 411A, and partially cover the simplified dock 411A.
可以理解的,图4A所示的简化dock412A和图4C所示的简化dock412B均为dock412简化显示后的dock。其中,简化dock412A是向右简化显示的dock,位于完整显示的dock的右侧。简化dock412A实现向左简化显示的dock,位于完整显示的dock的左侧。在一些实施例中,简化dock412A中APP图标重叠显示的方法和简化dock412B中APP图标重叠显示的方法可以是不同的。例如,dock412中位于最左侧的APP图标(如运动健康应用图标421)显示在简化dock412A中所有重叠显示的APP图标的最上层。dock412中位于最右侧的APP图标(如AA运动应用图标422)显示在简化dock412B中所有重叠显示的APP图标的最上层。可选的,简化dock412A中APP图标重叠显示的方法和简化dock412B中APP图标重叠显示的方法可以是相同的。当检测到作用在dock所在区域向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以将完整显示的dock向右简化显示。It can be understood that the simplified dock 412A shown in FIG. 4A and the simplified dock 412B shown in FIG. 4C are docks after the simplified display of the dock 412 . Wherein, the simplified dock 412A is a dock that is simplified and displayed to the right, and is located on the right side of the fully displayed dock. Simplified dock412A implements a simplified display dock to the left, which is located on the left side of a fully displayed dock. In some embodiments, the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock 412A and the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock 412B may be different. For example, the leftmost APP icon in the dock 412 (such as the sports and health application icon 421 ) is displayed on the top layer of all overlapping displayed APP icons in the simplified dock 412A. The rightmost APP icon in the dock 412 (such as the AA sports application icon 422) is displayed on the top layer of all overlapping displayed APP icons in the simplified dock 412B. Optionally, the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock412A and the method for simplifying the overlapping display of APP icons in dock412B may be the same. When a user operation of sliding right on the area where the dock is located is detected, the electronic device 100 may simplify and display the fully displayed dock to the right.
简化dock414A和简化dock415A仍然重叠显示。与图4B不同的是,在图4C中,由于简化dock413A被完整显示,简化dock413A不再与其它简化显示的dock重叠显示。与简化dock413A相邻且位于简化dock413A下层的简化dock413,即简化dock414A,可以显示在仍然重叠显示的多个简化dock的最上层。可以看出,简化dock414A中的一个APP图标(即AA笔记应用图标441)完整显示在简化dock414A中。简化dock415A显示在简化dock414A的下层,被部分遮挡。Simplified dock414A and simplified dock415A are still displayed overlapping. Different from FIG. 4B , in FIG. 4C , since the simplified dock 413A is completely displayed, the simplified dock 413A is no longer overlapped with other simplified displayed docks. The simplified dock 413 adjacent to the simplified dock 413A and located under the simplified dock 413A, that is, the simplified dock 414A, can be displayed on the uppermost layer of the multiple simplified docks that are still overlapped. It can be seen that an APP icon in the simplified dock 414A (that is, the AA note application icon 441 ) is completely displayed in the simplified dock 414A. Simplified dock 415A is shown below simplified dock 414A, partially obscured.
不限于上述作用在dock所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100还可以响应其它预设的用户操作来切换完整显示在桌面上的dock。例如,响应于作用在一个简化显示的简化dock上的点击操作或触摸操作,电子设备100可以将这一个简化dock完整显示在桌面上,并将其它dock简化显示。Not limited to the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 may respond to other preset user operations to switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop. For example, in response to a click operation or a touch operation on a simplified dock, the electronic device 100 may completely display the simplified dock on the desktop and simplify the display of other docks.
上述被点击或者被触摸的简化dock可以是与完整显示的dock相邻,位于该完整显示的dock左侧或右侧的简化dock(如图4B所示的简化dock411A,或简化dock413A)。响应于作 用在图4B所示简化dock413A的触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示如图4C所示的桌面410。电子设备100切换完整显示在桌面410上的dock的具体实现可以参考前述图4C所示的实施例。The clicked or touched simplified dock may be adjacent to the fully displayed dock and located on the left or right side of the fully displayed dock (simplified dock 411A or simplified dock 413A shown in FIG. 4B ). In response to a touch operation on the simplified dock 413A shown in FIG. 4B , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C . For a specific implementation of switching the dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 4C .
可选的,上述被点击或者被触摸的简化dock也可以是多个重叠显示的简化dock中位于下层被部分遮挡的简化dock(如图4B所示的简化dock414A,或简化dock415A)。由于简化dock被部分遮挡,仅有一部分区域显示出来,上述点击操作或者触摸操作可以是作用在简化dock被显示出来的区域上。例如,响应于作用在图4A所示简化dock413A被显示出来的区域上的触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示如图4C所示的桌面410。电子设备100切换完整显示在桌面410上的dock的具体实现可以参考前述图4C所示的实施例。Optionally, the simplified dock that is clicked or touched may also be a simplified dock that is located in a lower layer and is partially hidden among multiple overlapping simplified docks (simplified dock 414A or simplified dock 415A as shown in FIG. 4B ). Since the simplified dock is partially covered and only a part of the area is displayed, the above-mentioned click operation or touch operation may act on the displayed area of the simplified dock. For example, in response to a touch operation on the area where the simplified dock 413A shown in FIG. 4A is displayed, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 410 as shown in FIG. 4C . For a specific implementation of switching the dock completely displayed on the desktop 410 by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 4C .
由上述实施例可知,一个桌面空间可包含一个dock,图4A~图4C所示切换dock的过程即为切换桌面空间的过程。用户可以通过向左滑动或者向右滑动的用户操作,或者点击对应dock的用户操作来切换完整显示在桌面上的dock。上述切换桌面空间的用户操作比较简单,用户可以快速地切换不同场景对应的桌面空间,从而快速找到一个场景下自己最常使用的桌面组件。It can be known from the above embodiments that a desktop space may include a dock, and the process of switching the dock shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C is the process of switching the desktop space. The user can switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop through the user operation of sliding left or right, or clicking the user operation corresponding to the dock. The above-mentioned user operation of switching the desktop space is relatively simple, and the user can quickly switch the desktop space corresponding to different scenes, so as to quickly find the desktop component that he or she uses most frequently in a scene.
需要进行说明的是,前述图2A~图2H所示向左滑动或向右滑动创建桌面空间的用户操作,与前述图4A~图4C所示向左或向右滑动切换桌面空间的用户操作的区别在于:It should be noted that the user operation of sliding left or right to create a desktop space shown in Figures 2A to 2H is different from the user operation of sliding left or right to switch desktop spaces shown in Figures 4A to 4C The difference is that:
在仅存在一个dock(即一个桌面空间)的情况下,作用在dock所在区域向左或向右滑动的用户操作均可用于触发电子设备100创建一个新的桌面空间。In the case that there is only one dock (that is, one desktop space), the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a new desktop space.
在存在多个dock(即多个桌面空间)的情况下,若当前完整显示在桌面上的dock为排列在最左侧的dock,那么作用在dock所在区域向右滑动的用户操作可用于触发电子设备100创建一个新的桌面空间,作用在dock所在区域向左滑动的用户操作可用于触发电子设备100将当前完整显示在桌面上的dock简化显示,并将当前完整显示在桌面上的dock右侧的dock完整显示在桌面上(即切换桌面空间)。若当前完整显示在桌面上的dock为排列在最右侧的dock,那么作用在dock所在区域向左滑动的用户操作可用于触发电子设备100创建一个新的桌面空间,作用在dock所在区域向右滑动的用户操作可用于触发电子设备100将当前完整显示在桌面上的dock简化显示,并将当前完整显示在桌面上的dock左侧的dock完整显示在桌面上(即切换桌面空间)。若当前完整显示在桌面上的dock的左侧和右侧均存在简化显示的dock,那么作用在dock所在区域向左滑动或向右滑动的用户操作均可用于触发电子设备100切换桌面空间。In the case of multiple docks (that is, multiple desktop spaces), if the dock that is currently completely displayed on the desktop is the dock that is arranged on the leftmost side, the user operation that slides to the right in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic The device 100 creates a new desktop space, and the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to simplify the display of the dock that is currently fully displayed on the desktop, and display the current complete display on the right side of the dock on the desktop. The dock is completely displayed on the desktop (that is, switching the desktop space). If the dock currently fully displayed on the desktop is the dock arranged on the far right, then the user operation of sliding to the left in the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to create a new desktop space, and act on the area where the dock is located to move to the right The user operation of sliding can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to simplify the display of the dock currently completely displayed on the desktop, and completely display the dock on the left side of the dock currently completely displayed on the desktop (that is, to switch the desktop space). If there is a simplified display dock on the left and right side of the currently fully displayed dock on the desktop, then the user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to switch the desktop space.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的桌面上可同时显示有放置常驻桌面组件的dock,以及放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock。其中,上述常驻桌面组件可以是固定放置在dock中的。响应于将常驻桌面组件从dock中移除的用户操作,或者在放置常驻桌面组件的dock中添加桌面组件的用户操作,电子设备100可以调整放置常驻桌面组件的dock中的桌面组件。上述最近使用的桌面组件可以包括最近预设时间段内(如最近15分钟内)打开过的桌面组件。本申请实施例对上述最近预设时间段的具体取值不作限定。或者,上述最近使用的桌面组件也可以包括所有正在运行(如前台运行、后台运行等)的桌面组件中打开时间最晚的L个桌面组件。上述L为正整数。本申请实施例对L的具体取值不作限定。上述最近使用的桌面组件也可以包括电子设备100按照其它规则筛选出的一个或多个桌面组件。也即是说,电子设备100 可以根据桌面组件的打开时间自动更新放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock中包含的桌面组件。In some embodiments, a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for recently used desktop components may be displayed on the desktop of the electronic device 100 at the same time. Wherein, the above-mentioned resident desktop component may be fixedly placed in the dock. In response to a user operation of removing a resident desktop component from the dock, or a user operation of adding a desktop component in the dock where the resident desktop component is placed, the electronic device 100 may adjust the desktop component in the dock where the resident desktop component is placed. The aforementioned recently used desktop components may include desktop components that have been opened within a preset period of time (for example, within the last 15 minutes). The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific value of the latest preset time period. Alternatively, the above-mentioned recently used desktop components may also include the L desktop components with the latest open time among all running desktop components (such as running in the foreground, running in the background, etc.). The aforementioned L is a positive integer. The specific value of L is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned recently used desktop components may also include one or more desktop components screened by the electronic device 100 according to other rules. That is to say, the electronic device 100 can automatically update the desktop components included in the dock where the most recently used desktop components are placed according to the opening time of the desktop components.
图5示例性示出了一种电子设备100显示放置常驻桌面组件的dock和放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock的场景示意图。FIG. 5 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a scene where the electronic device 100 displays a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components.
如图5所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面510。桌面510可包括dock511、dock512、dock513、dock514、dock515和dock516。其中,dock511可以为放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock。dock512~dock516可以为放置常驻桌面组件的dock。As shown in FIG. 5 , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 510 . Desktop 510 may include dock511 , dock512 , dock513 , dock514 , dock515 and dock516 . Wherein, dock 511 may be a dock for placing recently used desktop components. dock512-dock516 may be docks for placing resident desktop components.
dock511中可包含AA聊天应用图标511A、音乐应用图标511B和AA新闻应用图标511C等用户最近打开的桌面组件。本申请实施例对dock511中包含的桌面组件的数量不作限定。在一种可能的实现方式中,dock511的大小可以随着其中包含的桌面组件的数量的变化而变化。例如,当最近打开的桌面组件仅有两个APP图标的情况下,dock511的长度可以由图5所示可放置三个APP图标的大小缩小为可放置两个APP图标的大小。当最近打开的桌面组件有四个APP图标的情况下,dock511的长度,可以由图5所示可放置三个APP图标的大小放大为可放置四个APP图标的大小。The dock 511 may include desktop components recently opened by the user such as the AA chat application icon 511A, the music application icon 511B, and the AA news application icon 511C. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of desktop components contained in the dock 511 . In a possible implementation manner, the size of the dock 511 may vary with the number of desktop components contained therein. For example, when the recently opened desktop component has only two APP icons, the length of the dock 511 can be reduced from the size that can place three APP icons as shown in FIG. 5 to the size that can place two APP icons. When the recently opened desktop component has four APP icons, the length of the dock 511 can be enlarged from the size in which three APP icons can be placed as shown in FIG. 5 to the size in which four APP icons can be placed.
dock512~dock516的内容可以参考前述实施例的介绍。For the contents of dock512-dock516, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
本申请实施例对上述放置常驻桌面组件的dock和放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock在桌面上的显示位置不作限定。例如,放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock还可以位于放置常驻桌面组件的dock的右侧。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the display positions on the desktop of the above-mentioned dock for placing resident desktop components and the dock for placing recently used desktop components. For example, the dock where recently used desktop components are placed may also be located on the right side of the dock where resident desktop components are placed.
本申请后续实施例中具体以桌面上显示放置常驻桌面组件的dock为例进行介绍。In the subsequent embodiments of the present application, a dock displaying a resident desktop component on the desktop is used as an example for introduction.
由上述实施例可知,电子设备100可以在桌面显示两种类型不同的dock:放置常驻桌面组件的dock和放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock。其中,放置常驻桌面组件的dock可以有一个或多个。一个放置常驻桌面组件的dock可以代表一个桌面空间。用户可以创建不同的桌面空间,并利用不同桌面来对桌面组件进行场景划分。这样可以便于用户快速找到不同场景下的桌面组件。另外,用户还可以通过放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock快速再次打开自己最近打开过的桌面组件。It can be known from the above embodiments that the electronic device 100 may display two different types of docks on the desktop: a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components. Wherein, there may be one or more docks for placing resident desktop components. A dock that places resident desktop components can represent a desktop space. Users can create different desktop spaces and use different desktops to divide desktop components into scenes. This can facilitate the user to quickly find desktop components in different scenarios. In addition, the user can also quickly open the desktop components that he has recently opened again through the dock where the recently used desktop components are placed.
在一些实施例中,在创建一个新的桌面空间的过程中,电子设备100可以根据预设的推荐规则在桌面空间的dock中推荐桌面组件,以便于用户快速完成桌面空间的创建。In some embodiments, during the process of creating a new desktop space, the electronic device 100 may recommend desktop components in the dock of the desktop space according to preset recommendation rules, so that the user can quickly complete the creation of the desktop space.
图6A~图6E示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一些在dock中推荐桌面组件的场景示意图。FIG. 6A to FIG. 6E exemplarily show some scenarios of recommending desktop components in the dock provided by the embodiment of the present application.
响应于用于创建dock(即创建一个新的桌面空间)的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示如图6A所示的用户界面610。上述用于创建dock的用户操作可以参考前述图2A和图2B所示的用户操作,或者图3A~图3C所示的用户操作等。用户界面610可以包含缩略桌面page611、缩略桌面page612、缩略桌面page613、dock614和dock615。In response to a user operation for creating a dock (that is, creating a new desktop space), the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 610 as shown in FIG. 6A . For the above user operations for creating a dock, reference may be made to the user operations shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B , or the user operations shown in FIGS. 3A to 3C . The user interface 610 may include a thumbnail desktop page 611 , a thumbnail desktop page 612 , a thumbnail desktop page 613 , a dock 614 and a dock 615 .
其中,缩略桌面page611~缩略桌面page613可以参考前述图2C所示的缩略桌面page221~缩略桌面page223。dock614可以参考前述图2C所示的缩略dock228。这里不再赘述。Wherein, the thumbnail desktop page 611 to the thumbnail desktop page 613 may refer to the thumbnail desktop page 221 to the thumbnail desktop page 223 shown in FIG. 2C . The dock614 may refer to the abbreviated dock228 shown in FIG. 2C above. I won't go into details here.
dock615为新创建的dock。dock615中可包含已添加APP区域617和推荐APP区域618。dock615 is the newly created dock. The dock 615 may include an added APP area 617 and a recommended APP area 618 .
已添加APP区域617中可用于放置已经添加至dock615中的APP图标。在dock615中还未添加有APP图标的情况下,已添加APP区域617可以如图6A所示显示为空。The added APP area 617 can be used to place the APP icons that have been added to the dock 615 . In the case that no APP icon has been added to the dock 615 , the added APP area 617 may be displayed as empty as shown in FIG. 6A .
推荐APP区域618中可用于放置电子设备100推荐的APP图标。例如,AA笔记应用图标618A、电子邮件应用图标618B和文档编辑应用图标618C。这些被推荐的APP图标可以是电子设备100根据预设的推荐规则从电子设备100中安装的所有APP中筛选出来的。上述 预设的推荐规则将在后续实施例中进行具体介绍。这里先不展开。本申请实施例对推荐APP区域618中包含的APP图标的数量不作限定。The recommended APP area 618 can be used to place APP icons recommended by the electronic device 100 . For example, AA notes application icon 618A, email application icon 618B, and document editing application icon 618C. These recommended APP icons may be selected by the electronic device 100 from all APPs installed in the electronic device 100 according to preset recommendation rules. The above preset recommendation rules will be specifically introduced in subsequent embodiments. Let's not expand here. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of APP icons included in the recommended APP area 618 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,推荐APP区域618中放置的每一个APP图标上可包含图6A所示的添加控件。一个APP图标上的添加控件可用于触发电子设备100将这一个APP图标添加至已添加APP区域。In a possible implementation manner, each APP icon placed in the recommended APP area 618 may include the add control shown in FIG. 6A . The add control on an APP icon can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add this APP icon to the added APP area.
如图6A所示,响应于作用在AA笔记应用图标618A上的添加控件的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock615的已添加区域617添加AA笔记应用图标,并将推荐APP区域618中的APP笔记应用图标移除。示例性的,电子设备100可以显示图6B所示的用户界面610。在图6B中,已添加区域617中可包含AA笔记应用图标617A。推荐APP区域618中可以包含电子邮件应用图标618B和文档编辑应用图标618C,而不包含AA笔记应用图标618A。As shown in FIG. 6A, in response to the user operation of adding a control on the AA note application icon 618A, the electronic device 100 can add the AA note application icon in the added area 617 of the dock 615, and recommend APP notes in the APP area 618. App icon removed. Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6B . In FIG. 6B , an AA notes application icon 617A may be included in the added area 617 . The recommended APP area 618 may contain an email application icon 618B and a document editing application icon 618C, but not the AA notes application icon 618A.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当检测到用于向已添加APP区域中添加APP图标的用户操作,电子设备100根据被添加的APP图标,更新推荐APP区域618中被推荐的APP图标。In a possible implementation manner, when a user operation for adding an APP icon to the added APP area is detected, the electronic device 100 updates the recommended APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 according to the added APP icon.
示例性的,响应于图6A所示作用在AA笔记应用图标618A上的添加控件的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock 615的已添加区域617添加AA笔记应用图标,并更新推荐APP区域618中被推荐的APP图标。其中,电子设备100可以显示图6C所示的用户界面610。在图6C中,已添加区域617中可包含AA笔记应用图标617A。推荐APP区域618中可包含文档编辑应用图标618C、AA刷题应用图标618D和AA词典应用图标618E。图6C所示推荐APP区域618中包含的APP图标可以是,电子设备100根据添加至已添加APP区域617中的APP图标(如AA笔记应用图标617A)以及预设的推荐规则确定出来的。Exemplarily, in response to the user operation of adding a control on the AA note application icon 618A shown in FIG. Recommended APP icon. Wherein, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6C . In FIG. 6C , an AA notes application icon 617A may be included in the added area 617 . The recommended APP area 618 may include a document editing application icon 618C, an AA quiz application icon 618D, and an AA dictionary application icon 618E. The APP icons contained in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6C may be determined by the electronic device 100 according to the APP icons added to the added APP area 617 (such as the AA note application icon 617A) and preset recommendation rules.
不限于将上述推荐APP区域618中的APP图标添加至dock615的已添加APP区域617,电子设备100还可以将缩略桌面page中的APP图标添加至已添加APP区域617。当将缩略桌面page中的APP图标添加至已添加APP区域617,电子设备100也可以根据被添加的APP图标更新dock615推荐APP区域618中的APP图标。Not limited to adding the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 to the added APP area 617 of the dock 615 , the electronic device 100 can also add the APP icons in the thumbnail desktop page to the added APP area 617 . When the APP icon in the thumbnail desktop page is added to the added APP area 617 , the electronic device 100 may also update the APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 according to the added APP icon.
示例性的,响应于作用在图6C所示缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图6D所示的用户界面610。Exemplarily, in response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located as shown in FIG. 6C , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6D .
在图6D中,用户界面610可包含缩略桌面page613、缩略桌面page619、缩略桌面page620、dock614和dock615。In FIG. 6D , user interface 610 may include thumbnail desktop page613 , thumbnail desktop page619 , thumbnail desktop page620 , dock614 and dock615 .
缩略桌面page613、缩略桌面page619、缩略桌面page620、dock614均可以参考前述图2C所示实施例的介绍。这里不再赘述。For the thumbnail desktop page 613 , the thumbnail desktop page 619 , the thumbnail desktop page 620 , and the dock 614 , reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned embodiment shown in FIG. 2C . I won't go into details here.
桌面page619中可包含AA词典应用图标619A。响应于将桌面page619中的AA词典应用图标619A添加至dock615的用户操作,电子设备100可以在dock615的已添加APP区域615A中添加AA词典应用图标,并更新推荐APP区域618中被推荐的APP图标。上述用于将桌面page619中的AA词典应用图标619A添加至dock615的用户操作可以参考前述实施例的介绍。The desktop page 619 may include an AA dictionary application icon 619A. In response to the user operation of adding the AA dictionary application icon 619A in the desktop page 619 to the dock 615, the electronic device 100 can add the AA dictionary application icon in the added APP area 615A of the dock 615, and update the recommended APP icon in the recommended APP area 618 . For the user operation for adding the AA dictionary application icon 619A in the desktop page 619 to the dock 615, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
其中,电子设备100可以显示图6E所示的用户界面610。在图6E中,已添加区域617中可包含AA笔记应用图标617A,以及从桌面page619中添加的AA词典应用图标617B。推荐APP区域618中可包含文档编辑应用图标618C、AA阅读应用图标618F、BB阅读应用图标618G。图6E所示推荐APP区域618中包含的APP图标可以是,电子设备100根据添加至已添加APP区域617中的APP图标(如AA词典应用图标617B)以及预设的推荐规则确定出来的。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6E . In FIG. 6E , the added area 617 may contain the AA note application icon 617A, and the AA dictionary application icon 617B added from the desktop page 619 . The recommended APP area 618 may include a document editing application icon 618C, an AA reading application icon 618F, and a BB reading application icon 618G. The APP icons contained in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6E may be determined by the electronic device 100 according to the APP icons added to the added APP area 617 (such as the AA dictionary application icon 617B) and preset recommendation rules.
下面具体介绍电子设备100根据预设的推荐规则在dock中推荐APP图标的实现方法。The implementation method of recommending APP icons in the dock by the electronic device 100 according to preset recommendation rules will be specifically introduced below.
图7A示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100推荐APP图标的方法流程图。FIG. 7A exemplarily shows a flowchart of a method for recommending an APP icon by the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图7A所示,该方法可包括步骤S701~S705。其中:As shown in FIG. 7A, the method may include steps S701-S705. in:
S701、接收到创建dock的用户操作,电子设备100创建dock1,并在dock1的推荐APP区域显示K个APP图标。S701. Upon receiving a user operation for creating a dock, the electronic device 100 creates a dock1, and displays K APP icons in a recommended APP area of the dock1.
电子设备100创建一个空白的dock的方法可以参考前述实施例的介绍。上述dock1可以例如是前述图6A所示的dock615。上述显示在dock1的推荐APP区域的K个APP图标可以例如是前述图6A所示推荐APP区域618中的APP图标。上述K为正整数。For the method for creating a blank dock by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. The aforementioned dock1 may be, for example, the aforementioned dock615 shown in FIG. 6A . The aforementioned K APP icons displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1 may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 shown in FIG. 6A . The aforementioned K is a positive integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以根据用户使用APP的时间为用户推荐添加至dock中的APP图标。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device 100 may recommend an APP icon to be added to the dock for the user according to the time when the user uses the APP.
请参考图7B,图7B示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种推荐规则。Please refer to FIG. 7B . FIG. 7B exemplarily shows a recommendation rule provided by an embodiment of the present application.
电子设备100中可安装有多个APP,例如APP1、APP2、APP3、APP4、APP5、APP6等等。电子设备100可以根据APP的使用时间对电子设备100中安装的APP进行划分,多的多个APP分组包(pack)。Multiple APPs can be installed in the electronic device 100, such as APP1, APP2, APP3, APP4, APP5, APP6 and so on. The electronic device 100 may divide the APPs installed in the electronic device 100 according to the usage time of the APPs, and group multiple APPs into packages (pack).
具体的,电子设备100可以采集到一段时间内用户使用APP的使用时间的数据。上述一段时间可以例如是一个星期、一个月等等。上述使用APP的使用时间的数据可以包括打开APP的用户界面的时间、关闭APP的用户界面的时间,APP的使用时长等。Specifically, the electronic device 100 may collect data on the usage time of the APP by the user within a certain period of time. The aforementioned period of time may be, for example, one week, one month, and the like. The above-mentioned data on the usage time of using the APP may include the time of opening the user interface of the APP, the time of closing the user interface of the APP, the duration of using the APP, and the like.
电子设备100可以将一天的时间划分为不同的时间段,例如6:00-9:00,9:00-12:00等等。本申请实施例对上述时间段的划分不作限定。可选的,电子设备100还可以以两天、三天或者一个星期等为一整段时间,并对这一段时间划分为不同的时间段。本申请后续实施例具体以将一天划分为不同的时间段进行说明。The electronic device 100 may divide a day into different time periods, such as 6:00-9:00, 9:00-12:00 and so on. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the division of the foregoing time periods. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may also take two days, three days, or one week as a whole period of time, and divide this period of time into different time periods. Subsequent embodiments of the present application are specifically described by dividing a day into different time periods.
电子设备100可以统计每一个时间段内被使用到的APP,以及这些APP的使用时长。例如,电子设备100可以将6:00-9:00使用时长最长的若干个(如3个、4个等等)APP划分为APP pack1。电子设备100可以将9:00-12:00使用时长最长的若干个APP划分为APP2。电子设备100可以将21:00-24:00使用时长最长的若干个APP划分为APP pack N。这样,电子设备100可以得到多个APP pack。由于用户可能在不同的时间段使用同一个APP,不同的APP pack中可以包含相同的APP。各个APP pack中包含的APP数量可以是相同的,或者也可以是不同的。The electronic device 100 can count the APPs used in each time period, and the usage duration of these APPs. For example, the electronic device 100 may divide several (such as 3, 4, etc.) APPs with the longest usage time from 6:00 to 9:00 into APP pack1. The electronic device 100 may classify several APPs with the longest usage time from 9:00 to 12:00 as APP2. The electronic device 100 may divide several APPs with the longest usage time from 21:00 to 24:00 into APP pack N. In this way, the electronic device 100 can obtain multiple APP packs. Since users may use the same APP in different time periods, different APP packs can contain the same APP. The number of APPs contained in each APP pack may be the same, or may also be different.
一个APP pack中可包含用户经常在一起使用的APP。例如,用户经常在8:00-9:00一起使用查看天气的APP和浏览新闻的APP。用户经常在21:00-24:00一起使用不同的用于购物的APP。An APP pack can contain APPs that users often use together. For example, a user often uses an APP for checking the weather and an APP for browsing news together from 8:00 to 9:00. Users often use different APPs for shopping together from 21:00 to 24:00.
可以理解的,用户经常一起使用的多个APP可能是属于一个场景的APP。例如,用户可能会在购物的场景中一起使用多个不同的用于购物的APP。上述对APP按照用户使用时间的划分可以便于电子设备100将用户经常一起使用的APP同时推荐给用户,提高用户构建用于描述一个场景的桌面空间的效率。It is understandable that multiple APPs that are often used together by the user may belong to one scene. For example, a user may use multiple different shopping apps together in a shopping scene. The above division of APPs according to the user's usage time can facilitate the electronic device 100 to recommend to the user the APPs that the user often uses together at the same time, and improve the efficiency of the user's construction of a desktop space for describing a scene.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以根据已经存在的dock中包含的APP图标,确定个APP pack的重复程度。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also determine the degree of duplication of each APP pack according to the APP icons contained in the existing dock.
一个APP pack的重复程度可以由这一个APP pack中包含的APP对应的APP图标存在于已有dock的数量确定。其中,一个APP pack中包含的APP对应的APP图标存在于已有dock的数量越多,这一个APP的重复程度越高,反之,则这一个APP的重复程度越低。例如,一个APP pack中包含5个APP,若这一个APP pack中的3个APP存在于已有dock中,则 这一个APP pack的重复程度可以为3/5,即60%。The degree of duplication of an APP pack can be determined by the number of APP icons corresponding to the APPs contained in this APP pack existing in the existing dock. Among them, the more APP icons corresponding to the APP contained in an APP pack exist in the existing dock, the higher the repetition degree of this APP is, and vice versa, the lower the repetition degree of this APP. For example, an APP pack contains 5 APPs, if 3 APPs in this APP pack exist in the existing dock, then the repetition degree of this APP pack can be 3/5, that is, 60%.
电子设备100可以从重复程度低于预设重复程度的APP pack中选择推荐至dock的APP图标。本申请实施例对上述预设重复程度的取值不作限定。例如,预设重复程度可以为70%等。这样可以避免重复推荐,或者推荐的APP图标属于已经建立的桌面空间对应的场景。The electronic device 100 may select an APP icon recommended to the dock from APP packs whose repetition degree is lower than a preset repetition degree. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the value of the above-mentioned preset repetition degree. For example, the preset repetition degree may be 70% or the like. In this way, repeated recommendation can be avoided, or the recommended APP icon belongs to the scene corresponding to the established desktop space.
电子设备100可以根据APP的使用时长确定出各APP pack的使用率,并从重复程度低于预设重复程度的APP pack中选择使用率最高的APP pack作为推荐结果。The electronic device 100 can determine the usage rate of each APP pack according to the usage time of the APP, and select the APP pack with the highest usage rate from the APP packs whose repetition degree is lower than the preset repetition degree as the recommendation result.
一个APP pack的使用率可以为这一个APP pack中包含的所有APP在这一个APP pack对应的时间段内的总使用时长。例如,APP pack1中包含5个APP。这5个APP在6:00-9:00的总使用时长为140分钟。则电子设备100将APP pack1的使用率确定为140。可选的,一个APP pack的使用率可以为这一个APP pack中包含的所有APP在这一个APP pack对应的时间段内的使用时长均值。例如,APP pack1中包含5个APP。这5个APP在6:00-9:00的总使用时长为140分钟。这5个APP在6:00-9:00的使用时长均值为28分钟。电子设备100可以将APP pack1的使用率确定为28。APP pack的使用率还可以是其它利用APP的使用时长进行计算的方法所确定的。本申请实施例对此不作限定。The usage rate of an APP pack can be the total usage time of all APPs included in the APP pack in the time period corresponding to the APP pack. For example, APP pack1 contains 5 APPs. The total usage time of these 5 apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 140 minutes. Then the electronic device 100 determines the usage rate of APP pack1 as 140. Optionally, the usage rate of an APP pack may be the average usage duration of all APPs included in the APP pack within the time period corresponding to the APP pack. For example, APP pack1 contains 5 APPs. The total usage time of these 5 apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 140 minutes. The average usage time of these five apps from 6:00 to 9:00 is 28 minutes. The electronic device 100 may determine that the usage rate of APP pack1 is 28. The usage rate of the APP pack can also be determined by other calculation methods using the usage time of the APP. This embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
示例性的,APP pack1为重复程度不低于上述预设重复程度的APP pack中使用率最高的一个APP pack。电子设备100可以将APP pack1作为推荐结果。在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以将APP pack1中所有APP对应的APP图标均显示在dock(如前述新创建的dock1)的推荐APP区域,即均推荐给用户。可选的,电子设备100也可以从APP pack1中选择使用时长最长的若干个(如K个)APP,并将这K个APP对应的APP图标显示在dock的推荐APP区域。Exemplarily, APP pack1 is an APP pack with the highest usage rate among the APP packs whose repetition degree is not lower than the above preset repetition degree. The electronic device 100 may use APP pack1 as a recommendation result. In a possible implementation, the electronic device 100 may display the APP icons corresponding to all APPs in the APP pack1 in the recommended APP area of the dock (such as the aforementioned newly created dock1), that is, all of them are recommended to the user. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may also select several (such as K) APPs with the longest usage time from the APP pack1, and display the APP icons corresponding to the K APPs in the recommended APP area of the dock.
不限于上述APP的使用时长,电子设备100还可以根据APP打开的次数,或者结合APP的使用时长和APP打开的次数等数据来得到APP的推荐结果。The electronic device 100 is not limited to the usage time of the above-mentioned APP, and the electronic device 100 may also obtain the recommendation result of the APP according to the number of times the APP is opened, or in combination with the data such as the usage time of the APP and the number of times the APP is opened.
可选的,不限于上述时间维度上的划分,电子设备100还可以基于地理位置维度对APP进行划分,得到多个不同的APP pack。例如,电子设备100可以将电子设备100位于位置1时用户使用的APP划分为一个APP pack,将电子设备100位于位置2时用户使用的APP划分为另一个APPpack。以此类推,电子设备100可以得到多个APP pack。然后电子设备100可以根据上述实施例所介绍的推荐规则,基于这多个APP pack确定推荐结果。其中,上述位置1、位置2等不同的地理位置具体可以指具有一定大小范围的区域。Optionally, not limited to the division in the above time dimension, the electronic device 100 may also divide the APP based on the geographic location dimension to obtain multiple different APP packs. For example, the electronic device 100 may divide the APPs used by the user when the electronic device 100 is at position 1 into one APP pack, and divide the APPs used by the user when the electronic device 100 is at position 2 into another APP pack. By analogy, the electronic device 100 can obtain multiple APP packs. Then the electronic device 100 can determine the recommendation result based on the plurality of APP packs according to the recommendation rules introduced in the above embodiments. Wherein, the above-mentioned different geographic locations such as location 1 and location 2 may specifically refer to areas with a certain size range.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100中可存储有推荐模型A。推荐模型A可以遵循图7B所示的推荐规则。电子设备100可以采集得到用户使用APP的使用时间的数据,并利用推荐模型A定期或者不定期对电子设备100中安装的APP进行分组,得到多个APP pack,从这多个APP pack中确定出推荐结果。当检测到创建dock的用户操作,电子设备100可以将上述推荐结果显示在新建空白dock的推荐APP区域。可选的,当检测到用于编辑dock的用户操作,电子设备100也可以将上述推荐结果显示在被编辑dock的推荐APP区域。In a possible implementation manner, the recommendation model A may be stored in the electronic device 100 . Recommendation model A may follow the recommendation rules shown in FIG. 7B. The electronic device 100 can collect data on the usage time of the user using the APP, and use the recommendation model A to regularly or irregularly group the APPs installed in the electronic device 100 to obtain multiple APP packs, and determine the Recommended results. When the user operation of creating a dock is detected, the electronic device 100 may display the above recommendation result in the recommended APP area of the newly created blank dock. Optionally, when a user operation for editing the dock is detected, the electronic device 100 may also display the above recommendation result in the recommended APP area of the edited dock.
可以看出,上述图7B所示的推荐规则可以在用户创建新的桌面空间时,为用户推荐用户经常一起使用的多个APP。上述一起使用的多个APP往往是用户在一个场景下会使用到的。这可以帮助用户提供构建用于描述一个场景的桌面空间的效率。并且,上述推荐规则还结合用户已经创建的桌面空间,从而减少重复推荐的情况以及推荐的APP与已经创建的桌面空间冲突的情况。It can be seen that the recommendation rule shown in FIG. 7B above can recommend multiple APPs that the user often uses together when the user creates a new desktop space. The multiple apps used together above are often used by users in one scenario. This can help users provide efficiency in constructing desktop spaces that describe a scene. Moreover, the above-mentioned recommendation rules are also combined with the desktop space already created by the user, so as to reduce the situation of repeated recommendation and the conflict between the recommended APP and the created desktop space.
S702、接收到将K个APP图标中的APP1图标添加至dock1的用户操作,电子设备100 将APP1图标添加至dock1的已添加APP区域。S702. Receiving a user operation of adding the APP1 icon among the K APP icons to the dock1, the electronic device 100 adds the APP1 icon to the added APP area of the dock1.
电子设备100可以将图7B所示的APP pack1作为推荐结果。电子设备100可以在dock1的推荐APP区域显示APP pack1中的K个APP图标。这K个APP图标中可包含APP1对应的APP1图标。上述APP1图标可以例如是前述图6A所示的AA笔记应用图标618A。将APP1图标添加至dock1的用户操作可以例如是前述图6A所示作用在AA笔记应用图标618A上的添加控件的用户操作。The electronic device 100 may use APP pack1 shown in FIG. 7B as a recommendation result. The electronic device 100 may display K APP icons in the APP pack1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1. The K APP icons may include an APP1 icon corresponding to APP1. The above-mentioned APP1 icon may be, for example, the aforementioned AA notes application icon 618A shown in FIG. 6A . The user operation of adding the APP1 icon to the dock1 may be, for example, the user operation of adding a control on the AA note application icon 618A shown in FIG. 6A .
S703、电子设备100从电子设备100安装的所有APP中确定出Y个APP,这Y个APP与APP1具有关联关系A,电子设备100更新dock1中推荐APP区域的APP图标,将上述Y个APP对应的APP图标显示在dock1的推荐APP区域。S703, the electronic device 100 determines Y APPs from all the APPs installed on the electronic device 100, and the Y APPs have an association relationship A with APP1, and the electronic device 100 updates the APP icon in the recommended APP area in the dock1, corresponding to the above Y APPs The APP icon is displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1.
上述Y个APP对应的APP图标可以例如是前述图6B所示dock615的推荐APP区域618中的APP图标。The APP icons corresponding to the above Y APPs may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 shown in FIG. 6B .
电子设备100可以根据用户在dock1中添加的APP以及预设的推荐规则,来更新dock1的推荐APP区域中的APP图标。The electronic device 100 may update the APP icon in the recommended APP area of dock1 according to the APP added by the user in dock1 and the preset recommendation rules.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述预设的推荐规则可以是推荐与用户在dock中添加的APP具有相同类型的APP。例如,用户在dock1中添加的APP为AA笔记应用。AA笔记应用的类别可以是学习类别。电子设备100可以从电子设备100安装的所有APP中寻找类别为学习类别的APP。电子设备100可以将从寻找到的学习类别的APP确定出一个或多个APP,并将这一个或多个APP对应的APP图标显示在dock1的推荐APP区域。这一个或多个APP可以是电子设备100学习类别的APP中的任意一个或多个。或者,这一个或多个APP可以是电子设备100学习类别的APP中,用户经常使用(如使用时长最长)的一个或多个。这一个或多个APP可以是未放置在其它已存在的dock中的APP。In a possible implementation manner, the preset recommendation rule may be to recommend an APP of the same type as the APP added by the user in the dock. For example, the APP added by the user in dock1 is the AA notes application. The category of the AA notes application may be a study category. The electronic device 100 may search for an APP whose category is the learning category from all APPs installed on the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may determine one or more APPs from the found APPs of the learning category, and display the APP icons corresponding to the one or more APPs in the recommended APP area of dock1. The one or more APPs may be any one or more APPs in the learning category of the electronic device 100 . Alternatively, the one or more APPs may be one or more APPs in the learning category of the electronic device 100 that are frequently used by the user (eg, the longest usage time). The one or more APPs may be APPs that are not placed in other existing docks.
示例性的,电子设备100可以确定出文档编辑应用、AA刷题应用、AA词典应用为学习类别的APP,并将这三个APP对应的APP图标显示在dock1的推荐APP区域(参考图6C所示的推荐APP区域618)。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 may determine that the document editing application, the AA quiz application, and the AA dictionary application are APPs of the learning category, and display the APP icons corresponding to these three APPs in the recommended APP area of dock1 (refer to FIG. 6C ). shown in the recommended APP area 618).
这里示例性介绍一种电子设备100从电子设备100安装的所有APP中寻找一个类别的APP的方法:电子设备100中可存储有应用类别表。该应用类别表中可包含电子设备100中安装的所有APP所属的类别。其中,一个APP可以具有多个类别。这多个类别可以是不同层级的。例如,视频应用可以具有娱乐类别、视频类别。上述娱乐类别的层级高于视频类别,例如,娱乐类别可以包含视频类别,还可以包含音乐类别、游戏类别等等。一个APP具有的多个类别也可以是相同层级的。例如,文档编辑应用可以具有学习类别、工作类别、工具类别。本申请实施例对APP类别的具体划分不作限定。上述对APP的类别的描述信息可以包含于该APP的应用程序包中。当下载一个APP,电子设备100可以从这一个APP的应用程序包中确定出这一个APP的类别,并将这一个APP的类别添加至应用类别表中。电子设备100可以通过上述应用类别表,在电子设备100安装的所有APP中寻找一个类别的所有APP。Here is an example to introduce a method for the electronic device 100 to find a category of APP from all the APPs installed on the electronic device 100: the electronic device 100 may store an application category table. The application category table may include categories to which all APPs installed in the electronic device 100 belong. Among them, an APP can have multiple categories. The plurality of categories may be of different levels. For example, a video application may have an entertainment category, a video category. The level of the entertainment category above is higher than that of the video category. For example, the entertainment category may include a video category, and may also include a music category, a game category, and so on. Multiple categories of an APP may also be at the same level. For example, a document editing application may have a learning category, a job category, and a tools category. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific division of APP categories. The above description information of the category of the APP may be included in the application program package of the APP. When an APP is downloaded, the electronic device 100 can determine the category of the APP from the application package of the APP, and add the category of the APP to the application category table. The electronic device 100 may search for all APPs of a category among all APPs installed on the electronic device 100 through the above application category table.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,上述预设的推荐规则可以是推荐与用户在dock中添加的APP经常被一起使用的APP。In another possible implementation manner, the aforementioned preset recommendation rule may be to recommend an APP that is often used together with an APP added by the user in the dock.
请参考图7C,图7C示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种推荐规则。Please refer to FIG. 7C , which exemplarily shows another recommendation rule provided by the embodiment of the present application.
电子设备100中可安装有多个APP。电子设备100可以根据用户使用各APP的使用时间对APP进行分组,得到多个APP pack。电子设备100得到多个APP pack的实现方法可以参考前述图7B所示的实施例。Multiple APPs may be installed in the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can group the APPs according to the usage time of each APP by the user to obtain multiple APP packs. For the implementation method of obtaining multiple APP packs by the electronic device 100, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7B.
当接收到在dock1中添加APP1的用户操作,电子设备100可以从多个APP pack中查找 包含APP1的APP pack。进一步的,电子设备100可以根据APP1在各包含APP1的APP pack中的使用时长,将包含APP1最长使用时长的APP pack确定为推荐结果。When receiving a user operation of adding APP1 in dock1, the electronic device 100 can search for an APP pack containing APP1 from a plurality of APP packs. Further, the electronic device 100 may determine the APP pack containing the longest usage time of APP1 as the recommendation result according to the usage time of APP1 in each APP pack containing APP1.
示例性的,这多个APP pack中包含APP1的APP pack有:APP pack1和APP pack3。电子设备100可以比较APP pack1中APP1的使用时长与APP pack3中APP1的使用时长。例如,APP pack1中APP1的使用时长为15分钟。APP pack3中APP1的使用时长为45分钟。电子设备100可以确定出APP pack3中APP1的使用时长更长,将APP pack3确定为推荐结果。Exemplarily, the APP packs including APP1 among the plurality of APP packs are: APP pack1 and APP pack3. The electronic device 100 may compare the usage duration of APP1 in APP pack1 with the usage duration of APP1 in APP pack3. For example, the usage time of APP1 in APP pack1 is 15 minutes. The usage time of APP1 in APP pack3 is 45 minutes. The electronic device 100 may determine that the usage time of APP1 in APP pack3 is longer, and determine APP pack3 as the recommended result.
其中,电子设备100可以将APP pack3中除APP1以外的其它APP对应的APP图标均显示在dock1的推荐APP区域。可选的,电子设备100可以将APP pack3中除APP1以外的部分APP对应的APP图标显示在dock1的推荐APP区域。上述部分APP可以是未放置于其它已存在的dock中的APP。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to other APPs in the APP pack3 except APP1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to some APPs in the APP pack3 except APP1 in the recommended APP area of the dock1. The aforementioned partial APPs may be APPs that are not placed in other existing docks.
也即是说,被显示在dock1的推荐APP区域的Y个APP与APP1具有关联关系A。该关联关系A可以是属于同一类别。或者,该关联关系A也可以是属于同一个APP pack,即为用户经常一起使用的APP。本申请实施例对上述关联关系A的具体内容不作限定。That is to say, Y APPs displayed in the recommended APP area of dock1 have an association relationship A with APP1. The association relationship A may belong to the same category. Alternatively, the relationship A may also belong to the same APP pack, that is, the APPs that users often use together. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the above association relationship A.
S704、接收到将桌面page中的APP2图标添加至dock1的用户操作,电子设备100将APP2图标添加至dock1的已添加APP区域。S704. Receiving a user operation of adding the APP2 icon in the desktop page to the dock1, the electronic device 100 adds the APP2 icon to the added APP area of the dock1.
上述桌面page中的APP2图标可以例如是图6D所示缩略桌面page619中的AA词典应用图标619A。上述将APP2图标添加至dock1的用户操作可以例如是将APP2图标拖拽至dock1的已添加APP区域的用户操作。The APP2 icon on the above desktop page may be, for example, the AA dictionary application icon 619A on the thumbnail desktop page 619 shown in FIG. 6D . The above user operation of adding the APP2 icon to the dock1 may be, for example, a user operation of dragging the APP2 icon to the added APP area of the dock1.
S705、电子设备100从电子设备100安装的所有APP中确定出Z个APP,这Z个APP与APP2具有关联关系B,电子设备100更新dock1中推荐APP区域的APP图标,将上述Z个APP对应的APP图标显示至dock1的推荐APP区域。S705. The electronic device 100 determines Z APPs from all the APPs installed on the electronic device 100. These Z APPs have an association relationship B with APP2. The electronic device 100 updates the APP icon in the recommended APP area in the dock1, and corresponds to the above Z APPs. The APP icon of the icon is displayed to the recommended APP area of dock1.
上述Z各APP对应的APP图标可以例如是前述图6E所示dock615的推荐APP区域618中的APP图标。The APP icons corresponding to the Z APPs above may be, for example, the APP icons in the recommended APP area 618 of the dock 615 shown in FIG. 6E .
电子设备100确定上述Z个APP的方法可以参考前述步骤S703中电子设备100确定Y个APP的方法。也即是说,上述关联关系B可以是属于同一类别。或者,该关联关系B也可以是属于同一个APP pack,即为用户经常一起使用的APP。本申请实施例对上述关联关系B的具体内容不作限定。The method for the electronic device 100 to determine the above Z APPs may refer to the method for the electronic device 100 to determine the Y APPs in step S703. That is to say, the above association relationship B may belong to the same category. Alternatively, the relationship B may also belong to the same APP pack, that is, the APPs that users often use together. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the above association relationship B.
需要进行说明的是,上述步骤S703与上述步骤S702关联。即在步骤S702发生的情况下,电子设备100才可能进行步骤S703。同样的,上述步骤S704与上述步骤S705关联。上述步骤S702~上述步骤S705均是可选的。并且,本申请实施例对上述步骤S702和步骤S704的执行顺序不作限定。It should be noted that the above step S703 is associated with the above step S702. That is, only when step S702 occurs, the electronic device 100 may proceed to step S703. Likewise, the above step S704 is associated with the above step S705. The above step S702 to the above step S705 are all optional. Moreover, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the execution order of the above step S702 and step S704.
由上述图7A所示的方法可知,电子设备100可以在创建桌面空间时,根据用户经常一起使用的多个APP等用户习惯,以及用户在新建桌面空间的dock中添加的APP为用户推荐可添加至新建桌面空间的dock的APP。上述被推荐的APP有较大可能是用户想添加至dock中的APP。这可以减少用户在桌面page中寻找APP并将APP拖拽至dock中的时间,帮助用户快速在dock中添加APP,提高构建描述一个场景的桌面空间的效率。From the method shown in FIG. 7A above, it can be seen that when creating a desktop space, the electronic device 100 can recommend the user to add according to user habits such as multiple APPs that the user often uses together, as well as the APPs added by the user in the dock of the newly created desktop space. To the app of the dock of the new desktop space. The above-mentioned recommended APP is more likely to be the APP that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for apps on the desktop page and drag them to the dock, help users quickly add apps to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
图8A和图8B示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的另一些在dock中推荐桌面组件的场景示意图。FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B exemplarily show some other scene diagrams of recommending desktop components in the dock provided by the embodiment of the present application.
响应于用于创建dock(即创建一个新的桌面空间)的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示如图8A所示的用户界面810。上述用于创建dock的用户操作可以参考前述图2A和图2B所示的用户操作,或者图3A~图3C所示的用户操作等。用户界面810可以包含缩略桌面page811、缩略桌面pag812、缩略桌面page813、dock815和dock816。In response to a user operation for creating a dock (that is, creating a new desktop space), the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 810 as shown in FIG. 8A . For the above user operations for creating a dock, reference may be made to the user operations shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B , or the user operations shown in FIGS. 3A to 3C . The user interface 810 may include a thumbnail desktop page811 , a thumbnail desktop page812 , a thumbnail desktop page813 , a dock815 and a dock816 .
其中,缩略桌面page811~缩略桌面page813可以参考前述图2C所示的缩略桌面page221~缩略桌面page223。dock815可以参考前述图2C所示的缩略dock228。这里不再赘述。Wherein, the thumbnail desktop page 811 - the thumbnail desktop page 813 may refer to the thumbnail desktop page 221 - the thumbnail desktop page 223 shown in FIG. 2C. The dock815 may refer to the abbreviated dock228 shown in FIG. 2C above. I won't go into details here.
dock816为新创建的dock。dock816中可包含已添加APP区域817和推荐APP区域818。已添加APP区域817可以参考前述图6A所示已添加APP区域617的介绍。推荐APP区域818可以参考前述图6A所示推荐APP区域718的介绍。dock816 is the newly created dock. The dock 816 may include an added APP area 817 and a recommended APP area 818 . For the added APP area 817, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned added APP area 617 shown in FIG. 6A. For the recommended APP area 818, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned recommended APP area 718 shown in FIG. 6A.
推荐APP区域818中的APP图标可以是电子设备100从当前完整显示的缩略桌面page中选取的。The APP icons in the recommended APP area 818 may be selected by the electronic device 100 from the currently completely displayed thumbnail desktop pages.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以根据用户使用APP的数据,将当前显示的一个桌面page中用户经常使用的APP对应的APP图标显示在推荐APP区域818中。当检测到切换桌面page的用户操作,电子设备100可以切换当前显示的桌面page。并且,电子设备100可以更新推荐APP区域818中的APP图标,将切换后的桌面page中用户经常使用的APP对应的APP图标显示在APP区域818中。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device 100 may display in the recommended APP area 818 an APP icon corresponding to an APP frequently used by the user in a currently displayed desktop page according to the data of the APP used by the user. When detecting a user operation of switching the desktop page, the electronic device 100 may switch the currently displayed desktop page. In addition, the electronic device 100 may update the APP icon in the recommended APP area 818 , and display in the APP area 818 the APP icon corresponding to the APP frequently used by the user in the switched desktop page.
上述确定一个桌面page中用户经常使用的APP的方法可以包括:确定一段时间内一个桌面page中使用时长最长的若干个APP,或者,确定一段时间内一个桌面page中打开次数最多的若干个APP等。The above-mentioned method for determining frequently used APPs by users in a desktop page may include: determining the longest-used several APPs in a desktop page within a period of time, or determining the most opened several APPs in a desktop page within a period of time wait.
如图8A所示,缩略桌面page812为当前完整显示在用户界面810上的页面。电子设备100可以从缩略桌面page812中确定出用户经常使用的APP,例如联系人应用、拨号应用、应用商城应用。电子设备100可以将上述确定出的用户经常使用的APP对应的图标显示在推荐APP区域818。可以看出,推荐APP区域818中可包含联系人应用图标818A、拨号应用图标818B、应用商城应用图标818C。As shown in FIG. 8A , the thumbnail desktop page 812 is a page currently completely displayed on the user interface 810 . The electronic device 100 may determine from the thumbnail desktop page 812 frequently used APPs of the user, such as a contacts application, a dialing application, and an application store application. The electronic device 100 may display icons corresponding to the determined APPs frequently used by the user in the recommended APP area 818 . It can be seen that the recommended APP area 818 may include a contact application icon 818A, a dial application icon 818B, and an application store application icon 818C.
响应于作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图8B所示的用户界面810。其中,电子设备100可以将完整显示在用户界面810上的页面切换为缩略桌面page813。缩略桌面page812部分显示在缩略桌面page813的左侧。缩略桌面page814部分显示在缩略桌面page813的右侧。电子设备100可以从缩略桌面page813中确定出用户经常使用的APP,例如AA聊天应用、AA游戏应用、音乐应用。对比图8A和图8B可知,推荐APP区域818中的APP图标可以随着缩略桌面page的切换而更新。电子设备100可以将缩略桌面page813中用户经常使用的APP对应的APP图标显示在推荐APP区域818。经过上述更新,推荐APP区域818中可包含AA聊天应用图标818D、AA游戏应用图标818E、音乐应用图标818F。In response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 810 shown in FIG. 8B . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may switch the page completely displayed on the user interface 810 to a thumbnail desktop page 813 . The thumbnail desktop page 812 is partially displayed on the left side of the thumbnail desktop page 813 . The thumbnail desktop page 814 is partially displayed on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 813 . The electronic device 100 can determine from the thumbnail desktop page 813 the APPs frequently used by the user, such as AA chat application, AA game application, and music application. Comparing FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B , it can be seen that the APP icon in the recommended APP area 818 can be updated along with the switching of the thumbnail desktop page. The electronic device 100 may display APP icons corresponding to frequently used APPs by the user in the thumbnail desktop page 813 in the recommended APP area 818 . After the above update, the recommended APP area 818 may include the AA chat application icon 818D, the AA game application icon 818E, and the music application icon 818F.
由上述电子设备100在dock中推荐APP的场景可知,电子设备100可以根据推荐用户经常一起使用的APP、与用户在dock中添加的APP同类别的APP、与用户在dock中添加的APP经常被一起使用的APP、当前显示的桌面page中用户经常使用的APP等推荐规则,在dock中为用户推荐APP。这些被推荐的APP有较大可能是用户想添加至dock中的APP。这可以减少用户在桌面page中寻找APP并将APP拖拽至dock中的时间,帮助用户快速在dock中添加APP,提高构建描述一个场景的桌面空间的效率。It can be known from the scenario where the electronic device 100 recommends APPs in the dock that the electronic device 100 can recommend the APPs that the user often uses together, the APPs of the same category as the APPs added by the user in the dock, and the APPs that are often used by the user in the dock. Recommendation rules such as APPs used together, APPs frequently used by users in the currently displayed desktop page, etc., recommend APPs for users in the dock. These recommended apps are more likely to be apps that the user wants to add to the dock. This can reduce the time for users to search for apps on the desktop page and drag them to the dock, help users quickly add apps to the dock, and improve the efficiency of building a desktop space that describes a scene.
在一些实施例中,除了dock,一个桌面空间还可以包含一个或多个桌面page。电子设备100可以根据用户的选择,将电子设备100中安装一部分桌面组件放置在一个桌面空间的page中,并取消在这一个桌面空间的page中显示其它桌面组件。例如,用户可以选择将一个场景下的所有桌面组件放置在一个桌面空间的桌面page中,并将这一个场景下最常使用的桌面组件放置在这一个桌面空间的dock中。在处于一个桌面空间的情况下,电子设备可以显示这一个桌面空间的桌面page,并完整显示这一个桌面空间的dock中的桌面组件。In some embodiments, in addition to the dock, a desktop space may also include one or more desktop pages. The electronic device 100 may place some desktop components installed on the electronic device 100 in a page of a desktop space according to the user's selection, and cancel displaying other desktop components in the page of the desktop space. For example, the user may choose to place all desktop components in a scene on the desktop page of a desktop space, and place the most frequently used desktop components in this scene in the dock of this desktop space. In the case of one desktop space, the electronic device can display the desktop page of the one desktop space, and fully display the desktop components in the dock of the one desktop space.
可以理解的,在一个桌面空间包含dock,但不包含桌面page的情况下,响应于切换桌面空间的用户操作(如作用在dock所在区域向左滑动或向右滑动的用户操作),电子设备100可以在桌面上显示被切换之后的桌面空间包含dock。其中,桌面page不会随桌面空间的切换而变化。即一个或多个page可用于放置电子设备100中的所有桌面组件,或者放置电子设备100所有桌面组件中除已添加至各个dock的桌面组件之外的桌面组件。在电子设备100处于不同的桌面空间的情况下,同一桌面page的内容均相同。It can be understood that, in the case that a desktop space includes a dock but does not include a desktop page, in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space (such as a user operation of sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located), the electronic device 100 The switched desktop space including the dock can be displayed on the desktop. Among them, the desktop page will not change with the switching of the desktop space. That is, one or more pages can be used to place all desktop components in the electronic device 100 , or place desktop components in all desktop components of the electronic device 100 except the desktop components that have been added to each dock. When the electronic device 100 is in different desktop spaces, the content of the same desktop page is the same.
在一个桌面空间包含dock和桌面page的情况下,响应于切换桌面空间的用户操作,电子设备100可以在桌面上显示被切换之后的桌面空间包含的桌面page以及dock。由于用户可以选择一个桌面空间的桌面page上放置的内容,那么不同桌面空间的桌面page上放置的内容可能不同。即在电子设备100处于不同的桌面空间的情况下,桌面page中的内容可能不同。In the case that a desktop space includes a dock and a desktop page, in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page and the dock included in the switched desktop space on the desktop. Since the user can select the content placed on the desktop page of one desktop space, the content placed on the desktop page of different desktop spaces may be different. That is, when the electronic device 100 is in different desktop spaces, the contents of the desktop pages may be different.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景。The following describes a scenario in which the electronic device 100 adjusts a desktop page of a desktop space provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图9A~图9F示例性示出了一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图。FIG. 9A to FIG. 9F exemplarily show some schematic diagrams of electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
如图9A所示的,电子设备100可以显示桌面910。桌面910可以包含桌面page911、页面指示符913和dock912。其中,桌面910上可包含多个dock。每一个dock均可对应一个桌面空间。dock912为桌面910上完整显示的dock。dock912的左侧和右侧均存在简化显示的dock。电子设备100可以响应于切换桌面空间的用户操作,来切换完整显示在桌面910上的dock。上述切换桌面空间的用户操作可以参考前述实施例的介绍。As shown in FIG. 9A , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 910 . The desktop 910 may include a desktop page 911 , a page indicator 913 and a dock 912 . Wherein, the desktop 910 may include multiple docks. Each dock can correspond to a desktop space. The dock 912 is a fully displayed dock on the desktop 910 . There are docks with simplified displays on the left and right sides of the dock912. The electronic device 100 may switch the dock completely displayed on the desktop 910 in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space. For the above user operation of switching desktop spaces, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
上述桌面page911、页面指示符913以及桌面910中的其它内容均可参考前述实施例中桌面的介绍内容。这里不再赘述。For the desktop page 911, the page indicator 913, and other content in the desktop 910, reference may be made to the introduction content of the desktop in the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
响应于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作,例如作用在桌面910上长按的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9B所示的用户界面920。用户界面920可包含缩略桌面page921、缩略桌面page922、缩略桌面page923、缩略dock924。用户界面920具体可以参考前述图2C所示实施例的介绍。In response to a user operation that triggers the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state, for example, a user operation that acts on a long press on the desktop 910 , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9B . The user interface 920 may include a thumbnail desktop page 921 , a thumbnail desktop page 922 , a thumbnail desktop page 923 , and a thumbnail dock 924 . For details of the user interface 920, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2C.
需要进行说明的是,缩略dock924可以为上述dock912的缩略图。缩略dock924可以包含已添加APP区域924A和推荐APP区域924B。已添加APP区域924A可用于放置已经添加至缩略dock924的APP图标。其中,已添加APP区域924A中的APP图标可以为dock912中APP图标对应的缩略图。推荐APP区域924B可用于放置电子设备100推荐用户在缩略dock924添加的APP图标。电子设备100在dock中推荐APP图标的方法可以参考前述实施例的介绍。It should be noted that the thumbnail dock924 may be a thumbnail of the above-mentioned dock912. The thumbnail dock 924 may contain an added APPs area 924A and a recommended APPs area 924B. Added APPs area 924A may be used to place APP icons that have been added to thumbnail dock 924 . Wherein, the APP icon in the added APP area 924A may be a thumbnail corresponding to the APP icon in the dock 912 . The recommended APP area 924B can be used to place the APP icons that the electronic device 100 recommends to be added by the user in the thumbnail dock 924 . For the method for the electronic device 100 to recommend an APP icon in the dock, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
可选的,缩略dock924中也可以仅包含已添加APP区域924A,而不包含推荐APP区域924B。Optionally, the thumbnail dock 924 may only include the added APP area 924A, but not the recommended APP area 924B.
缩略桌面page921~缩略桌面page923可以是全量桌面空间包含的桌面page的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 921 to the thumbnail desktop page 923 may be thumbnail images of desktop pages included in the full amount of desktop space.
上述全量桌面空间可以为包含电子设备100中的所有桌面组件的桌面空间。全量桌面空间可以包含一个或多个桌面page。这一个或多个桌面page可以按照一定的顺序排列。全量桌 面空间的一个或多个桌面page可用于放置电子设备100中的所有桌面组件,或者放置电子设备100所有桌面组件中除已添加至各个dock的桌面组件之外的桌面组件。上述桌面组件可以按照指定的位置放置在上述一个或多个桌面page上。上述桌面page所依据的指定的顺序,以及上述桌面组件所依据的指定的位置可以是用户指定的,或者是由电子设备100设定的。The aforementioned total amount of desktop space may be a desktop space including all desktop components in the electronic device 100 . The full desktop space can contain one or more desktop pages. The one or more desktop pages can be arranged in a certain order. One or more desktop pages of the full desktop space can be used to place all desktop components in the electronic device 100, or place desktop components in all desktop components of the electronic device 100 except the desktop components that have been added to each dock. The aforementioned desktop components can be placed on the aforementioned one or more desktop pages according to specified positions. The specified sequence on which the above-mentioned desktop pages are based and the specified positions on which the above-mentioned desktop components are based may be specified by the user or set by the electronic device 100 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,当进入桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示全量桌面空间包含的桌面page的缩略图,即全量桌面空间包含的缩略桌面page。这些缩略桌面page上放置的桌面组件的显示样式可以由电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间包含的桌面组件确定。其中,在全量桌面空间包含的缩略桌面page上,电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间包含的桌面组件和不包含的桌面组件可以具有不同的显示样式。这样,当进入桌面编辑状态,用户可以通过上述全量桌面空间查看电子设备100中的所有桌面组件。用户可以在全量桌面空间包含的缩略桌面page上选择需要在一个桌面空间中保留或者移除的桌面组件。In a possible implementation manner, when entering the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display thumbnails of desktop pages included in the full desktop space, that is, thumbnails of desktop pages included in the full desktop space. The display styles of the desktop components placed on these thumbnail desktop pages may be determined by the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. Wherein, on the thumbnail desktop page included in the full desktop space, the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located may have different display styles from those not contained in the desktop space. In this way, when entering the desktop editing state, the user can view all desktop components in the electronic device 100 through the above-mentioned full amount of desktop space. Users can select the desktop components that need to be kept or removed in a desktop space on the thumbnail desktop page included in the full desktop space.
可以理解的,电子设备100创建了一个空白的dock,并在这一个空白的dock中添加了桌面组件,可以表示电子设备100创建了一个新的桌面空间。这一个新的桌面空间即为上述一个空白的dock所属的桌面空间。当电子设备100新创建一个桌面空间,这一个桌面空间可以包含电子设备100中的所有桌面组件。即这一个桌面空间包含的桌面page可以与全量桌面空间包含的桌面page相同。用户可以对这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件进行移除,使得这一个桌面空间的桌面page上仅放置一个场景下的桌面组件。例如,在用户想要创建学习场景对应的学习桌面空间的情况下,电子设备100可以新创建一个桌面空间,并响应用户移除桌面组件的用户操作从新创建的桌面空间中移除桌面组件,使得该新创建的桌面空间包含的桌面page上仅放置学习场景下的桌面组件。It can be understood that the electronic device 100 creates a blank dock and adds a desktop component to the blank dock, which may indicate that the electronic device 100 has created a new desktop space. This new desktop space is the desktop space to which the above blank dock belongs. When the electronic device 100 newly creates a desktop space, this desktop space may include all desktop components in the electronic device 100 . That is, the desktop pages contained in this one desktop space can be the same as the desktop pages contained in the entire desktop space. The user can remove the desktop components included in this desktop space, so that only the desktop components in one scene are placed on the desktop page of this desktop space. For example, when the user wants to create a learning desktop space corresponding to the learning scene, the electronic device 100 may newly create a desktop space, and remove the desktop component from the newly created desktop space in response to the user operation of removing the desktop component by the user, so that Only the desktop components in the learning scene can be placed on the desktop page contained in the newly created desktop space.
示例性的,在图9B中,用户界面920中完整显示的缩略dock为缩略dock924。电子设备100当前处于缩略dock924所属的桌面空间。用户在全量桌面空间的缩略桌面page(如缩略桌面page922)上放置的桌面组件进行的移除操作,可用于将该桌面组件从缩略dock924所属的桌面空间中移除。Exemplarily, in FIG. 9B , the thumbnail dock completely displayed in the user interface 920 is the thumbnail dock 924 . The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs. The removal operation performed by the user on the thumbnail desktop page (such as the thumbnail desktop page 922 ) of the full desktop space can be used to remove the desktop component from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs.
响应于图9B所示作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9C所示的用户界面920。其中,电子设备100将用户界面920上完整显示的缩略桌面page切换为缩略桌面page922右侧的缩略桌面page923。由图9B和图9C可知,缩略桌面page922和缩略桌面page923中的所有桌面组件均未从缩略dock924所属的桌面空间中移除。在退出桌面编辑状态后,电子设备100可以在缩略dock924所属桌面空间的桌面上,显示缩略桌面page922和缩略桌面page923中包含的所有桌面组件。In response to the user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located as shown in FIG. 9B , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9C . Wherein, the electronic device 100 switches the thumbnail desktop page completely displayed on the user interface 920 to the thumbnail desktop page 923 on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 922 . It can be seen from FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C that all the desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page922 and the thumbnail desktop page923 are not removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 belongs. After exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display all desktop components contained in the thumbnail desktop page922 and the thumbnail desktop page923 on the desktop of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 belongs.
如图9C所示,响应于用于移除音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、AA游戏应用图标、BB游戏应用图标和AA音乐应用图标的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9D所示的用户界面920。其中,用于移除一个桌面组件的用户操作可以例如是,在电子设备100处于桌面编辑状态,作用在这一个桌面组件上的触摸操作或点击操作。本申请实施例对上述用于移除一个桌面组件的用户操作不作限定。As shown in FIG. 9C, in response to user operations for removing the music application icon, the video application icon, the AA game application icon, the BB game application icon, and the AA music application icon, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 9D 920. Wherein, the user operation for removing a desktop component may be, for example, a touch operation or a click operation on the desktop component when the electronic device 100 is in a desktop editing state. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above user operation for removing a desktop component.
如图9D所示,电子设备100可以在缩略桌面page923上以移除的显示样式显示缩略dock924所属桌面空间中被移除的桌面组件(如音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、AA游戏应用图标、BB游戏应用图标和AA音乐应用图标),并以未移除的显示样式显示缩略dock924所属桌面空间包含的桌面组件(如时钟应用图标等)。上述移除的显示样式可以为将桌面组件灰度化的显示样式。上述未移除的显示样式可以是时钟应用图标等桌面组件具有的未被灰度化的显示样式。本申请实施例对上述移除的显示样式不作限定。上述移除的显示样式和未移除 的显示样式可用于在调整一个桌面空间的桌面page时,方便用户区别这一个桌面空间中保留的桌面组件和被移除的桌面组件。As shown in FIG. 9D , the electronic device 100 can display the removed desktop components (such as music application icons, video application icons, AA game application icons) in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs on the thumbnail desktop page 923 in a removed display style. , BB game application icon and AA music application icon), and display the desktop components contained in the desktop space to which the dock924 belongs (such as the clock application icon, etc.) in an unremoved display style. The above-mentioned removed display style may be a display style that grayscales the desktop component. The above-mentioned non-removed display style may be a non-grayscale display style of a desktop component such as a clock application icon. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above removed display style. The above-mentioned removed display style and non-removed display style can be used to facilitate the user to distinguish between the retained desktop components and the removed desktop components in this desktop space when adjusting the desktop page of a desktop space.
响应于图9D所示退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作,例如作用在缩略桌面page923的触摸操作,电子设备100可以退出桌面编辑状态,显示图9E所示的桌面910。桌面910可包含桌面page914、页面指示符913和dock912。桌面page914和dock912属于同一个桌面空间。桌面page914的缩略图可以为图9D所示的缩略桌面page923。In response to the user operation of exiting the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 9D , such as a touch operation on the thumbnail desktop page 923 , the electronic device 100 may exit the desktop editing state and display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 9E . Desktop 910 may include desktop page 914 , page indicator 913 and dock 912 . Desktop page914 and dock912 belong to the same desktop space. The thumbnail of the desktop page 914 may be the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 9D .
由图9E可以看出,经过上述图9C所示的移除桌面组件的用户操作,电子设备100将图9D所示缩略桌面page923上以移除的显示样式显示的桌面组件从桌面page914中移除。桌面page914中原来显示这几个被移除的桌面组件的位置可以为空。也即是说,上述图9C所示移除桌面组件的用户操作可以将桌面组件从桌面page914所属的桌面空间中移除。As can be seen from FIG. 9E , after the user operation of removing the desktop component shown in FIG. 9C , the electronic device 100 removes the desktop component displayed in the removed display style on the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 9D from the desktop page 914 . remove. In the desktop page 914, the positions where these removed desktop components were originally displayed can be empty. That is to say, the user operation shown in FIG. 9C to remove the desktop component can remove the desktop component from the desktop space to which the desktop page914 belongs.
响应于图9E所示切换桌面空间的用户操作,例如作用在dock所在区域向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9F所示的桌面910。在图9F中,桌面910可以包括桌面page915、页面指示符913和dock916。In response to the user operation of switching the desktop space shown in FIG. 9E , for example, the user operation of sliding right on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 9F . In FIG. 9F , desktop 910 may include desktop page 915 , page indicator 913 , and dock 916 .
其中,电子设备100可以从dock912所属的桌面空间,切换至dock916所属的桌面空间。桌面page915为dock916所属桌面空间包含的桌面page。桌面page915上放置的桌面组件即为桌面page915所属桌面空间包含的桌面组件。可以看出,dock916所属的桌面空间可以包含dock912所属的桌面空间中被移除的桌面组件。dock916所属的桌面空间也可以包含dock912所属的桌面空间包含的桌面组件。即两个桌面空间可以是相互独立的,各自包含的桌面组件互不影响。Wherein, the electronic device 100 can switch from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs to the desktop space to which dock916 belongs. The desktop page915 is the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock916 belongs. The desktop components placed on the desktop page915 are the desktop components included in the desktop space to which the desktop page915 belongs. It can be seen that the desktop space to which dock916 belongs may contain the removed desktop components in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. The desktop space to which dock916 belongs may also contain desktop components contained in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. That is, the two desktop spaces can be independent of each other, and the desktop components contained in each do not affect each other.
对比图9E和图9F可知,当切换桌面空间,电子设备100可以在桌面910上显示被切换之后的桌面空间包含的桌面page(如桌面page915)以及dock(如dock915)。图9E中的页面指示符913和图9F中的页面指示符913中包含的指示符数量相同,且处于选中状态的指示符均为左侧第三个指示符。这可以表示图9E中的桌面page914和图9F中的桌面page915为全量桌面空间包含的桌面page中的同一个桌面page,例如桌面pageA。不同的是,在图9E中dock912所属的桌面空间中,桌面pageA中的部分桌面组件被移除。在图9F中的dock916所属的桌面空间中,桌面pageA中的桌面组件均未被移除。也即是说,在电子设备100处于不同桌面空间的情况下,全量桌面空间中同一个桌面page上放置的桌面组件可能不同。Comparing FIG. 9E and FIG. 9F , it can be seen that when the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 can display on the desktop 910 the desktop page (such as desktop page 915 ) and the dock (such as dock 915 ) contained in the switched desktop space. The number of indicators contained in the page indicator 913 in FIG. 9E and the page indicator 913 in FIG. 9F are the same, and the indicator in the selected state is the third indicator on the left. This may indicate that the desktop page 914 in FIG. 9E and the desktop page 915 in FIG. 9F are the same desktop page among the desktop pages included in the full desktop space, for example, desktop pageA. The difference is that, in the desktop space to which dock912 belongs in FIG. 9E , some desktop components in the desktop pageA are removed. In the desktop space to which dock916 in FIG. 9F belongs, none of the desktop components in the desktop pageA has been removed. That is to say, when the electronic device 100 is in different desktop spaces, the desktop components placed on the same desktop page in the entire desktop space may be different.
由上述图9A~图9F所示的场景可知,用户在创建一个桌面空间后,除了可以将一个场景下自己最常使用到的桌面组件放置在这一个桌面空间的dock中,还可以调整这一个桌面空间的桌面page上放置的桌面组件。例如,用户可以将这一个场景下不需要使用或者不想看到的桌面组件从这一个桌面空间的桌面page中移除。上述从桌面page中移除桌面组件的用户操作也比较简单。例如,用户仅需触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态,然后点击想要移除的桌面组件。那么,一个桌面空间的桌面page上可以仅放置用户在一个场景下需要使用的所有桌面组件,且这一个桌面空间的dock中可放置用户在这一个场景下用户最常使用到的桌面组件。From the scenes shown in Figure 9A to Figure 9F above, after creating a desktop space, users can not only place the desktop components they use most frequently in the dock of this desktop space, but also adjust the Desktop components placed on the desktop page of the desktop space. For example, the user can remove the desktop components that are not needed or seen in this scenario from the desktop page of this desktop space. The above-mentioned user operation of removing the desktop component from the desktop page is also relatively simple. For example, the user only needs to trigger the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state, and then click the desired desktop component to be removed. Then, the desktop page of a desktop space can only place all the desktop components that the user needs to use in one scene, and the dock of this desktop space can place the desktop components that the user uses most in this scene.
电子设备100在一个时间段可以显示一个桌面空间的桌面page以及dock。这可以简化桌面上呈现的内容,便于用户快速找到一个场景下的桌面组件。当用户想要聚焦于一个场景时,用户可以触发电子设备100处于这一个场景对应的桌面空间。用户可以仅查看这一个场景下需要使用的桌面组件,并可以通过dock快速找到并开启这一个场景下最常使用的桌面组件。这可以帮助用户聚焦于一个场景,减少其它场景下的桌面组件打扰用户聚焦于这一个场景的 情况。不同桌面空间进行切换的用户操作也比较简单。例如,用户可以仅需要在dock所在的区域进行向左或向右滑动的用户操作,即可以快速切换不同的桌面空间。The electronic device 100 may display a desktop page and a dock of a desktop space in a period of time. This can simplify the content presented on the desktop, and facilitate users to quickly find desktop components in a scene. When the user wants to focus on a scene, the user may trigger the electronic device 100 to be in the desktop space corresponding to the scene. Users can only view the desktop components that need to be used in this scenario, and can quickly find and open the most frequently used desktop components in this scenario through the dock. This can help users focus on one scene, and reduce the situation that desktop components in other scenes interrupt the user's focus on this one scene. The user operation for switching between different desktop spaces is also relatively simple. For example, the user may only need to perform a user operation of sliding left or right in the area where the dock is located, that is, to quickly switch between different desktop spaces.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以将一个桌面空间中被移除的桌面组件添加回来。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also add back the removed desktop components in a desktop space.
示例性的,响应于作用在图9E所示桌面910上用于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9D所示的用户界面920。也即是说,当桌面组件从一个桌面空间中被移除,在电子设备100处于退出桌面编辑状态的情况下,电子设备100在这一个桌面空间的桌面page上显示的桌面组件不包含上述被移除的桌面组件。但在电子设备100处于桌面编辑状态的情况下,电子设备100可以显示全量桌面空间的缩略桌面page(即电子设备100可以在缩略桌面page上显示上述被移除的桌面组件)。Exemplarily, in response to a user operation on the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 9E for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D . That is to say, when the desktop component is removed from a desktop space, and the electronic device 100 is in the state of exiting desktop editing, the desktop component displayed by the electronic device 100 on the desktop page of this desktop space does not include the aforementioned Removed desktop components. However, when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 can display a thumbnail desktop page of the full desktop space (that is, the electronic device 100 can display the above-mentioned removed desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page).
图9D所示的音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、AA游戏应用图标、BB游戏应用图标和AA音乐应用图标即为dock912所属桌面空间中被移除的桌面组件。响应于作用在图9D中任意一个被移除的桌面组件上的用户操作,例如触摸操作或点击操作,电子设备可以将这一个桌面组件的显示样式从移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式。本申请实施例对上述未移除的显示样式不作限定。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以在dock912所属桌面空间的桌面page上显示上述显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式的桌面组件。即这一个桌面组件被添加回dock912所属的桌面空间。The music application icon, video application icon, AA game application icon, BB game application icon and AA music application icon shown in FIG. 9D are desktop components removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. In response to a user operation acting on any of the removed desktop components in FIG. 9D , such as a touch operation or a click operation, the electronic device may change the display style of this desktop component from a removed display style to an unremoved one. Display styles. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the above-mentioned unremoved display styles. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned desktop component whose display style has been changed to a display style that has not been removed on the desktop page of the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs. That is, this desktop component is added back to the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以以桌面page为单位,将一个或多个桌面page从其所属的桌面空间中移除。若一个桌面page从一个桌面空间中被移除,这一个桌面page上放置的桌面组件也从这一个桌面空间中被移除。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may remove one or more desktop pages from the desktop space to which they belong, in units of desktop pages. If a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the desktop components placed on this desktop page are also removed from this desktop space.
图10A~图10D示例性示出了另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图。FIGS. 10A to 10D exemplarily show some other electronic devices 100 schematic diagrams of adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
如图10A所示,电子设备100可以处于桌面编辑状态,显示用户界面920。用户界面920中的内容可以参考前述实施例的介绍。用户界面920可包含页面添加/移除组件1011。As shown in FIG. 10A , the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 920 . For the content in the user interface 920, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments. The user interface 920 can include a page add/remove component 1011 .
页面添加/移除组件1011可用于触发电子设备100在一个桌面空间添加或移除完整显示在用户界面920中间的缩略桌面page。页面添加/移除组件1011可以具有不同的显示状态。页面添加/移除组件1011的不同显示状态可用于指示对应的缩略桌面page在一个桌面空间是否被移除。该对应的缩略桌面page可以是当前用户界面上完整显示的缩略桌面page。The page adding/removing component 1011 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove a thumbnail desktop page completely displayed in the middle of the user interface 920 in a desktop space. The page add/remove component 1011 can have different display states. Different display states of the page adding/removing component 1011 can be used to indicate whether the corresponding thumbnail desktop page is removed in a desktop space. The corresponding abbreviated desktop page may be a fully displayed abbreviated desktop page on the current user interface.
例如,页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态可以包括添加状态和移除状态。页面添加/移除组件1011处于添加状态可以指示对应的缩略桌面page在一个桌面空间中未被移除。即这一个桌面空间中包含该对应的缩略桌面page。当页面添加/移除组件1011处于添加状态,电子设备100可以响应于作用在页面添加/移除组件1011上的用户操作,例如触摸操作,将页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态变化为移除状态。页面添加/移除组件1011处于移除状态可以指示对应的缩略桌面page在一个桌面空间被移除。即这一个桌面空间中不包含该对应的缩略桌面page。当页面添加/移除组件1011处于移除状态,电子设备100可以响应于作用在页面添加/移除组件1011的用户操作,将页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态变化为添加状态。For example, the display state of the page add/remove component 1011 may include an add state and a remove state. The added state of the page adding/removing component 1011 may indicate that the corresponding thumbnail desktop page has not been removed in a desktop space. That is, this desktop space includes the corresponding thumbnail desktop page. When the page adding/removing component 1011 is in the adding state, the electronic device 100 may respond to a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011, such as a touch operation, to change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 to move. delete status. The page adding/removing component 1011 being in the removed state may indicate that the corresponding thumbnail desktop page is removed in a desktop space. That is, this desktop space does not include the corresponding thumbnail desktop page. When the page adding/removing component 1011 is in the removed state, the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 to the added state in response to a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011 .
本申请实施例对页面添加/移除组件1011处于添加状态或移除状态的具体显示样式不作限定。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific display style of the page adding/removing component 1011 in the added state or the removed state.
上述一个缩略桌面page在一个桌面空间未被移除可以表示,在退出桌面编辑状态的情况下,电子设备100在处于这一个桌面空间时可以显示这一个缩略桌面page对应的桌面page。 缩略桌面page可以为该缩略桌面page对应的桌面page的缩略图。一个缩略桌面page在一个桌面空间被移除可以表示,在退出桌面编辑状态的情况下,电子设备100在处于这一个桌面空间时显示的桌面page不包含这一个缩略桌面page对应的桌面page。The aforementioned abbreviated desktop page may indicate that a desktop space is not removed, and in the case of exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page when it is in the desktop space. The thumbnail desktop page may be a thumbnail of a desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page. An abbreviated desktop page being removed from a desktop space may indicate that the desktop page displayed by the electronic device 100 in this desktop space does not include the desktop page corresponding to the abbreviated desktop page when the desktop editing state is exited. .
示例性的,图10A所示的页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态为添加状态。当完整显示在用户界面920上的缩略桌面page被切换,页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态也可以随之切换。页面添加/移除组件1011切换之后的显示状态可以指示上述缩略桌面page被切换之后,完整显示的缩略桌面page在缩略dock924所属的桌面空间是否被移除。例如,响应于作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以将缩略桌面page923向左移动至用户界面920的中间,完整显示缩略桌面page923。那么,电子设备100可以根据缩略桌面page923在缩略dock924所属的桌面空间是否被移除,来确定页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态。若缩略桌面page923在缩略dock924所属的桌面空间未被移除,电子设备100可仍以添加状态来显示页面添加/移除组件1011。Exemplarily, the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 shown in FIG. 10A is the adding state. When the thumbnail desktop page fully displayed on the user interface 920 is switched, the display status of the page adding/removing component 1011 may also be switched accordingly. The display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 after switching may indicate whether the fully displayed thumbnail desktop page is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs after the above-mentioned thumbnail desktop page is switched. For example, in response to a user operation of sliding left on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may move the thumbnail desktop page 923 to the left to the middle of the user interface 920 to completely display the thumbnail desktop page 923 . Then, the electronic device 100 may determine the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 according to whether the thumbnail desktop page 923 is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs. If the thumbnail desktop page 923 is not removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs, the electronic device 100 can still display the page adding/removing component 1011 in the added state.
响应于作用在页面添加/移除组件1011的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图10B所示的用户界面920。In response to a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011 , such as a touch operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 10B .
对比图10A和图10B可知,当检测到作用在处于添加状态的页面添加/移除组件1011的用户操作,电子设备100可以将页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态从添加状态变化为图10B所示的移除状态。页面添加/移除组件1011处于添加状态和移除状态的显示样式可以是具有相同的图案但颜色不同的显示样式。Comparing FIG. 10A with FIG. 10B, it can be seen that when a user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1011 in the adding state is detected, the electronic device 100 can change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from the adding state to the one shown in FIG. 10B The removal status shown. The display styles in which the page adding/removing component 1011 is in the adding state and the removing state may be display styles having the same pattern but different colors.
另外,电子设备100还可以将缩略桌面page922中的所有桌面组件的显示样式切换为移除的显示样式。桌面组件移除的显示样式可以参考前述实施例的介绍。In addition, the electronic device 100 may also switch the display style of all desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page 922 to the removed display style. For the display style of desktop component removal, reference may be made to the introduction of the foregoing embodiments.
在一些实施例中,在用户手动将一个缩略桌面page上放置的所有桌面组件均从一个桌面空间移除的情况下,电子设备100可以将指示这一个缩略桌面page的页面添加/移除组件的显示状态确定为移除状态。In some embodiments, when the user manually removes all desktop components placed on a thumbnail desktop page from a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may add/remove a page indicating the thumbnail desktop page The display state of the component is determined to be removed.
如图10B所示,响应于退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作,例如作用在缩略桌面page922上空白区域的触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图10C所示的桌面910。桌面910的具体内容可以参考前述图9E的介绍。As shown in FIG. 10B , in response to a user operation of exiting the desktop editing state, such as a touch operation on a blank area on the thumbnail desktop page 922 , the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 10C . For the specific content of the desktop 910, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 9E.
由图10C可以看出,电子设备100处于dock912所属的桌面空间。上述dock912所属的桌面空间即为图10B所示缩略dock924所属的桌面空间。It can be seen from FIG. 10C that the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs. The above-mentioned desktop space to which dock912 belongs is the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 shown in FIG. 10B belongs.
图10C所示的页面指示符1022可以指示dock912所属的桌面空间包含的各个桌面page之间的位置关系。页面指示符1022中可包含4个指示符:最左侧一个指示负一屏的指示符,以及右侧三个指示放置有APP图标等桌面组件的桌面page的指示符。在未经过图10A和图10B所示移除桌面page的过程之前,当电子设备100处于dock912所属的桌面空间,桌面上的页面指示符中可包含5个指示符:最左侧一个指示负一屏的指示符,以及右侧四个指示放置有APP图标等桌面组件的桌面page的指示符(可以参考图9A所示的页面指示符913)。对比可知,在经过图10A和图10B所示移除桌面page的过程之后,页面指示符1022中减少了一个指示放置有APP图标等桌面组件的桌面page的指示符。也即是说,dock912所属的桌面空间包含的桌面page减少了一个。The page indicator 1022 shown in FIG. 10C may indicate the positional relationship between various desktop pages included in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs. The page indicator 1022 may include four indicators: the leftmost indicator indicating one screen negative, and the right three indicators indicating the desktop page where desktop components such as APP icons are placed. Before going through the process of removing the desktop page shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B , when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs, the page indicators on the desktop may include 5 indicators: the leftmost one indicates minus one screen, and four indicators on the right side indicating the desktop page on which desktop components such as APP icons are placed (refer to the page indicator 913 shown in FIG. 9A ). It can be seen from the comparison that after the process of removing the desktop page shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B , one indicator indicating the desktop page on which desktop components such as APP icons are placed is reduced in the page indicator 1022 . That is to say, the desktop space to which dock912 belongs includes one less desktop page.
电子设备100可以在桌面910上显示dock912所属桌面空间包含的桌面page。其中,桌面page914为图10B所示缩略桌面page923对应的桌面page914。响应于图10C所示用于切换一个桌面空间中不同桌面page的用户操作,例如作用在桌面page所在区域向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图10D所示的负一屏930。可以理解的,经过图10A和图10B 所示移除桌面page的过程,电子设备100将原来存在于桌面page914和负一屏930之间的一个桌面page(即图10B所示缩略桌面page922对应的桌面page),从dock912所属的桌面空间中移除。这相当于将缩略桌面page922上的所有桌面组件从dock912所属的桌面空间中移除。The electronic device 100 may display the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs on the desktop 910 . Wherein, the desktop page 914 is the desktop page 914 corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 923 shown in FIG. 10B . In response to the user operation shown in FIG. 10C for switching between different desktop pages in one desktop space, for example, the user operation of sliding right on the area where the desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may display a negative screen 930 shown in FIG. 10D . It can be understood that after the process of removing the desktop page shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B , the electronic device 100 will replace a desktop page that originally existed between the desktop page 914 and the negative screen 930 (that is, the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in FIG. 10B corresponds to desktop page), removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs. This is equivalent to removing all desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page922 from the desktop space to which the dock912 belongs.
由上述图10A~图10D所示的实施例可知,用户可以将一个桌面page中放置的所有桌面组件从一个桌面空间中移除。在新创建一个桌面空间,并将全量桌面空间中的大量桌面组件从新创建的桌面空间移除的场景中,用户可以通过上述移除桌面page的方式快速移除多个桌面组件。这样,用户可以不用进行多次用户操作,将需要移除的桌面组件一个一个从桌面空间中移除。上述方法可以提高用户移除桌面组件的效率,方便用户批量调整一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件。It can be seen from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D that the user can remove all desktop components placed in a desktop page from a desktop space. In the scenario where a desktop space is newly created and a large number of desktop components in the entire desktop space are removed from the newly created desktop space, the user can quickly remove multiple desktop components through the above method of removing the desktop page. In this way, the user can remove the desktop components that need to be removed from the desktop space one by one without performing multiple user operations. The above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
在一些实施例中,响应于作用在图10C所示桌面910上用于触发电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图9D所示的用户界面920。其中,在电子设备100处于桌面编辑状态的情况下,用户可以通过作用在缩略桌面page所在区域向左滑动或向右滑动的用户操作来查看全量桌面空间的各个缩略桌面page。也即是说,在一个桌面page从一个桌面空间中被移除后,用户在电子设备100处于桌面编辑状态时仍能查看从这一个桌面空间中被移除的桌面page的缩略图。这可以便于用户通过页面添加/移除组件将上述被移除的桌面page添加回这一个桌面空间。In some embodiments, in response to a user operation on the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 10C for triggering the electronic device 100 to enter the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D . Wherein, when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop editing state, the user can view various thumbnail desktop pages in the full desktop space by sliding left or right on the area where the thumbnail desktop page is located. That is to say, after a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the user can still view the thumbnail of the desktop page removed from the desktop space when the electronic device 100 is in the desktop editing state. This can facilitate the user to add the removed desktop page back to this desktop space through page adding/removing components.
在一些实施例中,在将一个桌面page从一个桌面空间中移除后,电子设备100还可以将这一个桌面page上放置的一个或多个桌面组件添加回这一个桌面空间。In some embodiments, after a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may also add one or more desktop components placed on the desktop page back to the desktop space.
图11A~图11C示例性示出了另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图。11A to 11C exemplarily show some other electronic devices 100 schematic diagrams of adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
如图11A所示,电子设备100可以处于桌面编辑状态,显示用户界面920。该用户界面920可以参考前述图10B的介绍。其中,页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态为移除状态。页面添加/移除组件1011处于移除状态可以指示缩略桌面page922在缩略dock924所属的桌面空间中被移除。缩略桌面page922上放置的所有桌面组件均以移除的显示样式显示。As shown in FIG. 11A , the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 920 . For the user interface 920, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 10B. Wherein, the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 is the removed state. The page adding/removing component 1011 being in the removed state may indicate that the thumbnail desktop page 922 is removed in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 924 belongs. All desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page922 are displayed with the removed display style.
响应于作用在拨号应用图标的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图11B所示的用户界面920。其中,电子设备100将拨号应用图标的显示样式从图11A所示移除的显示样式变化为图11B所示未移除的显示样式。页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态仍可为移除状态。In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the dialing application icon, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 920 shown in FIG. 11B . Wherein, the electronic device 100 changes the display style of the dialing application icon from the removed display style shown in FIG. 11A to the non-removed display style shown in FIG. 11B . The display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 can still be a removed state.
在一些实施例中,在一个缩略桌面page被移除后,若这一个缩略桌面page上放置的部分桌面组件的显示样式从移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式,电子设备100可以不改变页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态。即页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态仍为移除状态。作用在处于移除状态的页面添加/移除组件1011的用户操作,可用于触发电子设备100将上述一个缩略桌面page中显示样式仍为移除的显示样式的桌面组件以未移除的显示样式显示。并且,电子设备100可以将页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态从移除状态变化为添加状态。In some embodiments, after a thumbnail desktop page is removed, if the display style of some desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page changes from the removed display style to the non-removed display style, the electronic device 100 may not change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011. That is, the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 is still in the removed state. The user operation of adding/removing the component 1011 on the page in the removed state can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the desktop components whose display style is still the removed display style in the above-mentioned abbreviated desktop page as unremoved The style is displayed. And, the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from a removed state to an added state.
在一些实施例中,在一个缩略桌面page被移除后,若这一个缩略桌面page上放置的桌面组件中,有一个或多个桌面组件的显示样式从移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式,电子设备100可以将页面添加/移除组件1011的显示状态由移除状态变化为添加状态。作用 在处于添加状态的页面添加/移除组件1011的用户操作,可用于触发电子设备100将上述一个缩略桌面page中显示样式为未移除的显示样式的桌面组件再次以移除的显示样式显示。In some embodiments, after a thumbnail desktop page is removed, if among the desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page, the display style of one or more desktop components changes from the removed display style to the For the removed display style, the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1011 from the removed state to the added state. The user operation of adding/removing the component 1011 on the page in the added state can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to change the desktop component whose display style is the unremoved display style in the above-mentioned abbreviated desktop page to the removed display style again. show.
如图11B所示,响应于用于退出桌面编辑状态的用户操作,例如作用在缩略桌面page922空白区域的触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图11C所示的桌面910。桌面910可以包含桌面page1111和dock912。page1111和dock912可以属于一个桌面空间。这一个桌面空间也为图9B所示缩略dock924所属的桌面空间。As shown in FIG. 11B , in response to a user operation for exiting the desktop editing state, such as a touch operation on a blank area of the thumbnail desktop page 922 , the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 910 shown in FIG. 11C . The desktop 910 may include a desktop page1111 and a dock912. page1111 and dock912 can belong to one desktop space. This desktop space is also the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock924 shown in FIG. 9B belongs.
桌面page1111可以是图11B所示缩略桌面page922对应的桌面page。其中,缩略桌面page922上的桌面组件仅有拨号应用图标以未移除的显示样式显示。那么,电子设备100可以在桌面page1111上仅放置拨号应用图标。The desktop page 1111 may be the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in FIG. 11B . Wherein, among the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 922, only the dialer application icon is displayed in an unremoved display style. Then, the electronic device 100 may place only the dialing application icon on the desktop page1111.
在前述图9A和图11C所示的场景中,电子设备100均处于dock912所属的桌面空间。图9A所示的桌面page911和图11C所示的桌面page1111对应全量桌面空间中的同一个桌面page。对比图9A和图11C可知,经过图10A所示移除缩略桌面page922以及图11A所示将拨号应用添加回dock912所属桌面空间的过程,电子设备100可以将桌面page911中拨号应用图标以外的其它桌面组件均从dock912所属的桌面空间中移除。In the aforementioned scenarios shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 11C , the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs. The desktop page 911 shown in FIG. 9A and the desktop page 1111 shown in FIG. 11C correspond to the same desktop page in the full desktop space. Comparing Fig. 9A and Fig. 11C, it can be seen that after removing the thumbnail desktop page 922 shown in Fig. 10A and adding the dialing application back to the desktop space to which the dock 912 belongs as shown in Fig. The desktop components are all removed from the desktop space to which dock912 belongs.
由上述图11A~图11C所示的实施例可知,在将一个桌面page从一个桌面空间移除后,用户还可以手动将这一个桌面page上的部分桌面组件单独添加回这一个桌面空间。那么,在一个桌面page包含大量桌面组件,且仅有少数桌面组件是用户想要存放在一个桌面空间的情况下,用户可以先通过移除这一个桌面page来将这一个桌面page中的所有桌面组件一次性从这一个桌面空间移除,再手动将这一个桌面page中少数想要存放在这一个桌面空间的桌面组件添加回这一个桌面组件。上述方法可以提高用户移除桌面组件的效率,方便用户批量调整一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件。As can be seen from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C , after a desktop page is removed from a desktop space, the user can also manually add some desktop components on the desktop page back to the desktop space. Then, when a desktop page contains a large number of desktop components, and only a few desktop components are what the user wants to store in a desktop space, the user can remove all the desktops in this desktop page first by removing the desktop page. Components are removed from this desktop space at one time, and then a few desktop components in this desktop page that want to be stored in this desktop space are manually added back to this desktop component. The above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以在不切换桌面page的情况下,实现将一个或多个桌面page从其所属的桌面空间中移除。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may remove one or more desktop pages from the desktop space to which they belong without switching the desktop pages.
图12A~图12C示例性示出了另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图。FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C exemplarily show other electronic devices 100 for adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
如图12A所示,电子设备100可以处于桌面编辑状态,显示用户界面1210。用户界面1210可以参考前述图9C所示用户界面920的介绍。其中,用户界面1210可以包含缩略桌面page1211、缩略桌面page1212、缩略桌面page1213、缩略dock1214和缩放组件1215。As shown in FIG. 12A , the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1210 . For the user interface 1210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9C. Wherein, the user interface 1210 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1211 , a thumbnail desktop page 1212 , a thumbnail desktop page 1213 , a thumbnail dock 1214 and a zoom component 1215 .
在图12A中,电子设备100处于缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间。缩略桌面page1211~缩略桌面page1213与缩略dock1214属于同一个桌面空间。In FIG. 12A , the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. The abbreviated desktop page1211 to the abbreviated desktop page1213 and the abbreviated dock1214 belong to the same desktop space.
缩放组件1215可用于触发电子设备100进一步将各个缩略桌面page缩小,在一个用户界面显示多个桌面page的缩略图。The scaling component 1215 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to further zoom out each thumbnail desktop page, and display thumbnails of multiple desktop pages on one user interface.
示例性的,响应于作用在缩放组件1215的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图12B所示的用户界面1220。用户界面1220可以包含缩略桌面page1221、页面添加/移除组件1222、缩略桌面page1223、页面添加/移除组件1224、缩略桌面page1225、页面添加/移除组件1226、缩略桌面page1227、页面添加/移除组件1228、缩略dock1214。其中:Exemplarily, in response to a user operation acting on the zoom component 1215, such as a touch operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1220 shown in FIG. 12B. The user interface 1220 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1221, a page add/remove component 1222, a thumbnail desktop page 1223, a page add/remove component 1224, a thumbnail desktop page 1225, a page add/remove component 1226, a thumbnail desktop page 1227, a page Add/remove components 1228, abbreviated dock 1214. in:
缩略桌面page1221可以是电子设备100对图12A所示的缩略桌面page1211进一步缩小得到的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 1221 may be a thumbnail image obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1211 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100 .
缩略桌面page1223可以是电子设备100对图12A所示的缩略桌面page1212进一步缩小 得到的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 1223 may be a thumbnail obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1212 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100.
缩略桌面page1225可以是电子设备100对图12A所示的缩略桌面page1213进一步缩小得到的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 1225 may be a thumbnail obtained by further reducing the thumbnail desktop page 1213 shown in FIG. 12A by the electronic device 100 .
缩略桌面page1227可以是电子设备100对上述缩略桌面page1213右侧的一个缩略桌面page(图12A未示出)进一步缩小得到的缩略图。The thumbnail desktop page 1227 may be a thumbnail obtained by the electronic device 100 further reducing a thumbnail desktop page (not shown in FIG. 12A ) on the right side of the thumbnail desktop page 1213 .
页面添加/移除组件1222、页面添加/移除组件1224、页面添加/移除组件1226、页面添加/移除组件1228可分别用于触发电子设备100在缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间添加或移除缩略桌面page1221、缩略桌面page1223、缩略桌面page1225、缩略桌面page1227。上述各个页面添加/移除组件的显示状态可以参考前述实施例对页面添加/移除组件的介绍。The page adding/removing component 1222, the page adding/removing component 1224, the page adding/removing component 1226, and the page adding/removing component 1228 can be respectively used to trigger the electronic device 100 to add or remove Except thumbnail desktop page1221, thumbnail desktop page1223, thumbnail desktop page1225, and thumbnail desktop page1227. For the display states of the above page adding/removing components, reference may be made to the introduction of the page adding/removing components in the foregoing embodiments.
示例性的,在图12B中,页面添加/移除组件1222、页面添加/移除组件1224、页面添加/移除组件1226、页面添加/移除组件1228均处于添加状态。响应于图12B所示作用在页面添加/移除组件1222的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示图12C所示的用户界面1220。对比图12B和图12C可知,当检测到作用在图12B所示处于添加状态的页面添加/移除组件1222的用户操作,电子设备100可以将页面添加/移除组件1222的显示状态变化为图12C所示的移除状态。页面添加/移除组件1222处于移除状态可以指示缩略桌面page1221在缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间被移除。可选的,电子设备100还可以将缩略桌面page1221上放置的桌面组件的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式。Exemplarily, in FIG. 12B , the page adding/removing component 1222 , the page adding/removing component 1224 , the page adding/removing component 1226 , and the page adding/removing component 1228 are all in an adding state. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the page adding/removing component 1222 shown in FIG. 12B , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1220 shown in FIG. 12C . Comparing Fig. 12B and Fig. 12C, it can be known that when detecting the user operation acting on the page adding/removing component 1222 in the adding state shown in Fig. 12B, the electronic device 100 can change the display state of the page adding/removing component 1222 to Removed state shown in 12C. The page adding/removing component 1222 being in the removed state may indicate that the thumbnail desktop page 1221 is removed from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. Optionally, the electronic device 100 may also change the display style of the desktop components placed on the thumbnail desktop page 1221 to a removed display style.
如图12C所示,响应于作用在缩略桌面page1221空白区域的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以显示前述图10B所示的用户界面920。结合图10B~图10D所示的场景可知,电子设备100可以将图12C所示的缩略桌面page1221对应的桌面page从缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间(即图10C所示dock913所属的桌面空间)中移除。As shown in FIG. 12C , in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the blank area of the thumbnail desktop page 1221 , the electronic device 100 may display the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 10B . Combining the scenarios shown in FIG. 10B to FIG. 10D, it can be known that the electronic device 100 can transfer the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1221 shown in FIG. removed from the .
本申请实施例对用于触发电子设备100退出图12C所示一个用户界面包含多个缩略桌面page的状态的用户操作不作限定。例如上述用户操作还可以是作用在用户界面1220上双指向外张开的用户操作等。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the user operation for triggering the electronic device 100 to exit the state shown in FIG. 12C where a user interface includes multiple thumbnail desktop pages. For example, the above user operation may also be a user operation acting on the user interface 1220 to spread two fingers outward.
在一些实施例中,当检测到作用在缩放组件1215的用户操作,电子设备100可以将全量桌面空间包含的所有桌面page全部缩小,并显示在一个用户界面上。在上述一个用户界面中,全量桌面空间中的各桌面page上放置的桌面组件的显示样式,以及用于添加或移除该桌面page的页面添加/移除组件的显示状态,可以由电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间包含的桌面组件确定。电子设备100可以在上述一个用户界面以未移除的显示样式,来显示电子设备100当前处于的桌面空间包含的桌面组件。电子设备100可以在上述一个用户界面以移除的显示样式,来显示电子设备100当前处于的桌面空间不包含的桌面组件。若电子设备100当前处于的桌面空间不包含全量桌面page中的一个桌面page,电子设备100可以确定用于添加或移除这一个桌面page的页面添加/移除组件的显示状态为前述移除状态。否则,电子设备100可以确定用于添加或移除这一个桌面page的页面添加/移除组件的显示状态为前述添加状态。In some embodiments, when a user operation acting on the scaling component 1215 is detected, the electronic device 100 may shrink all desktop pages included in the full desktop space and display them on a user interface. In the above-mentioned user interface, the display style of the desktop components placed on each desktop page in the full desktop space, and the display status of the page adding/removing components used to add or remove the desktop page can be determined by the electronic device 100 The desktop components contained in the current desktop space are determined. The electronic device 100 may display the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located in the above-mentioned user interface in an unremoved display style. The electronic device 100 may display desktop components not included in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located in a removed display style on the aforementioned one user interface. If the desktop space that the electronic device 100 is currently in does not include a desktop page in the total number of desktop pages, the electronic device 100 may determine that the display state of the page addition/removal component used to add or remove this desktop page is the aforementioned removal state . Otherwise, the electronic device 100 may determine that the display status of the page adding/removing component for adding or removing this desktop page is the aforementioned adding status.
在一些实施例中,全量桌面空间包含的桌面page数量较多,电子设备100也可以在一个用户界面上显示全量桌面空间的部分桌面page缩小后的缩略图。本申请实施例对一个用户界面上显示的缩略桌面page的数量不作具体限定。In some embodiments, the full amount of desktop space contains a large number of desktop pages, and the electronic device 100 may also display reduced thumbnails of partial desktop pages of the full amount of desktop space on a user interface. The embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of thumbnail desktop pages displayed on a user interface.
由上述图12A~图12C所示的实施例可知,电子设备100可以在一个用户界面上显示多个桌面page的缩略图。这样,用户可以在一个用户界面上预览多个桌面page,并在一个桌面空间中将一个或多个桌面page移除或者添加回来。在需要移除或者添加多个桌面page的场 景下,用户可以不用在用户界面上来回切换不同的桌面page,对需要移除或者添加的多个桌面page一个一个进行移除或者添加操作。上述方法可以提高用户移除桌面组件的效率,方便用户批量调整一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件。It can be known from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C that the electronic device 100 can display thumbnails of multiple desktop pages on one user interface. In this way, the user can preview multiple desktop pages on one user interface, and remove or add back one or more desktop pages in one desktop space. In the scenario where multiple desktop pages need to be removed or added, the user can remove or add the multiple desktop pages that need to be removed or added one by one without switching back and forth between different desktop pages on the user interface. The above method can improve the efficiency of the user in removing desktop components, and facilitate the user to batch adjust the desktop components contained in a desktop space.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以从电子设备100全量桌面空间的一个或多个桌面page上放置的桌面组件中确定出,与一个桌面空间包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件。电子设备100可以在这一个桌面空间的桌面page上显示与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,并在这一个桌面空间内移除与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop components placed on one or more desktop pages in the entire desktop space of the electronic device 100, that it belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock contained in a desktop space desktop components. The electronic device 100 can display the desktop components belonging to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space on the desktop page of the desktop space, and remove the desktop components related to the desktop space in the desktop space. The desktop components added in the dock do not belong to the desktop components of the same scene.
图13A和图13B示例性示出了另一些电子设备100调整一个桌面空间的桌面page的场景示意图。FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B exemplarily show a schematic diagram of other electronic devices 100 adjusting a desktop page of a desktop space.
如图13A所示,电子设备100可以处于桌面编辑状态,显示用户界面1210。用户界面1210可以参考前述图12A的介绍。其中,用户界面1210可包含自动选择组件1216。As shown in FIG. 13A , the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1210 . For the user interface 1210, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 12A. Wherein, the user interface 1210 may include an automatic selection component 1216 .
在一些实施例中,自动选择组件1216可用于触发电子设备100在当前所处的桌面空间内,移除当前用户界面1210中完整显示的缩略桌面page上放置的一个或多个桌面组件。这一个或多个桌面组件可以是与电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。本申请后续实施例中将具体介绍判断一个桌面组件是否与一个dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的方法。这里先不展开。In some embodiments, the automatic selection component 1216 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to remove one or more desktop components placed on the fully displayed thumbnail desktop page in the current user interface 1210 in the current desktop space. The one or more desktop components may be desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components added to the dock contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. Subsequent embodiments of the present application will specifically introduce a method for judging whether a desktop component and a desktop component added to a dock belong to the same scene. Let's not expand here.
示例性的,响应于图13A所示作用在自动选择组件1216的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图13B所示的用户界面1210。在图13B中,电子设备100将缩略桌面page1212上的部分桌面组件(如音乐应用图标、运动健康应用图标、视频应用图标、智慧生活应用图标、AA银行应用图标、AA游戏应用图标、BB游戏应用图标、地图应用图标、AA聊天应用图标、AA音乐应用图标)的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式。可以看出,电子设备100当前处于缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间。电子设备100在缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间移除上述部分桌面组件。当退出图13B所示的桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以在缩略dock1214所属桌面空间中显示缩略桌面page1212对应的桌面page。该缩略桌面page1212对应的桌面page不包含上述被移除的部分桌面组件。Exemplarily, in response to user operations acting on the automatic selection component 1216 shown in FIG. 13A , the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 1210 shown in FIG. 13B . In FIG. 13B , the electronic device 100 will abbreviate some desktop components on the desktop page1212 (such as music application icons, sports health application icons, video application icons, smart life application icons, AA bank application icons, AA game application icons, BB game The display style of the application icon, the map application icon, the AA chat application icon, and the AA music application icon) is changed to the removed display style. It can be seen that the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. The electronic device 100 removes some of the above desktop components from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. When exiting the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 13B , the electronic device 100 may display the desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1212 in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. The desktop page corresponding to the thumbnail desktop page 1212 does not include the aforementioned removed partial desktop components.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以根据缩略dock1214中已添加的桌面组件,在缩略桌面page1212上的所有桌面组件中确定出上述部分桌面组件。例如,缩略dock1214中已添加的桌面组件包含AA笔记应用图标、AA阅读应用图标和文档编辑应用图标这三个桌面组件。这三个桌面组件可以是学习场景下的桌面组件。电子设备100可以在缩略桌面page1212上的所有桌面组件中,确定出属于学习场景下的桌面组件和不属于学习场景下的桌面组件。那么,电子设备100可以在缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间移除上述不属于学习场景下的桌面组件。另外,电子设备100还可以在缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间保留上述属于学习场景下的桌面组件,并将缩略桌面page1212上的所有桌面组件中已从缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间移除但属于学习场景下的桌面组件添加回来。In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device 100 may determine the aforementioned part of the desktop components among all the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 according to the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock 1214 . For example, the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock1214 include three desktop components: AA note application icon, AA reading application icon and document editing application icon. These three desktop components may be desktop components in a learning scenario. The electronic device 100 may determine the desktop components belonging to the learning scene and the desktop components not belonging to the learning scene among all the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 . Then, the electronic device 100 may remove the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the learning scene from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1214 belongs. In addition, the electronic device 100 can also retain the above-mentioned desktop components belonging to the learning scene in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1214 belongs, and remove all desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page1212 from the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1214 belongs but belong to The desktop components in the learning scene are added back.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当进入桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以确定缩略桌面page1212上哪些桌面组件在电子设备100此次进入桌面编辑状态后被用户手动添加或移除。当检测到图13A所示作用在自动选择组件1216的用户操作,电子设备100可以根据缩略dock1214中已添加的桌面组件,在缩略桌面page1212上除上述被用户手动添加或移除的桌面组件之外的桌面组件中确定出上述部分桌面组件。In another possible implementation, when entering the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may determine which desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 are manually added or removed by the user after the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state this time. When the user operation acting on the automatic selection component 1216 shown in FIG. 13A is detected, the electronic device 100 can delete the desktop components manually added or removed by the user on the thumbnail desktop page 1212 according to the added desktop components in the thumbnail dock 1214 The above-mentioned partial desktop components are determined in the desktop components other than .
示例性的,电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态,且当前处于桌面空间A。电子设备100当前在用户界面上完整显示的一个缩略桌面page上放置有20个桌面组件。这20个桌面组件在这一个缩略桌面page中均以未移除的显示样式显示。响应于作用在这20个桌面组件中的3个桌面组件上的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以将这3个桌面组件的显示样式由未移除的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式。即用户手动将这3个桌面组件从桌面空间A移除。响应于作用在自动选择组件1216的用户操作,电子设备100可以在这一个缩略桌面page上的17个桌面组件中,确定出与桌面空间A的dock中放置的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,以及与桌面空间A的dock中放置的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。上述17个桌面组件为这一个缩略桌面page中除上述3个被用户手动移除的桌面组件之外的桌面组件。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state, and is currently in the desktop space A. The electronic device 100 currently places 20 desktop components on a thumbnail desktop page fully displayed on the user interface. These 20 desktop components are all displayed in the unremoved display style in this thumbnail desktop page. In response to user operations, such as touch operations, on three of the 20 desktop components, the electronic device 100 may change the display style of these three desktop components from a non-removed display style to a removed display style. That is, the user manually removes the three desktop components from desktop space A. In response to the user operation acting on the automatic selection component 1216, the electronic device 100 can determine the desktop belonging to the same scene as the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space A among the 17 desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page Components, and desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components placed in the dock of desktop space A. The above-mentioned 17 desktop components are desktop components in this thumbnail desktop page except the above-mentioned 3 desktop components that are manually removed by the user.
也即是说,作用在自动选择组件的用户操作可以不改变在此次进入桌面编辑状态后,用户手动添加或移除桌面组件的结果。That is to say, the user operation acting on the automatically selected component may not change the result of the user manually adding or removing the desktop component after entering the desktop editing state this time.
可选的,作用在自动选择组件的用户操作可以改变在此次进入桌面编辑状态之前,桌面组件被添加或移除的结果。Optionally, the user operation acting on the automatic selection of components may change the result of adding or removing desktop components before entering the desktop editing state this time.
示例性的,电子设备100进入桌面编辑状态,且当前处于桌面空间B。电子设备100当前在用户界面上完整显示的一个缩略桌面page上放置有10个桌面组件。这10个桌面组件中的桌面组件A以移除的显示样式显示,另外9个桌面组件以未移除的显示样式显示。上述桌面组件A是在电子设备100此次进入桌面编辑状态之前从桌面空间B被移除的。相应于作用在自动选择组件1216的用户操作,电子设备100可以在这一个缩略桌面page上的10个桌面组件中,确定出与桌面空间B的dock中放置的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,以及与桌面空间B的dock中放置的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。若电子设备100确定出桌面组件A与桌面空间B的dock中放置的桌面组件属于同一个场景,且上述以未移除的显示样式显示的9个桌面组件中桌面组件B与桌面空间B的dock中放置的桌面组件不属于同一个场景,电子设备100可以将桌面组件A的显示样式由移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式,并将桌面组件B的显示样式由未移除的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式。即电子设备100可以将桌面组件A添加回桌面空间B,并将桌面组件B从桌面空间B移除。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state, and is currently in the desktop space B. The electronic device 100 currently places 10 desktop components on a thumbnail desktop page fully displayed on the user interface. Desktop component A among the 10 desktop components is displayed in a removed display style, and the other 9 desktop components are displayed in a non-removed display style. The aforementioned desktop component A is removed from the desktop space B before the electronic device 100 enters the desktop editing state this time. Corresponding to the user operation acting on the automatic selection component 1216, the electronic device 100 can determine the desktop belonging to the same scene as the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space B among the 10 desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page Components, and desktop components that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components placed in the dock of desktop space B. If the electronic device 100 determines that the desktop component A and the desktop component placed in the dock of the desktop space B belong to the same scene, and the desktop component B and the dock of the desktop space B among the nine desktop components displayed in the unremoved display style The desktop components placed in do not belong to the same scene, the electronic device 100 can change the display style of desktop component A from the removed display style to the non-removed display style, and change the display style of desktop component B from the non-removed The display style changes to the removed display style. That is, the electronic device 100 can add the desktop component A back to the desktop space B, and remove the desktop component B from the desktop space B.
当切换完整显示在用户界面1210上的缩略桌面page,自动选择组件1216可用于在电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间调整(如添加、移除)切换之后完整显示在缩略桌面page上的部分桌面组件。其中,调整桌面组件可以包括:在缩略桌面page上将桌面组件的显示样式由移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式(即添加)、在缩略桌面page上将桌面组件的显示样式由未移除的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式(即移除)。When switching the thumbnail desktop page that is completely displayed on the user interface 1210, the automatic selection component 1216 can be used to completely display the thumbnail desktop page after switching the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located (such as adding, removing). Some desktop components. Wherein, adjusting the desktop component may include: changing the display style of the desktop component from a removed display style to a non-removed display style (that is, adding) on the thumbnail desktop page, changing the display style of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page The style is changed from the non-removed display style to the removed display style (ie, removed).
在一些实施例中,自动选择组件1216可用于触发电子设备100在当前所处的桌面空间内,调整(如添加、移除)全量桌面空间包含的所有桌面组件中的一个或多个桌面组件。也即是说,当检测到作用在自动选择组件1216的用户操作,电子设备100可以从全量桌面空间包含的所有桌面组件中确定出与电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间,例如缩略dock1214所属的桌面空间,包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件。进一步的,电子设备100可以根据前述实施例中调整桌面组件的方法对全量桌面空间的所有桌面组件进行调整。In some embodiments, the automatic selection component 1216 may be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to adjust (such as add, remove) one or more desktop components in all desktop components contained in the entire desktop space in the current desktop space. That is to say, when a user operation acting on the automatic selection component 1216 is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine from all the desktop components contained in the total desktop space that the electronic device 100 is currently located in the desktop space, for example, the thumbnail dock1214 belongs to In the desktop space, the desktop components added in the included dock belong to the desktop components of the same scene. Further, the electronic device 100 may adjust all desktop components in the full desktop space according to the method for adjusting desktop components in the foregoing embodiments.
在上述实施例中,用户可以先在新创建的一个桌面空间的dock中放置一个场景下的一个或多个桌面组件。然后,用户可以通过自动选择组件1216触发电子设备100在电子设备100的所有桌面组件中筛选取上述一个场景下的所有桌面组件。电子设备100可以将上述一个场景下的所有桌面组件保留在这一个桌面空间中,并将不属于上述一个场景下的所有桌面组件 从这一个桌面空间中移除。这样,用户可以实现一键构建用于描述一个场景的桌面空间。这可以有效简化用户构建桌面空间的用户操作,提高构建桌面空间的效率。In the foregoing embodiment, the user may first place one or more desktop components in a scene on a dock of a newly created desktop space. Then, the user may trigger the electronic device 100 to filter all the desktop components in the above-mentioned one scenario from all the desktop components of the electronic device 100 through the automatic selection component 1216 . The electronic device 100 may keep all desktop components in the above-mentioned one scene in this one desktop space, and remove all desktop components that do not belong to the above-mentioned one scene from this one desktop space. In this way, users can realize one-click construction of a desktop space used to describe a scene. This can effectively simplify the user operation for the user to construct the desktop space, and improve the efficiency of constructing the desktop space.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以提供选项,让用户选择触发电子设备100根据当前所处桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件进行调整的范围是全量桌面空间包含的所有桌面组件,还是当前用户界面完整显示的桌面page上的桌面组件。例如,用户界面1210上可包含全局自动选择组件和当前页面自动选择组件。上述全局自动选择组件可用于触发电子设备100根据当前所处桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件,在全量桌面空间包含的所有桌面组件中确定需要调整的桌面组件,并对上述需要调整的桌面组件进行调整。上述当前页面自动选择组件可用于触发电子设备100根据当前所处桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件,在当前用户界面完整显示的桌面page上的桌面组件中确定需要调整的桌面组件,并对上述需要调整的桌面组件进行调整。本申请实施例对上述选项的表现形式不作限定。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may provide an option for the user to select whether the scope to trigger the electronic device 100 to adjust according to the added desktop components in the dock of the current desktop space is all the desktop components contained in the entire desktop space, or the current The desktop component on the desktop page where the user interface is fully displayed. For example, the user interface 1210 may include a global automatic selection component and a current page automatic selection component. The above-mentioned global automatic selection component can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to determine the desktop component that needs to be adjusted among all the desktop components contained in the full desktop space according to the desktop component that has been added in the dock of the current desktop space, and to adjust the above-mentioned desktop component that needs to be adjusted. Components are adjusted. The above-mentioned current page automatic selection component can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to determine the desktop component that needs to be adjusted among the desktop components on the desktop page fully displayed in the current user interface according to the desktop components that have been added in the dock of the current desktop space, and The desktop components that need to be adjusted above are adjusted. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the expression forms of the above options.
由上述图13A和图13B所示的实施例可知,当处于一个桌面空间,电子设备100可以在这一个桌面空间的桌面page上为用户筛选出,与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件。电子设备100可以在这一个桌面空间中保留上述与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,并移除与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。上述方法可以帮助用户高效地构建描述一个场景的桌面空间,用户可以不用手动地对一个一个桌面组件进行移除操作。As can be seen from the embodiments shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B , when in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 can filter for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, which is the same as the desktop that has been added in the dock of this desktop space. Components belong to the desktop component of the same scene. The electronic device 100 may retain the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that are different from the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space. Desktop components belonging to the same scene. The above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
请参考图13C,图13C示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100在一个桌面空间调整桌面组件的方法流程图。Please refer to FIG. 13C . FIG. 13C exemplarily shows a flow chart of a method for electronic device 100 to adjust a desktop component in a desktop space according to an embodiment of the present application.
如图13C所示,该调整桌面组件的方法可包括步骤S1310~S1350。其中:As shown in FIG. 13C , the method for adjusting a desktop component may include steps S1310-S1350. in:
S1310、电子设备100接收到作用在自动选择组件的用户操作。S1310. The electronic device 100 receives a user operation acting on the automatic selection component.
上述作用在自动选择组件的用户操作可以参考前述图13A的介绍。For the above-mentioned user operations acting on the automatic selection component, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 13A .
S1320、电子设备100可以判断桌面空间A的dock中是否包含已添加的桌面组件,桌面空间A为电子设备100当前所处的桌面空间。S1320. The electronic device 100 may determine whether the added desktop component is included in the dock of the desktop space A, where the desktop space A is the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located.
响应于步骤S1310中作用在自动选择组件的用户操作,电子设备100可以确定当前所处的桌面空间。当前所处的桌面空间可以为当前用户界面上完整显示的dock所属的桌面空间。例如,电子设备100确定出当前所处的桌面空间为桌面空间A。电子设备100可以判断桌面空间A的dock的已添加APP区域是否存在桌面组件。In response to the user operation on the automatic selection component in step S1310, the electronic device 100 may determine the current desktop space. The current desktop space may be the desktop space to which the fully displayed dock on the current user interface belongs. For example, the electronic device 100 determines that the current desktop space is desktop space A. The electronic device 100 may determine whether there is a desktop component in the added APP area of the dock of the desktop space A.
S1330、电子设备100可以从桌面组件分组A中,确定与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,桌面组件分组A中包含一个或多个桌面组件。S1330. The electronic device 100 may determine, from the desktop component group A, desktop components that belong to the same scene as the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A, and the desktop component group A includes one or more desktop components.
若判断出桌面空间A的dock的已添加APP区域存在桌面组件,电子设备100能够确定桌面空间A对应的场景。例如,若桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件为娱乐场景下的桌面组件,电子设备100能够确定出桌面空间A对应娱乐场景。即用户想要将桌面空间A构建为描述娱乐场景的娱乐桌面空间。那么,娱乐桌面空间包含的桌面page上可以仅放置娱乐场景下的桌面组件。If it is determined that there is a desktop component in the added APP area of the dock of the desktop space A, the electronic device 100 can determine the scene corresponding to the desktop space A. For example, if the added desktop component in the dock of the desktop space A is a desktop component in an entertainment scene, the electronic device 100 can determine that the desktop space A corresponds to an entertainment scene. That is, the user wants to construct the desktop space A as an entertainment desktop space describing an entertainment scene. Then, only the desktop components in the entertainment scene can be placed on the desktop page included in the entertainment desktop space.
电子设备100可以确定出根据桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件对桌面空间A的桌面组件进行调整的范围。该进行调整的范围可以为上述桌面组件分组A。在一些实施例中,上述桌面组件分组A中包含的桌面组件可以为:当前用户界面上完整显示的缩略桌面page(例如,图13A所示的缩略桌面page1212)上的所有桌面组件。在另一些实施例中,上述桌面组 件分组A中包含的桌面组件可以为:当前用户界面上完整显示的缩略桌面page上除此次进入桌面编辑状态后用户手动添加或移除的桌面组件之外的桌面组件。在另一些实施例中,上述桌面组件分组A中包含的桌面组件可以为:全局桌面空间包含的桌面组件。本申请试试对上述桌面组件分组A中包含的桌面组件不作限定。The electronic device 100 may determine a range to adjust the desktop components of the desktop space A according to the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A. The adjustment range may be the above-mentioned desktop component group A. In some embodiments, the desktop components included in the above desktop component group A may be: all desktop components on a fully displayed thumbnail desktop page (eg, thumbnail desktop page 1212 shown in FIG. 13A ) on the current user interface. In some other embodiments, the desktop components included in the above desktop component group A may be: the desktop components manually added or removed by the user after entering the desktop editing state on the abbreviated desktop page completely displayed on the current user interface External desktop components. In some other embodiments, the desktop components contained in the above desktop component group A may be: desktop components contained in the global desktop space. This application tries not to limit the desktop components contained in the above desktop component group A.
电子设备100可以从桌面组件分组A中确定与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件。The electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop component group A the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components added to the dock of the desktop space A.
请参考图13D,图13D示例性示出了电子设备100从桌面组件分组A中确定与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件的方法流程图。Please refer to FIG. 13D . FIG. 13D exemplarily shows a flowchart of a method for the electronic device 100 to determine from the desktop component group A a desktop component belonging to the same scene as the desktop component added in the dock of the desktop space A.
如图13D所示,该方法可包括步骤S1331~S1333。其中:As shown in FIG. 13D , the method may include steps S1331-S1333. in:
S1331、电子设备100可以确定桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件所属的类别,例如类别1和类别2。S1331. The electronic device 100 may determine the categories to which the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A belong, for example category 1 and category 2.
电子设备100可以通过应用类别表确定桌面组件所属的类别。具体过程可以参考前述实施例关于应用类别表的介绍。这里不再赘述。The electronic device 100 may determine the category to which the desktop component belongs through the application category table. For the specific process, reference may be made to the introduction about the application category table in the foregoing embodiments. I won't go into details here.
示例性的,电子设备100确定出桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件所属的类别为类别1和类别2。Exemplarily, the electronic device 100 determines that the categories of the added desktop components in the dock of the desktop space A belong to category 1 and category 2 .
S1332、电子设备100可以确定与类别1和类别2相关的类别,例如类别3,上述相关的类别可包括:具有包含关系的类别,能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。S1332. The electronic device 100 may determine a category related to category 1 and category 2, such as category 3. The above-mentioned related categories may include: categories having a containment relationship, and categories that can assist each other in a scene.
电子设备100可以在应用类别表中确定与类别1和类别2相关的类别。例如,应用类别表中与类别1和类别2相关的类别包括类别3。The electronic device 100 may determine categories related to category 1 and category 2 in the application category table. For example, the categories related to category 1 and category 2 in the application category table include category 3 .
上述相关的类别可包括:具有包含关系的类别,能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。其中,上述具有包含关系的类别可以表示一个类别包含另一个类别。例如,娱乐类别包含音乐类别、游戏类别等。那么,娱乐类别与音乐类别具有包含关系。娱乐类别与游戏类别也具有包含关系。上述能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别可以表示在一个类别的桌面组件的使用场景中,另一个类别的桌面组件可以提供辅助的功能。例如,视频类别和投屏类别可以为能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。其中,用户在使用视频类别的桌面组件播放视频时,可能需要使用投屏类别的桌面组件将被播放的视频投影至其它显示设备。运动类别和音乐类别可以为能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。其中,用户在使用运动类别的桌面组件进行运动时,可能需要使用音乐类别的桌面组件听音乐。再例如,旅游类别和住宿类别可以为能在一个场景中相互辅助的类别。其中,用户在使用旅游类别的桌面组件查看旅游景点时,可能需要使用住宿类别的桌面组件在旅游景点所在地订酒店。The above related categories may include: categories with containment relationship, categories that can assist each other in a scene. Wherein, the above-mentioned categories having a containment relationship may indicate that one category contains another category. For example, the entertainment category includes a music category, a game category, and the like. Then, the entertainment category has a containment relationship with the music category. The entertainment category also has an inclusion relationship with the game category. The aforementioned categories that can assist each other in a scenario may be represented in a usage scenario of desktop components of one category, and desktop components of another category may provide auxiliary functions. For example, the video category and the screen projection category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene. Wherein, when the user uses the desktop component of the video category to play a video, the user may need to use the desktop component of the screen projection category to project the played video to other display devices. The sports category and the music category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene. Wherein, the user may need to use the desktop component of the music category to listen to music when using the desktop component of the sports category to exercise. For another example, the tourism category and the accommodation category may be categories that can assist each other in one scene. Wherein, when the user uses the desktop component of the tourism category to view tourist attractions, he may need to use the desktop component of the accommodation category to book a hotel at the location of the tourist attraction.
本申请实施例对桌面组件的类别的相关关系不作限定。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the correlation between categories of desktop components.
S1333、电子设备100可以确定桌面组件分组A中属于类别1、类别2、类别3的桌面组件,其中,桌面组件分组A中属于类别1、类别2、类别3中任一类别的桌面组件与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景。S1333. The electronic device 100 may determine the desktop components belonging to category 1, category 2, and category 3 in the desktop component group A, wherein the desktop components belonging to any one of category 1, category 2, and category 3 in the desktop component group A are related to the desktop The added desktop components in the dock of space A belong to the same scene.
可以理解的,桌面组件分组A中不属于类别1、类别2、类别3中任一类别的桌面组件与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一场景。It can be understood that the desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to any one of category 1, category 2, and category 3 do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added to the dock of the desktop space A.
其中,上述步骤S1332是可选的。电子设备100也可以将桌面组件分组A中属于类别1、类别2中任一类别的桌面组件,确定为与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景的桌面组件。Wherein, the above step S1332 is optional. The electronic device 100 may also determine the desktop components belonging to any one of category 1 and category 2 in the desktop component group A as desktop components belonging to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space A.
由图13D所示的方法可知,电子设备100可以通过判断桌面组件的类别是否相同来确定不同的桌面组件是否属于同一场景。例如,电子设备100可以判断一个桌面组件的类别与一 个dock中已添加的桌面组件的类别是否相同。若相同,电子设备100可以确定出这一个桌面组件与这一个dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景。若不相同,电子设备100可以确定出这一个桌面组件与这一个dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一场景。可选的,若两个桌面组件的类别不相同,电子设备100还可以通过判断这两个桌面组件的类别是否相关来确定这两个桌面组件是否属于同一场景。例如,电子设备100可以判断一个桌面组件的类别与一个dock中已添加的桌面组件的类别是否相关。若相关,电子设备100可以确定出这一个桌面组件与这一个dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景。若一个桌面组件的类别与一个dock中已添加的桌面组件的类别既不相同,也不相关,电子设备100可以确定出这一个桌面组件与这一个dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一场景。It can be seen from the method shown in FIG. 13D that the electronic device 100 can determine whether different desktop components belong to the same scene by judging whether the categories of the desktop components are the same. For example, the electronic device 100 can determine whether the category of a desktop component is the same as that of a desktop component added in a dock. If they are the same, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. If not, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component does not belong to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. Optionally, if the categories of the two desktop components are not the same, the electronic device 100 may also determine whether the two desktop components belong to the same scene by judging whether the categories of the two desktop components are related. For example, the electronic device 100 may determine whether a category of a desktop component is related to a category of a desktop component added in a dock. If relevant, the electronic device 100 may determine that this desktop component belongs to the same scene as the desktop component added in this dock. If the category of a desktop component is neither the same as nor related to the category of a desktop component added in a dock, the electronic device 100 may determine that the desktop component and the added desktop component in a dock do not belong to the same scene.
不限于上述图13D所示的方法,电子设备100还可以通过其它方法来判断一个桌面组件与一个dock中已添加的桌面组件是否属于同一场景。Not limited to the above method shown in FIG. 13D , the electronic device 100 may also use other methods to determine whether a desktop component and a desktop component added in a dock belong to the same scene.
S1340、电子设备100可以提示在桌面空间A的dock中添加桌面组件。S1340. The electronic device 100 may prompt to add a desktop component to the dock of the desktop space A.
若判断出桌面空间A的dock的已添加APP区域不存在桌面组件,电子设备100可以提示用户在该dock中添加桌面组件。可以理解的,若桌面空间A的dock中不存在已添加的桌面组件,则电子设备100无法确定该桌面空间A对应的场景,从而无法帮助用户调整桌面空间A的桌面page上的桌面组件。If it is determined that there is no desktop component in the added APP area of the dock in the desktop space A, the electronic device 100 may prompt the user to add a desktop component in the dock. Understandably, if there is no added desktop component in the dock of desktop space A, the electronic device 100 cannot determine the scene corresponding to the desktop space A, and thus cannot help the user adjust the desktop component on the desktop page of desktop space A.
S1350、电子设备100可以将桌面组件分组A中与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一场景的桌面组件从桌面空间A移除,并将桌面组件分组A中与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景的桌面组件确定为桌面空间A包含的桌面组件。S1350. The electronic device 100 may remove the desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of the desktop space A from the desktop space A, and remove the The added desktop components in the dock belong to the desktop components of the same scene and are determined as the desktop components included in the desktop space A.
其中,当处于图13B所示的桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以将桌面组件分组A中与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式,确定为移除的显示样式。若上述不属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式原来是移除的显示样式,则电子设备100保持桌面组件的显示样式为移除的显示样式。若上述不属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式原来是未移除的显示样式,则电子设备100将桌面组件的显示样式从未移除的显示样式变化为移除的显示样式。电子设备100可以将桌面组件分组A中与桌面空间A的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式,确定为未移除的显示样式。若上述属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式原来是未移除的显示样式,则电子设备100保持桌面组件的显示样式为未移除的显示样式。若上述属于同一场景的桌面组件的显示样式原来是移除的显示样式,则电子设备100可以将桌面组件的显示样式从移除的显示样式变化为未移除的显示样式。Wherein, when in the desktop editing state shown in FIG. 13B , the electronic device 100 may determine the display style of the desktop components in the desktop component group A that do not belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of the desktop space A to be removed. The display style of . If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the same scene is originally the removed display style, the electronic device 100 keeps the display style of the desktop component as the removed display style. If the display styles of the aforementioned desktop components that do not belong to the same scene are originally the non-removed display styles, the electronic device 100 changes the display styles of the desktop components from the non-removed display styles to the removed display styles. The electronic device 100 may determine the display style of the desktop component in the desktop component group A that belongs to the same scene as the added desktop component in the dock of the desktop space A as the display style that has not been removed. If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene is originally the non-removed display style, the electronic device 100 keeps the display style of the desktop component as the non-removed display style. If the display style of the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene is the removed display style, the electronic device 100 may change the display style of the desktop component from the removed display style to the non-removed display style.
当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100在桌面空间A的桌面page上显示的桌面组件可包含上述属于同一场景的桌面组件,且不包含上述不属于同一场景的桌面组件。When exiting the desktop editing state, the desktop components displayed by the electronic device 100 on the desktop page of the desktop space A may include the aforementioned desktop components belonging to the same scene, and not include the aforementioned desktop components not belonging to the same scene.
由上述方法可知,当处于一个桌面空间,电子设备100可以在这一个桌面空间的桌面page上为用户筛选出,与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件。电子设备100可以在这一个桌面空间中保留上述与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件属于同一个场景的桌面组件,并移除与这一个桌面空间的dock中已添加的桌面组件不属于同一个场景的桌面组件。上述方法可以帮助用户高效地构建描述一个场景的桌面空间,用户可以不用手动地对一个一个桌面组件进行移除操作。It can be known from the above method that when in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 can filter out for the user on the desktop page of this desktop space, the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components added in the dock of this desktop space. The electronic device 100 may retain the desktop components that belong to the same scene as the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space in this desktop space, and remove the desktop components that are different from the desktop components that have been added in the dock of this desktop space. Desktop components belonging to the same scene. The above method can help the user efficiently construct a desktop space describing a scene, and the user does not need to manually remove desktop components one by one.
在一些实施例中,响应于将一个桌面组件从一个桌面空间移除的用户操作,电子设备100可以从这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件中,确定出与上述被移除的桌面组件属于相同类别的桌面空间。电子设备100可以将与上述被移除的桌面组件属于相同类别的桌面组件从这一个桌面空间中移除。响应于将一个桌面添加至一个桌面空间的用户操作,电子设备100可以从这一个桌面空间被移除的桌面组件中,确定出与上述被添加的桌面组件属于相同类别的桌面组件。电子设备100可以将与上述被添加的桌面组件属于相同类别的桌面组件添加至这一个桌面空间。In some embodiments, in response to a user operation of removing a desktop component from a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may determine from the desktop components contained in this desktop space that the removed desktop component belongs to the same category. desktop space. The electronic device 100 may remove the desktop component belonging to the same category as the removed desktop component from this one desktop space. In response to a user operation of adding a desktop to a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may determine a desktop component belonging to the same category as the added desktop component from the removed desktop components in the desktop space. The electronic device 100 may add a desktop component belonging to the same category as the above-mentioned added desktop component to this one desktop space.
上述方法可以帮助用户更快速地调整桌面空间内的桌面组件,从而可以高效地构建描述一个场景的桌面空间。The above method can help the user adjust the desktop components in the desktop space more quickly, so that the desktop space describing a scene can be efficiently constructed.
在一些实施例中,在从一个桌面空间中移除一个或多个桌面组件后,电子设备100可以调整这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置。这可以使得桌面布局更加紧凑,减少部分桌面组件被移除后在桌面page上留下空位而显得桌面布局杂乱的情况。In some embodiments, after one or more desktop components are removed from a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may adjust the positions of the desktop components included in the desktop space on the desktop page. This can make the desktop layout more compact, and reduce the situation that some desktop components are removed and leave empty space on the desktop page, which makes the desktop layout messy.
图14A~图14F示例性示出了电子设备100调整桌面组件在桌面page上的位置的场景示意图。14A to 14F exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the position of the desktop component on the desktop page.
如图14A所示,电子设备100可以处于桌面编辑状态,显示用户界面1410。用户界面1410可以参考前述图9D所示的用户界面920。其中,用户界面1410可包含缩略桌面page1411、缩略dock1412和场景设置组件1413。As shown in FIG. 14A , the electronic device 100 may be in a desktop editing state, displaying a user interface 1410 . For the user interface 1410, refer to the aforementioned user interface 920 shown in FIG. 9D. Wherein, the user interface 1410 may include a thumbnail desktop page 1411 , a thumbnail dock 1412 and a scene setting component 1413 .
由前述实施例可知,电子设备100处于缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间。缩略桌面page1411上以移除的显示样式显示的桌面组件(如音乐应用图标、视频应用图标、AA游戏应用图标、BB游戏应用图标和AA音乐应用图标),为缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间中被移除的桌面组件。It can be known from the foregoing embodiments that the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs. The desktop components (such as music application icon, video application icon, AA game application icon, BB game application icon and AA music application icon) displayed in the removed display style on the thumbnail desktop page1411 are in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1412 belongs Removed desktop components.
场景设置组件1413可用于触发电子设备100显示用于设置桌面空间的桌面组件在桌面page上的排列顺序,桌面空间的名称、壁纸、熄屏显示(always on display,AOD)状态等桌面空间属性的设置组件。The scene setting component 1413 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to display the arrangement order of the desktop components used to set the desktop space on the desktop page, the name of the desktop space, wallpaper, and the status of the always on display (AOD) state of the desktop space. Set up components.
示例性的,响应于作用在场景设置组件1413的用户操作,电子设备100可以在用户界面1410上显示图14B所示的场景设置框1420。场景设置框1420可以包含返回组件1421、投屏组件1422、桌面空间名称设置组件1423、桌面组件排序设置组件1424、通知设置组件1425、壁纸设置组件1426、AOD设置组件1427、主题设置组件1428、更多设置组件1429、删除组件1430。其中:Exemplarily, in response to user operations acting on the scene setting component 1413 , the electronic device 100 may display the scene setting frame 1420 shown in FIG. 14B on the user interface 1410 . The scene setting frame 1420 may include a return component 1421, a screen projection component 1422, a desktop space name setting component 1423, a desktop component sorting setting component 1424, a notification setting component 1425, a wallpaper setting component 1426, an AOD setting component 1427, a theme setting component 1428, and more. Multi-setting component 1429, delete component 1430. in:
返回组件1421可用于触发电子设备100返回上一级用户界面,即显示图14A所示的用户界面1410。The return component 1421 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the upper user interface, that is, to display the user interface 1410 shown in FIG. 14A .
投屏组件1422可用于触发电子设备100将当前所处桌面空间包含的桌面组件投屏至其它显示设备。The screen projection component 1422 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to project the desktop components contained in the current desktop space to other display devices.
桌面空间名称设置组件1423可用于设置桌面空间的名称。桌面空间名称设置组件1423中可包含重命名组件1423A。响应于作用在重命名组件1423A的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示用于设置桌面空间的名称的用户界面。这样,用户可以设置对桌面空间的名称。The desktop space name setting component 1423 can be used to set the name of the desktop space. The desktop space name setting component 1423 may include a renaming component 1423A. In response to a user operation acting on the renaming component 1423A, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for setting the name of the desktop space. This way, the user can set the name of the space on the desktop.
桌面组件排序设置组件1424可用于选择桌面组件的排序方式。桌面组件排序设置组件1424中可包含展开组件1424A。响应于作用在展开组件1424A的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示用于选择桌面组件排序方式的用户界面。其中,桌面组件的排序方式可以包括在所有页面重新排列和仅在当前页面重新排列。这样,用户可以设置桌面组件的排序方式。The desktop component sorting setting component 1424 can be used to select the sorting method of the desktop components. The desktop component order setting component 1424 may include an expand component 1424A. In response to a user operation acting on the expansion component 1424A, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting a sorting manner of desktop components. Wherein, the sorting manner of the desktop components may include rearranging on all pages and rearranging only on the current page. This way, the user can set how the desktop components are sorted.
通知设置组件1425可用于选择显示来自哪些桌面组件的通知。通知设置组件1425中可包含展开组件1425A。响应于作用在展开组件1425A的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示用于选择显示来自哪些桌面组件的通知的用户界面。其中,在处于一个桌面空间的情况下,电子设备100可以仅显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件的通知。或者,电子设备100可以显示所有桌面组件的通知。A notification settings component 1425 can be used to select from which desktop components notifications are displayed. The notification settings component 1425 may include an expansion component 1425A. In response to a user operation acting on the expansion component 1425A, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from. Wherein, in the case of being in one desktop space, the electronic device 100 may only display notifications of desktop components contained in this one desktop space. Alternatively, the electronic device 100 may display notifications of all desktop components.
壁纸设置组件1426可用于设置桌面空间的壁纸。The wallpaper setting component 1426 can be used to set the wallpaper of the desktop space.
AOD设置组件1427可用于设置桌面空间的AOD状态。The AOD setting component 1427 can be used to set the AOD state of the desktop space.
主题设置组件1428可用于设置桌面空间的主题。桌面空间的主题可以包括以下一项或多项:桌面组件的显示样式、字体锁屏壁纸、锁屏提示音等等。The theme setting component 1428 can be used to set the theme of the desktop space. The theme of the desktop space may include one or more of the following: display style of desktop components, font lock screen wallpaper, lock screen prompt sound and so on.
更多设置组件1429可用于查看其它用于设置桌面空间的属性的组件。例如,用于设置一个桌面空间的桌面page上最多能放置的桌面组件数量的组件、用于设置一个桌面空间的桌面page的切换效果的组件等等。 More settings component 1429 can be used to view other components for setting the properties of the desktop space. For example, a component used to set the maximum number of desktop components that can be placed on the desktop page of a desktop space, a component used to set the switching effect of the desktop page of a desktop space, and so on.
删除组件1430可用于删除桌面空间。 Delete component 1430 can be used to delete a desktop space.
在一些实施例中,场景设置框1420中可包含图14B所示组件中的一个或多个。In some embodiments, one or more of the components shown in FIG. 14B may be included in the scene setting block 1420 .
下面先对桌面组件排序设置组件1424的使用场景进行介绍。场景设置框1420中其它组件的使用场景将在后续实施例中具体介绍。The usage scenarios of the desktop component sorting setting component 1424 are firstly introduced below. The usage scenarios of other components in the scenario setting block 1420 will be specifically introduced in subsequent embodiments.
响应于图14B所示作用在展开组件1424A的用户操作,电子设备100可以在用户界面1410显示图14C所示的排序方式选项框1440。排序方式选项框1440可以包含返回组件1441、排序方式A选择组件1442和排序方式B选择组件1443。其中:In response to the user operation on the unfolding component 1424A shown in FIG. 14B , the electronic device 100 may display the sorting method option box 1440 shown in FIG. 14C on the user interface 1410 . The sort mode option box 1440 may include a return component 1441 , a sort mode A selection component 1442 and a sort mode B selection component 1443 . in:
返回组件1441可用于触发电子设备100返回上一级用户界面,即显示图14B所示的用户界面1410。The return component 1441 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to return to the upper user interface, that is, to display the user interface 1410 shown in FIG. 14B .
排序方式A选择组件1442可用于选择在所有页面重新排列的排序方式。排序方式A选择组件1442处于选中状态可以表示,电子设备100可以按照在所有页面重新排列的排序方式调整一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置。The sort method A selection component 1442 can be used to select the sort method to rearrange on all pages. The selected state of the sorting mode A selection component 1442 may indicate that the electronic device 100 can adjust the positions of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page according to the sorting mode rearranged on all pages.
排序方式B选择组件1443可用于选择仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式。排序方式B选择组件1442处于选中状态可以表示,电子设备100可以按照仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式调整一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置。The sorting mode B selection component 1443 can be used to select the sorting mode to be rearranged only on the current page. The selected state of the sorting mode B selection component 1442 may indicate that the electronic device 100 can adjust the position of the desktop components included in a desktop space on the desktop page in a sorting mode that only rearranges on the current page.
本申请实施例对用于选择一种排序方式的选择组件处于选中状态的显示样式不作限定。例如,图14C中排序方式B选择组件1443的显示样式为选中状态的显示样式,排序方式A选择组件1442的显示样式为未选中状态的显示样式。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the display style of the selected component for selecting a sorting mode. For example, in FIG. 14C , the display style of the sorting method B selection component 1443 is a selected display style, and the display style of the sorting method A selection component 1442 is an unselected display style.
这里对上述在所有页面重新排列的排序方式和仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式进行介绍。Here is an introduction to the above-mentioned sorting method of rearranging on all pages and the sorting method of rearranging only on the current page.
(1)在所有页面重新排列的排序方式(1) Sort method rearranged on all pages
在一种可能的实现方式中,当一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件经过调整(如移除、添加),电子设备100可以将一个桌面空间包含的所有桌面组件在桌面page上按照从左至右、从上至下的位置顺序挨个放置。桌面组件在桌面page上的位置在按照上述在所有页面重新排列的排序方式调整后,任意两个相邻的桌面组件之间不存在能够放置一个或多个桌面组件的空位。一个空位可以指桌面page上这一个空位所在的位置可以放置一个桌面组件,但并未放置桌面组件。In a possible implementation, when the desktop components contained in a desktop space are adjusted (such as removed, added), the electronic device 100 can display all the desktop components contained in a desktop space in order from left to right on the desktop page. , and place them one by one in order from top to bottom. After the position of the desktop components on the desktop page is adjusted according to the above-mentioned sorting method of rearranging on all pages, there is no space between any two adjacent desktop components where one or more desktop components can be placed. A vacancy may refer to the location of the vacancy on the desktop page where a desktop component can be placed, but no desktop component is placed.
请参考图14D,图14D示例性示出了电子设备100按照在所有页面重新排列的排序方式对桌面组件的位置进行调整的过程。Please refer to FIG. 14D . FIG. 14D exemplarily shows a process in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the positions of the desktop components in a rearranged sorting manner on all pages.
如图14D所示,一个桌面空间(如桌面空间A)包含桌面page1、桌面page2和桌面page3。桌面page1~桌面page3上可放置有桌面空间A的所有桌面组件。As shown in FIG. 14D , a desktop space (such as desktop space A) includes desktop page1 , desktop page2 and desktop page3 . All desktop components of desktop space A can be placed on desktop page1-desktop page3.
响应于用于将桌面组件从桌面空间A移除的用户操作,电子设备100可以从桌面空间A移除桌面page1、桌面page2、桌面page3中的部分桌面组件。在处于桌面编辑状态时,电子设备100可以桌面page1、桌面page2、桌面page3对应的缩略桌面page上以移除的显示样式显示上述被移除的桌面组件。In response to a user operation for removing desktop components from desktop space A, the electronic device 100 may remove some desktop components in desktop page1 , desktop page2 , and desktop page3 from desktop space A. When in the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the above-mentioned removed desktop components in a removed display style on the thumbnail desktop pages corresponding to the desktop page1, desktop page2, and desktop page3.
由图14D可以看出,经过上述移除桌面组件的用户操作,桌面空间A中剩余的桌面组件可以包括:桌面page1上未被移除的6个桌面组件,以及桌面page2上未被移除的5个桌面组件。桌面page3上的所有桌面组件均从桌面空间A中被移除。电子设备100可以对所有桌面page中未被移除的桌面组件(即桌面空间A中剩余的桌面组件)进行重新排列,得到图14D所示的桌面page4。It can be seen from Fig. 14D that after the above-mentioned user operation of removing desktop components, the remaining desktop components in desktop space A may include: 6 desktop components that have not been removed on desktop page1, and 6 desktop components that have not been removed on desktop page2 5 desktop components. All desktop components on desktop page3 are removed from desktop space A. The electronic device 100 may rearrange the unremoved desktop components in all desktop pages (ie, the remaining desktop components in the desktop space A) to obtain the desktop page 4 shown in FIG. 14D .
其中,由于桌面空间A中剩余的桌面组件的数量不超过一个桌面page能放置的桌面组件数量的最大值,电子设备100可以将桌面空间A中剩余的桌面组件在桌面page4上按照从左至右、从上至下的位置顺序挨个放置。若桌面空间A中剩余的桌面组件的数量超过一个桌面page能放置的桌面组件数量的最大值,电子设备100可以在一个桌面page上放置满之后,再将桌面空间A包含的桌面组件中未放置在这一个桌面page上的桌面组件放置在另一个桌面page中。Wherein, since the number of the remaining desktop components in the desktop space A does not exceed the maximum number of desktop components that can be placed on a desktop page, the electronic device 100 can place the remaining desktop components in the desktop space A on the desktop page 4 in order from left to right , and place them one by one in order from top to bottom. If the number of remaining desktop components in desktop space A exceeds the maximum number of desktop components that can be placed on a desktop page, the electronic device 100 can place the unplaced desktop components in desktop space A after a desktop page is full. The desktop components on this desktop page are placed in another desktop page.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备100将所有桌面page中未被移除的桌面组件放置在桌面page4的过程中,电子设备100可以在桌面page4上按照从左至右、从上至下的位置顺序,先放置桌面page1上未被移除的桌面组件,再放置桌面page2上未被移除的桌面组件。桌面page1可以是桌面page2的上一个桌面page。桌面page2可以是桌面page3的上一个桌面page。桌面page1是一个桌面page2的上一个桌面page可以表示,电子设备100在显示桌面page1时响应于向左滑动切换桌面page的用户操作,可以显示桌面page2(即桌面page1位于桌面page2的左侧)。In a possible implementation manner, when the electronic device 100 places the unremoved desktop components in all desktop pages on the desktop page4, the electronic device 100 can follow the steps from left to right and from top to bottom on the desktop page4. In the following position order, the unremoved desktop components on desktop page1 are placed first, and then the unremoved desktop components on desktop page2 are placed. The desktop page1 may be the previous desktop page of the desktop page2. The desktop page2 may be the previous desktop page of the desktop page3. Desktop page1 is a previous desktop page of desktop page2, which can indicate that when displaying desktop page1, electronic device 100 can display desktop page2 in response to the user operation of sliding to the left to switch desktop pages (that is, desktop page1 is located on the left side of desktop page2).
可选的,在上述在桌面page4放置桌面page1上未被移除的桌面组件的过程中,电子设备100可以按照桌面组件在桌面page1上显示的先后顺序在桌面page4放置这些桌面组件。其中,桌面组件在桌面page1上显示的先后顺序可以表示,在桌面page1中上方的桌面组件显示的顺序先于在桌面page1中下方的桌面组件显示的顺序,在桌面page1中左侧的桌面组件显示的顺序先于在桌面page1中右侧的桌面组件显示的顺序。电子设备100放置桌面page2上未被移除的桌面组件的过程可以参考上述放置桌面page1上未被移除的桌面组件的过程。Optionally, during the process of placing the unremoved desktop components on the desktop page1 on the desktop page4, the electronic device 100 may place these desktop components on the desktop page4 according to the sequence in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page1. Wherein, the order in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page 1 can be expressed that the display order of the upper desktop components in the desktop page 1 is prior to the display order of the lower desktop components in the desktop page 1, and the display order of the left desktop components in the desktop page 1 is The order of is prior to the order displayed by the desktop components on the right side of the desktop page1. The process of placing the unremoved desktop components on the desktop page2 by the electronic device 100 may refer to the above-mentioned process of placing the unremoved desktop components on the desktop page1.
可以理解的,若电子设备100不对桌面空间的桌面组件重新排列,被移除的桌面组件将会在桌面page上留下空位。这些空位浪费桌面空间的位置,且不美观。电子设备100可以按照上述在所有页面重新排列的排序方式对桌面空间包含的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置进行调整,使得桌面布局更加紧凑。It can be understood that, if the electronic device 100 does not rearrange the desktop components in the desktop space, the removed desktop components will leave vacancies on the desktop page. These slots waste desktop space and are not aesthetically pleasing. The electronic device 100 may adjust the positions of the desktop components contained in the desktop space on the desktop page according to the above-mentioned rearrangement manner on all pages, so as to make the desktop layout more compact.
由图14D可知,桌面空间A中包含的桌面组件均可以显示在一个桌面page(即桌面page4)上。这可以方便用户查看一个桌面空间的桌面组件,避免一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件零散地分布在不同的桌面page中,用户需要来回切换桌面page来查找桌面组件的情况。并且,在移除一个桌面空间的桌面组件后,电子设备100可以自动为用户调整桌面组件在桌面page上的位置。这样,用户无需手动排序,将零散分布在多个桌面page上的桌面组件一个一个移动至一个桌面page。It can be seen from FIG. 14D that all the desktop components included in the desktop space A can be displayed on a desktop page (ie, desktop page4). This can facilitate the user to view the desktop components of a desktop space, and avoid the situation that the desktop components contained in a desktop space are scattered in different desktop pages, and the user needs to switch desktop pages back and forth to find the desktop components. Moreover, after removing a desktop component in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may automatically adjust the position of the desktop component on the desktop page for the user. In this way, the user does not need to manually sort and move the desktop components scattered on multiple desktop pages to one desktop page one by one.
(2)仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式(2) The sorting method is only rearranged on the current page
在一种可能的实现方式中,当一个桌面空间中包含的桌面组件经过调整(如移除、添加),电子设备100可以在将一个桌面空间包含的每个桌面page中未被移除的桌面组件,在对应桌面page上按照从左至右、从上之下的位置顺序挨个放置。桌面组件在桌面page上的位置在按照上述仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式调整后,任意两个相邻的桌面组件之间不存在能够放置一个或多个桌面组件的空位。并且,一个桌面page中可以仅放置这一个桌面page中未被移除的桌面组件。In a possible implementation manner, when the desktop components contained in a desktop space are adjusted (such as removed, added), the electronic device 100 can display the unremoved desktops in each desktop page contained in a desktop space Components are placed one by one on the corresponding desktop page in order of position from left to right and from top to bottom. After the position of the desktop components on the desktop page is adjusted according to the above-mentioned sorting method of rearranging only on the current page, there is no space between any two adjacent desktop components where one or more desktop components can be placed. Moreover, only the desktop components that have not been removed from the desktop page can be placed in a desktop page.
请参考图14E,图14E示例性示出了电子设备100按照仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式对桌面组件的位置进行调整的过程。Please refer to FIG. 14E . FIG. 14E exemplarily shows a process in which the electronic device 100 adjusts the positions of desktop components in a sorting manner that only rearranges on the current page.
如图14E所示,桌面空间A包含桌面page1~桌面page3。电子设备100在桌面空间A中移除桌面page1、桌面page2、桌面page3中的部分桌面组件的过程可以参考前述图14D所示实施例的介绍。经过上述移除桌面组件的用户操作,桌面page1上存在6个未被移除的桌面组件,桌面page2上存在5个未被移除的桌面组件,桌面page3中的桌面组件均被移除。As shown in FIG. 14E , desktop space A includes desktop page1-desktop page3. For the process that the electronic device 100 removes some desktop components in the desktop page1, desktop page2, and desktop page3 in the desktop space A, reference may be made to the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 14D above. After the above user operation of removing desktop components, there are 6 unremoved desktop components on desktop page1, 5 unremoved desktop components on desktop page2, and all desktop components in desktop page3 are removed.
电子设备100可以将桌面page1中未被移除的桌面组件在桌面page1上按照从左至右、从上之下的位置挨个放置。其中,电子设备100可以按照桌面组件在桌面page1上显示的先后顺序,在桌面page1放置桌面page1中未被移除的桌面组件,使得任意两个相邻的桌面组件之间不存在能够放置一个或多个桌面组件的空位。电子设备100在桌面page2调整桌面page2中未移除的桌面组件的方法,可以参考上述在桌面page1调整桌面page1中未移除的桌面组件的方法。The electronic device 100 may place the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 one by one from left to right and from top to bottom on the desktop page1. Wherein, the electronic device 100 can place the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 on the desktop page1 according to the order in which the desktop components are displayed on the desktop page1, so that there is no place between any two adjacent desktop components. Empty slots for several desktop components. For the method for the electronic device 100 to adjust the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page2 on the desktop page2, reference may be made to the above-mentioned method for adjusting the unremoved desktop components in the desktop page1 on the desktop page1.
桌面page3中的桌面组件均被移除,可以相当于桌面page3在桌面空间A中被移除。电子设备100在处于桌面空间A时显示的桌面page可包含桌面page1和桌面page2,而不包含桌面page3。The desktop components in the desktop page3 are all removed, which may be equivalent to the removal of the desktop page3 in the desktop space A. When the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space A, the desktop pages displayed may include desktop page1 and desktop page2, but not desktop page3.
由图14E可知,电子设备100可以对一个桌面空间包含的各个桌面page上的桌面组件分别进行调整,使得一个桌面page中未移除的桌面组件在这一个桌面page中的布局更加紧凑。并且,在移除一个桌面空间的桌面组件后,电子设备100可以自动为用户调整桌面组件在各个桌面page上的位置。这样,用户无需手动排序,将一个桌面page上零散放置的桌面组件排布紧凑与整齐。It can be seen from FIG. 14E that the electronic device 100 can adjust the desktop components on each desktop page included in a desktop space, so that the layout of the unremoved desktop components in a desktop page is more compact in this desktop page. Moreover, after removing a desktop component in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may automatically adjust the positions of the desktop component on each desktop page for the user. In this way, the user does not need to sort manually, and arranges the scattered desktop components on a desktop page compactly and neatly.
如图14C所示,响应于作用在排序方式B选择组件1443的用户操作,电子设备100可以将排序方式B选择组件1443的状态确定为选中状态。进一步的,响应于作用在返回组件1441的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图14B所述的用户操作。其中,桌面组件排序设置组件1424中可包含电子设备100当前所使用的对桌面组件的排序方式。As shown in FIG. 14C , in response to a user operation acting on the sorting mode B selection component 1443 , the electronic device 100 may determine the status of the sorting mode B selection component 1443 as a selected state. Further, in response to the user operation acting on the return component 1441, the electronic device 100 may display the user operation described in FIG. 14B. Wherein, the desktop component sorting setting component 1424 may include the sorting manner of the desktop components currently used by the electronic device 100 .
可以理解的,在经过图14C所示选择仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式的用户操作后,电子设备100可以将图14B所述桌面组件排序设置组件1424中显示的排序方式,从在所有页面重新排列的排序方式变化为仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式。It can be understood that, after the user operation of selecting the sorting mode to be rearranged only on the current page as shown in FIG. The rearranged sort method changes to the rearranged sort method only on the current page.
进一步的,当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示图14F所示的桌面1450。桌面1450可包含桌面page1451和dock1452。电子设备100当前处于dock1452所属的桌面空间。Further, when exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1450 shown in FIG. 14F . The desktop 1450 may include a desktop page1451 and a dock1452. The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1452 belongs.
其中,电子设备100可以按照前述仅在当前页面重新排列的排序方式来调整图14A所示缩略桌面page1411中未移除的桌面组件的位置,得到图14F所示的桌面page1451。Wherein, the electronic device 100 can adjust the position of the unremoved desktop components in the thumbnail desktop page 1411 shown in FIG. 14A according to the aforementioned sorting method of rearranging only on the current page, to obtain the desktop page 1451 shown in FIG. 14F .
前述图9E所示桌面page914上的桌面组件的位置未经过电子设备100的调整。对比图9E所示的桌面page914和图14F所示的桌面page1451可知,桌面page914中原来显示被移除 的桌面组件的位置为空位。桌面page914中未被移除的桌面组件分布的位置比较零散,影响桌面的美观。桌面page1451中未被移除的桌面组件的位置经过电子设备100的调整,分布的位置比较紧凑。The positions of the desktop components on the desktop page 914 shown in FIG. 9E are not adjusted by the electronic device 100 . Comparing the desktop page 914 shown in FIG. 9E with the desktop page 1451 shown in FIG. 14F , it can be seen that the position where the removed desktop component was originally displayed in the desktop page 914 is a vacancy. The unremoved desktop components in the desktop page914 are distributed in scattered positions, which affects the beauty of the desktop. The positions of the desktop components that have not been removed in the desktop page 1451 are adjusted by the electronic device 100, and the distribution positions are relatively compact.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100按照预设的排列顺序对桌面page上放置的桌面组件的位置进行调整后,电子设备100再次进入桌面编辑状态时仍可显示全量桌面空间的缩略桌面page。该缩略桌面page上桌面组件的显示样式可以由电子设备100当前所处桌面空间包含的桌面组件确定。即一个桌面空间的桌面组件在桌面page上的位置被改变,可以不影响桌面编辑状态下缩略桌面page上桌面组件的位置。可选的,桌面编辑状态下缩略桌面page上桌面组件的位置,也可以随退出桌面编辑状态后桌面组件在桌面page上位置的改变而改变。In some embodiments, after the electronic device 100 adjusts the positions of the desktop components placed on the desktop page according to a preset arrangement order, the electronic device 100 can still display a thumbnail desktop page with full desktop space when entering the desktop editing state again. The display style of the desktop components on the thumbnail desktop page may be determined by the desktop components contained in the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is currently located. That is, the position of the desktop component of a desktop space on the desktop page is changed without affecting the position of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page in the desktop editing state. Optionally, the position of the desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page in the desktop editing state may also be changed as the position of the desktop component on the desktop page changes after exiting the desktop editing state.
在一些实施例中,一个桌面空间中可以包含放置常驻桌面组件的dock和放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock。上述放置常驻桌面组件的dock中的桌面组件,以及上述放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock中的桌面组件均为上述一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件。In some embodiments, a desktop space may include a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for placing recently used desktop components. The desktop components in the dock where the resident desktop components are placed and the desktop components in the dock where the most recently used desktop components are placed are desktop components included in the aforementioned one desktop space.
具体的,在创建一个桌面空间的过程中,电子设备100可以先显示一个空白的放置常驻桌面组件的dock。用户可以在这一个空白的放置常驻桌面组件的dock添加桌面组件。当一个桌面空间创建完成,电子设备100可以在处于这一个桌面空间时,在桌面上显示这一个桌面空间的放置常驻桌面组件的dock和放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock。Specifically, during the process of creating a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may first display a blank dock for placing resident desktop components. Users can add desktop components to this blank dock where resident desktop components are placed. When a desktop space is created, the electronic device 100 may display on the desktop a dock for placing resident desktop components and a dock for recently used desktop components in this desktop space when it is in the desktop space.
其中,电子设备100可以确定出这一个桌面空间中哪些桌面组件是最近使用的,并将这一个桌面空间中最近使用的桌面组件放置在这一个桌面空间中放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock内。当切换桌面空间,电子设备100可以将放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock中的桌面组件变化为,切换之后的桌面空间中最近使用的桌面组件。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may determine which desktop components are recently used in this desktop space, and place the recently used desktop components in this desktop space in the dock where the recently used desktop components are placed in this desktop space. When the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may change the desktop component in the dock where the most recently used desktop component is placed to the most recently used desktop component in the desktop space after switching.
由上述方法可知,用户可以通过一个桌面空间中放置最近使用的桌面组件的dock,快速找到并开启自己在这一个桌面空间内最近使用的桌面组件。这可以帮助用户聚焦于一个场景,减少其它场景的桌面组件对用户的干扰。It can be known from the above method that the user can quickly find and open the recently used desktop component in the desktop space through the dock where the recently used desktop component is placed in the desktop space. This can help users focus on one scene and reduce the interference of desktop components in other scenes to users.
在一些实施例中,一个桌面空间还可以包含负一屏。一个桌面空间的负一屏上可包含这一个桌面空间包含桌面组件的相关内容。上述桌面组件的相关内容可以包含桌面组件中的一项或多项功能的入口(如钱包APP中的公交卡片)、桌面组件的运行状态、桌面组件的消息通知等等。也即是说,电子设备100中的负一屏可以随桌面空间的切换而切换。当切换桌面空间,电子设备100可以显示切换之后桌面空间的负一屏。In some embodiments, a desktop space may also include a negative screen. The negative screen of a desktop space may contain relevant content of the desktop component in this desktop space. The relevant content of the above-mentioned desktop component may include the entry of one or more functions in the desktop component (such as the bus card in the wallet APP), the running status of the desktop component, the message notification of the desktop component, and so on. That is to say, the negative one screen in the electronic device 100 can be switched along with the switching of the desktop space. When the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may display a negative screen of the desktop space after switching.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以将一个单独的桌面空间投屏至其它显示设备。上述显示设备可以为具有显示屏的电子设备。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 can project a single desktop space to other display devices. The above display device may be an electronic device with a display screen.
图15A~图15D示例性示出了电子设备100将一个桌面空间投屏至显示设备200的场景示意图。15A to 15D exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenarios where the electronic device 100 projects a desktop space to the display device 200 .
如图15A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面1410。用户界面1410可以参考前述图14B的介绍。用户界面1410中可包含场景设置框1420和缩略dock1412。场景设置框1420可包含投屏组件1422。As shown in FIG. 15A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1410 . For the user interface 1410, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 14B. A scene setting box 1420 and a thumbnail dock 1412 may be included in the user interface 1410 . The scene setting box 1420 can include a screen casting component 1422 .
响应于作用在投屏组件1422的用户操作,电子设备100可以搜索可用于投屏的显示设备,并在用户界面1410显示图15B所示的设备选项框1510。设备选项框1510中可包含设备选项显示区域1511、搜索组件1512和取消组件1513。其中:In response to user operations acting on the screen casting component 1422 , the electronic device 100 may search for display devices available for screen casting, and display a device option box 1510 shown in FIG. 15B on the user interface 1410 . The device option box 1510 may include a device option display area 1511 , a search component 1512 and a cancel component 1513 . in:
设备选项显示区域1511可包含一个或多个显示设备对应的设备选项。例如,显示设备200选项、显示设备201选项、显示设备202选项。这一个或多个显示设备可以是电子设备100搜索到的。响应于作用在任意一个显示设备的对应的设备选项的用户操作,电子设备100可以将桌面空间投屏至这一个显示设备。The device option display area 1511 may contain device options corresponding to one or more display devices. For example, display device 200 option, display device 201 option, display device 202 option. The one or more display devices may be searched by the electronic device 100 . In response to a user operation on a corresponding device option of any display device, the electronic device 100 may project the desktop space to the display device.
搜索组件1512可用于触发电子设备100搜索可用于投屏的显示设备。The search component 1512 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to search for display devices that can be used for screen projection.
取消组件1512可用于取消投屏。The cancel component 1512 can be used to cancel screen projection.
如图15B所示,响应于作用在显示设备200选项的用户操作,电子设备100可以将当前所处的桌面空间(即缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间)投屏至显示设备200。本申请实施例对电子设备100投屏的实现方式不作限定。例如,投屏的实现方式可以包括:miracast投屏、数字生活网络联盟(digital living network alliance,DLAN)投屏、AirPlay投屏等等。As shown in FIG. 15B , in response to user operations acting on the options of the display device 200 , the electronic device 100 may project the current desktop space (ie, the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs) to the display device 200 . The embodiment of the present application does not limit the implementation manner of screen projection by the electronic device 100 . For example, the implementation manner of screen projection may include: screen projection by miracast, screen projection by digital living network alliance (DLAN) projection, screen projection by AirPlay, and the like.
如图15C所示,电子设备100可以显示桌面1520。桌面1520可包含dock1521。电子设备100当前处于dock1521所属的桌面空间。dock1521所属的桌面空间即为前述缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间。电子设备100将dock1521所属的桌面空间投屏至显示设备200。显示设备200可以显示桌面1530。可以看出,桌面1530上仅显示有dock1521所属的桌面空间包含的dock和桌面page。桌面1520中dock1521旁边被简化显示的dock未被投屏在显示设备200上。当电子设备100开启dock1521所属桌面空间包含的一个桌面组件,并显示这一个桌面组件的用户界面,显示设备200屏幕上显示的内容可以随之更新,也显示这一个桌面组件的用户界面。As shown in FIG. 15C , the electronic device 100 may display a desktop 1520 . Desktop 1520 may include dock 1521 . The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs. The desktop space to which dock1521 belongs is the desktop space to which the aforementioned abbreviated dock1412 belongs. The electronic device 100 projects the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs to the display device 200 . The display device 200 may display a desktop 1530 . It can be seen that only the dock and the desktop page contained in the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs are displayed on desktop 1530 . The simplified displayed dock next to the dock 1521 on the desktop 1520 is not projected on the display device 200 . When the electronic device 100 opens a desktop component included in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs, and displays the user interface of the desktop component, the content displayed on the screen of the display device 200 may be updated accordingly, and the user interface of the desktop component is also displayed.
当电子设备100将当前所处的桌面空间从被投屏的桌面空间切换至未被投屏的桌面空间,电子设备100可以显示切换之后未被投屏的桌面空间包含的dock和桌面page。显示设备200可仍显示被投屏的桌面空间。上述未被投屏的桌面空间包含的dock和桌面page不会显示在显示设备200上。When the electronic device 100 switches the current desktop space from the projected desktop space to the non-projected desktop space, the electronic device 100 may display the dock and the desktop page included in the non-projected desktop space after switching. The display device 200 may still display the projected desktop space. The dock and the desktop page included in the above-mentioned unprojected desktop space will not be displayed on the display device 200 .
示例性的,响应于图15C所示作用在电子设备100上用于切换桌面空间的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图15D所示的桌面1520。在图15D中,电子设备100完整显示dock1522包含的桌面组件,并将图15C所示的dock1521简化显示。电子设备100从dock1521所属的桌面空间切换为dock1522所属的桌面空间。Exemplarily, in response to the user operation for switching desktop spaces on the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 15C , the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1520 shown in FIG. 15D . In FIG. 15D , the electronic device 100 fully displays the desktop components contained in the dock1522 and simplifies the display of the dock1521 shown in FIG. 15C . The electronic device 100 switches from the desktop space to which dock1521 belongs to the desktop space to which dock1522 belongs.
dock1521所属的桌面空间为用户选择投屏的桌面空间。dock1521所属的桌面空间为未被投屏的桌面空间。在电子设备100切换在dock1521所属的桌面空间后,显示设备200可以仍然显示桌面1530。即显示设备200可以显示dock1521所属的桌面空间包含的dock和桌面page。The desktop space that dock1521 belongs to is the desktop space that the user chooses to cast the screen. The desktop space to which dock1521 belongs is the desktop space that has not been projected. After the electronic device 100 switches the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs, the display device 200 may still display the desktop 1530 . That is, the display device 200 can display the dock and the desktop page included in the desktop space to which the dock 1521 belongs.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100中安装有投屏APP。该投屏APP可以提供选择一个或多个桌面空间进行投屏的功能。也即是说,在电子设备100包含多个桌面空间的情况下,用户可以选择将一个或多个桌面空间投屏至其它显示设备。In some embodiments, a screen-casting APP is installed in the electronic device 100 . The screen-casting APP can provide the function of selecting one or more desktop spaces for screen-casting. That is to say, when the electronic device 100 includes multiple desktop spaces, the user can choose to project one or more desktop spaces to other display devices.
由上述图15A~图15D所示的实施例可知,用户可以在电子设备100中创建多个桌面空间。每一个桌面空间可以包含不同场景下的桌面组件。用户可以在投屏时选择需要投屏的桌面空间。电子设备100中未被选中进行投屏的桌面空间则不会被投屏至其它显示设备。这可以满足投屏过程中用户并不想将电子设备100中比较私密的内容投屏在其它显示设备上的需求。在投屏过程中,用户可以在电子设备100中被投屏的桌面空间和未被投屏的桌面空间之间随意切换,且不用担心在未被投屏的桌面空间上不便于投屏的内容显示在其它显示设备上。It can be known from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 15A to 15D that the user can create multiple desktop spaces in the electronic device 100 . Each desktop space can contain desktop components in different scenarios. The user can select the desktop space to be cast when casting the screen. The desktop space in the electronic device 100 that is not selected for screen projection will not be projected to other display devices. This can meet the requirement that the user does not want to cast relatively private content in the electronic device 100 on other display devices during the screen casting process. During the screen projection process, the user can freely switch between the projected desktop space and the non-projected desktop space in the electronic device 100, and does not need to worry about content that is inconvenient to project on the non-projected desktop space displayed on other display devices.
不限于上述投屏的场景,在桌面共享的场景中,电子设备100也可以将多个桌面空间中的一个或多个桌面空间共享给其它电子设备。电子设备100共享一个桌面空间给其它电子设备的过程可以参考上述将一个桌面空间投屏给其它显示设备的过程。这里不再赘述。It is not limited to the scenario of screen projection described above. In the scenario of desktop sharing, the electronic device 100 may also share one or more desktop spaces among the multiple desktop spaces with other electronic devices. For the process of the electronic device 100 sharing a desktop space with other electronic devices, reference may be made to the above-mentioned process of projecting a desktop space to other display devices. I won't go into details here.
在一些实施例中,用户可以通过前述图14B所示的通知设置组件1425,来选择电子设备100处于一个桌面空间时是仅显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知,还是显示电子设备100中所有桌面组件的消息通知。In some embodiments, the user can use the notification setting component 1425 shown in FIG. 14B to select whether the electronic device 100 is in a desktop space, whether to display only the message notifications of the desktop components contained in this desktop space, or to display the message notification of the desktop components contained in the electronic device 100. Message notifications for all desktop components in .
示例性的,响应于作用在通知设置组件1425中展开组件1425A的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示用于选择显示来自哪些桌面组件的通知的用户界面。该用于选择显示来自哪些桌面组件的通知的用户界面可以参考图14C所示用于选择桌面组件排序方式的用户界面。其中,用于选择选择显示来自哪些桌面组件的通知的用户界面可以包含选项:仅显示当前所处桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知,以及显示所有桌面组件的消息通知。Exemplarily, in response to a user operation acting on the expansion component 1425A in the notification setting component 1425, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from. For the user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from, reference may be made to the user interface for selecting a sorting manner of desktop components shown in FIG. 14C . Wherein, the user interface for selecting which desktop components to display notifications from may include options: only display message notifications of desktop components included in the current desktop space, and display message notifications of all desktop components.
若一个桌面空间的通知设置组件1425中,仅显示当前所处桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知对应的选项处于选中状态,电子设备100在处于这一个桌面空间时,可以仅显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知。If in the notification setting component 1425 of a desktop space, only the option corresponding to the message notification of the desktop components contained in the current desktop space is selected, the electronic device 100 can only display this desktop space when it is in this desktop space Message notifications for included desktop components.
具体的,在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以接收电子设备100中所有桌面组件的消息通知。若桌面空间A的消息通知显示范围为仅显示桌面空间A包含的桌面组件的消息通知,那么电子设备100可以筛选出桌面空间A包含的桌面组件的消息通知,并即时呈现。电子设备100可以暂时存储已接收到但还未显示的消息通知,例如桌面空间A以外其它桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知。上述已接收到但还未显示的消息通知可以存储在待显示消息存储模块。当待显示消息存储模块中的一个消息通知被显示后,电子设备100可以将这一个已被显示的消息通知从待显示消息存储模块中移除。Specifically, in a possible implementation manner, the electronic device 100 may receive message notifications of all desktop components in the electronic device 100 . If the message notification display range of the desktop space A is to only display the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space A, then the electronic device 100 may filter out the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space A and present them immediately. The electronic device 100 may temporarily store received but not yet displayed message notifications, for example, message notifications of desktop components included in desktop spaces other than desktop space A. The message notifications that have been received but not yet displayed may be stored in the message storage module to be displayed. After a message notification in the message storage module to be displayed is displayed, the electronic device 100 may remove the displayed message notification from the message storage module to be displayed.
当从桌面空间A切换到另一个桌面空间,例如桌面空间B,电子设备100可以判断桌面空间B的消息通知显示范围。若桌面空间B的消息通知显示范围为仅显示桌面空间B包含的桌面组件的消息通知,那么,电子设备100可以从上述带显示消息存储模块中筛选出桌面空间B包含的桌面组件的消息通知,并在切换到桌面空间B后进行显示。在处于桌面空间B时,电子设备100可以从接收到的所有消息通知中筛选出桌面空间B包含的桌面组件的消息通知,并即时呈现。电子设备100可以将在处于桌面空间B时接收到的所有消息通知中,不属于桌面空间B包含的桌面组件的消息通知存储至上述待显示消息存储模块。When switching from desktop space A to another desktop space, such as desktop space B, the electronic device 100 may determine the display range of the message notification of desktop space B. If the message notification display range of the desktop space B is to only display the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space B, then the electronic device 100 can filter out the message notifications of the desktop components contained in the desktop space B from the above-mentioned display message storage module, And display after switching to desktop space B. When in the desktop space B, the electronic device 100 may filter out the message notifications of the desktop components included in the desktop space B from all received message notifications, and present them immediately. The electronic device 100 may store the message notifications that do not belong to the desktop components contained in the desktop space B among all the message notifications received when it is in the desktop space B to the above-mentioned message storage module to be displayed.
若桌面空间B的消息通知显示范围为显示所有桌面组件的消息通知,电子设备100可以在切换到桌面空间B后显示待显示消息存储模块中的所有消息通知。在处于桌面空间B时,电子设备100可以将接收到的桌面组件的消息通知即时呈现,而不用存储在待显示消息存储模块。If the message notification display range of desktop space B is to display message notifications of all desktop components, electronic device 100 may display all message notifications in the message storage module to be displayed after switching to desktop space B. When in the desktop space B, the electronic device 100 may immediately present the received message notification of the desktop component without storing it in the to-be-displayed message storage module.
在一些实施例中,存储在上述待显示消息存储模块中的消息通知可以具有存储时限。电子设备100可以将超过存储时限还未被显示的消息通知从待显示消息存储模块中移除。其中,不同类型的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中的存储时限可以是不同的。In some embodiments, the message notifications stored in the message storage module to be displayed may have a storage time limit. The electronic device 100 may remove message notifications that have not been displayed beyond the storage time limit from the message storage module to be displayed. Wherein, different types of message notifications may have different storage time limits in the message storage module to be displayed.
消息通知的类型可以包括社交通讯类、服务提醒类、资讯营销类。上述社交通讯类的消息通知可以包括用户间点对点聊天消息、语音通话邀请、视频通话邀请、来电提醒等。上述服务提醒类的消息通知可以包括用户自主订阅的专题内容(如直播开播提醒、书籍更新)、出行通知(如航班变动提醒、酒店入住提醒)、健康数据通知(如步数、消耗卡路里)、工作事项通知(如会议提醒、待办事项提醒)、订单信息及物流状态通知、财务变化通知(如资金到 账、交易提醒)、系统通知(如电量不足提醒)等。上述资讯营销类的消息通知可以包括新闻、财经动态、产品促销、非用户自主订阅的内容推荐等。Types of message notifications may include social communication, service reminders, and information marketing. The aforementioned social communication message notifications may include point-to-point chat messages between users, voice call invitations, video call invitations, incoming call reminders, and the like. The message notifications of the above-mentioned service reminders can include thematic content subscribed by the user (such as live broadcast start reminders, book updates), travel notifications (such as flight change reminders, hotel check-in reminders), health data notifications (such as steps, calories burned), Work item notifications (such as meeting reminders, to-do reminders), order information and logistics status notifications, financial change notifications (such as funds arriving, transaction reminders), system notifications (such as low battery reminders), etc. The above-mentioned information marketing notifications may include news, financial trends, product promotions, content recommendations not subscribed by users themselves, and the like.
其中,上述社交通讯类的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中的存储时限可以是无限长。即电子设备100不会将待显示消息存储模块中属于社交通讯类的消息通知在未被显示之前移除。这样可以避免用户遗漏亲朋好友等人给用户发送的消息。Wherein, the storage time limit of the above-mentioned social communication message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may be infinitely long. That is, the electronic device 100 will not remove the message notification belonging to the social communication category in the message storage module to be displayed before it is displayed. This can prevent the user from missing messages sent to the user by relatives, friends, and the like.
上述服务提醒类的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中的存储时限也可以是无限长。这样可以避免用户遗漏重要的服务提醒。可选的,上述服务提醒类的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中的存储时限也可以是预设时长的时间。上述预设时长的时间可以是由用户设定的。The storage time limit of the above-mentioned message notifications of the service reminder type in the message storage module to be displayed may also be infinite. This prevents users from missing important service reminders. Optionally, the storage time limit for the above-mentioned service reminder type message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may also be a preset time period. The aforementioned preset duration may be set by the user.
上述资讯营销类的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中的存储时限可以是预设时长的时间。可以理解的,资讯营销类的消息通知往往具有时效性。超过一定时间才被用户看到的资讯营销类的消息对用户可能没有用处。如果大量过期的资讯营销类的消息(例如一个星期之前的新闻、产品促销等)在用户切换桌面空间后呈现在界面上,可能会给用户造成困扰。如果资讯营销类的消息通知在待显示消息存储模块中超过上述预设时长的时间,电子设备100可以该资讯营销类的消息通知删除。这可以减少过期的资讯营销类的消息对用户的干扰。The storage time limit for the above-mentioned information marketing message notification in the message storage module to be displayed may be a preset time period. It is understandable that information marketing notifications are often time-sensitive. Information marketing messages that are seen by users after a certain period of time may not be useful to users. If a large number of outdated information marketing messages (such as news from a week ago, product promotions, etc.) are presented on the interface after the user switches the desktop space, it may cause trouble to the user. If the message notification of the information marketing category exceeds the preset time period in the message storage module to be displayed, the electronic device 100 can delete the message notification of the information marketing category. This can reduce the interference of expired information marketing messages to users.
由上述实施例可知,电子设备100在处于一个桌面空间时,可以仅显示这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件的消息通知。这可以帮助用户更好地聚焦于一个场景,减少其它场景对应的桌面空间包含的桌面组件打扰用户聚焦于这一个场景。It can be known from the above embodiments that when the electronic device 100 is in a desktop space, it may only display the message notifications of the desktop components included in the desktop space. This can help the user to better focus on one scene, and reduce the desktop components contained in the desktop space corresponding to other scenes from disturbing the user's focus on this one scene.
在一些实施例中,一个桌面空间的以下一项或多项属性都是可以修改的:名称、壁纸、AOD状态、主题、桌面page切换效果等。其中,不同桌面空间的属性是相互独立的。用户可以单独为每一个桌面空间的属性进行设置。In some embodiments, one or more of the following attributes of a desktop space can be modified: name, wallpaper, AOD status, theme, desktop page switching effect, and the like. Among them, the attributes of different desktop spaces are independent of each other. Users can set the properties of each desktop space individually.
下面具体以修改桌面空间的壁纸为例介绍电子设备100修改桌面空间的属性的过程。The process of modifying the attributes of the desktop space by the electronic device 100 will be described below by taking the modification of the wallpaper of the desktop space as an example.
图16A~图16G示例性示出了电子设备100修改桌面空间的壁纸的场景示意图。16A to 16G exemplarily show schematic diagrams of scenes in which the electronic device 100 modifies the wallpaper of the desktop space.
如图16A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面1410。用户界面1410可以参考前述图14B的介绍。用户界面1410可包含场景设置框1420和缩略dock1412。场景设置框1420中可包含壁纸设置组件1426、AOD设置组件1427、主题设置组件1428。As shown in FIG. 16A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1410 . For the user interface 1410, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned FIG. 14B. User interface 1410 may include a scene settings box 1420 and a thumbnail dock 1412 . The scene setting frame 1420 may include a wallpaper setting component 1426 , an AOD setting component 1427 , and a theme setting component 1428 .
电子设备100当前处于缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间。场景设置框1420中用于设置属性的组件均可用于设置缩略dock1412所属桌面空间的属性。The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs. The components for setting properties in the scene setting box 1420 can be used to set the properties of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
壁纸组件1426中可显示有缩略dock1412所属桌面空间使用的壁纸。如图16A所示,壁纸组件1426中包含无图案的纯色(如白色)图片。这可以表示缩略dock1412所属桌面空间的壁纸为无图案的纯色图片。响应于作用在壁纸组件1426的用户操作,电子设备100可以在用户界面1410显示图16B所示的壁纸设置框1610。壁纸设置框1610中可包含一个或多个壁纸选项。壁纸设置框1610中还可以包含确定组件1614和取消组件1615。其中:The wallpaper component 1426 can display the wallpaper used by the desktop space to which the dock 1412 belongs. As shown in FIG. 16A, the wallpaper component 1426 contains a solid color (eg, white) picture without a pattern. This may indicate that the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock1412 belongs is a solid color picture without a pattern. In response to a user operation acting on the wallpaper component 1426 , the electronic device 100 may display a wallpaper setting frame 1610 shown in FIG. 16B on the user interface 1410 . One or more wallpaper options may be included in the wallpaper setting box 1610 . The wallpaper setting frame 1610 may also include a determining component 1614 and a canceling component 1615 . in:
一个或多个壁纸选项可以包括壁纸选项1611、壁纸选项1612、壁纸选项1613。壁纸选项1611对应的壁纸为无图案的纯色图片。壁纸选项1612对应的壁纸为具有猫咪图案的图片。壁纸选项1613对应的壁纸为具有小狗图案的图片。The one or more wallpaper options may include wallpaper options 1611 , wallpaper options 1612 , wallpaper options 1613 . The wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1611 is a solid color picture without a pattern. The wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1612 is a picture with a cat pattern. The wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1613 is a picture with a puppy pattern.
响应于作用在一个或多个壁纸选项中任意一个壁纸选项的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以将这一个壁纸选项的显示状态确定为选中状态。In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on any one of the one or more wallpaper options, the electronic device 100 may determine the display state of the one wallpaper option as a selected state.
确定组件1612可用于触发电子设备100将处于选中状态的壁纸选项对应的壁纸设置为缩略dock1412所属桌面空间的壁纸。The determining component 1612 can be used to trigger the electronic device 100 to set the wallpaper corresponding to the selected wallpaper option as the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs.
取消1615可用于取消修缩略dock1412所属桌面空间的壁纸。Cancel 1615 can be used to cancel the wallpaper of the desktop space to which dock1412 belongs.
如图16B所示,壁纸选项1611处于选中状态。壁纸选项1611对应的壁纸为缩略dock1412所属桌面空间当前使用的壁纸。响应于作用在壁纸选项1612的用户操作,电子设备100可以将显示图16C所示的用户界面。其中,电子设备100可以将处于选中状态的壁纸选项从壁纸选项1611变化为壁纸选项1612。As shown in Figure 16B, the wallpaper option 1611 is selected. The wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1611 is the wallpaper currently used by the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs. In response to a user operation acting on the wallpaper option 1612, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface shown in FIG. 16C. Wherein, the electronic device 100 may change the selected wallpaper option from wallpaper option 1611 to wallpaper option 1612 .
响应于作用在确定组件1614的用户操作,电子设备100可以将壁纸选项1612对应的壁纸设置为搜索略dock1412所属桌面空间的壁纸。In response to the user operation acting on the determining component 1614, the electronic device 100 may set the wallpaper corresponding to the wallpaper option 1612 as the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the dock 1412 belongs.
当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示图16D所示的桌面1620。桌面1620可以包括桌面dock1621、page1622、页面指示符1624。其中,电子设备100当前处于dock1621所属的桌面空间。桌面page1622与dock1621属于同一个桌面空间。dock1621所属的桌面空间即为前述缩略dock1412所属的桌面空间。When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16D . The desktop 1620 may include a desktop dock 1621 , a page 1622 , and a page indicator 1624 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs. Desktop page1622 and dock1621 belong to the same desktop space. The desktop space to which dock1621 belongs is the desktop space to which the aforementioned abbreviated dock1412 belongs.
由图16D可以看出,dock1621所属桌面空间当前使用的壁纸为具有猫咪图案的图片。响应于切换dock1621所属桌面空间中桌面page的用户操作,例如作用在桌面page所在区域向左滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图16E所示的桌面1620。It can be seen from FIG. 16D that the wallpaper currently used in the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs is a picture with a cat pattern. In response to a user operation of switching the desktop page in the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs, for example, a user operation of sliding to the left on the area where the desktop page is located, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16E .
在图16E中,桌面1620中包含桌面page1623。对比图16D和图16E可知,电子设备100将桌面1620上显示的桌面page从桌面page1622切换为桌面page1623。桌面page1623仍为dock1621所属桌面空间的桌面page。在上述切换桌面page的过程中,由于桌面空间未变,电子设备100仍可在桌面1620上显示dock1621所属桌面空间的壁纸(即具有猫咪图案的图片)。In FIG. 16E , the desktop 1620 includes a desktop page 1623 . Comparing FIG. 16D and FIG. 16E , it can be known that the electronic device 100 switches the desktop page displayed on the desktop 1620 from the desktop page 1622 to the desktop page 1623 . Desktop page1623 is still the desktop page of the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs. During the above process of switching desktop pages, since the desktop space remains unchanged, the electronic device 100 can still display the wallpaper (ie, a picture with a cat pattern) of the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs on the desktop 1620 .
如图16F所示,响应于切换桌面空间的用户操作,例如作用在dock所在区域向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以显示图16G所示的桌面1620。As shown in FIG. 16F , in response to a user operation of switching the desktop space, for example, a user operation of sliding right on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1620 shown in FIG. 16G .
在图16F中,电子设备100处于dock1621所属的桌面空间。电子设备100可以在桌面1620上显示dock1621所属桌面空间的壁纸。在图16G中,电子设备100处于dock1625所属的桌面空间。电子设备100可以在桌面1620上显示1625所属桌面空间的壁纸(即无图案的纯色图片)。可以看出,当切换桌面空间,电子设备100可以将桌面上显示的壁纸也变化为切换之后的桌面空间的壁纸。In FIG. 16F , the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which dock1621 belongs. The electronic device 100 may display the wallpaper of the desktop space to which the dock 1621 belongs on the desktop 1620 . In FIG. 16G , the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space to which dock1625 belongs. The electronic device 100 may display 1625 on the desktop 1620 the wallpaper (that is, a solid color picture without a pattern) of the desktop space to which it belongs. It can be seen that when the desktop space is switched, the electronic device 100 may also change the wallpaper displayed on the desktop to the wallpaper of the switched desktop space.
用户可以通过上述AOD设置组件1427、主题设置组件1428分别设置缩略dock1412所属桌面空间的AOD状态、主题。AOD状态和主题的设置过程可以参考上述壁纸的设置过程。The user can respectively set the AOD state and theme of the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1412 belongs through the above-mentioned AOD setting component 1427 and theme setting component 1428 . For the setting process of AOD state and theme, please refer to the above setting process of wallpaper.
由上述图16A~图16G所示的实施例可知,用户可以手动设置一个桌面空间的名称、壁纸、AOD状态、主题等属性。在处于一个桌面空间时,电子设备100可以在桌面上呈现这一个桌面空间的属性。不同的桌面空间可以具有不同的属性。这样,不同的桌面空间可以给用户带来不同的视觉效果。用户可以更加清楚地感知到不同桌面空间之间的差异,以及切换桌面空间之后的效果。It can be known from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 16A to 16G that the user can manually set attributes such as the name, wallpaper, AOD status, and theme of a desktop space. When in a desktop space, the electronic device 100 may present the attributes of the desktop space on the desktop. Different desktop spaces can have different properties. In this way, different desktop spaces can bring different visual effects to users. Users can more clearly perceive the differences between different desktop spaces, as well as the effect after switching desktop spaces.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以删除桌面空间。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may delete the desktop space.
图17A和图17B示例性示出了电子设备100删除桌面空间的场景。FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B exemplarily show a scenario where the electronic device 100 deletes a desktop space.
如图17A所示,电子设备100可以显示用户界面1710。用户界面1710可以参考前述图14B所示用户界面1410的介绍。用户界面1710中可包含场景设置框1420、简化显示的缩略dock1711和完整显示的缩略dock1712。可以看出,电子设备100包含两个桌面空间。电子设备100当前处于缩略dock1712所属的桌面空间。场景设置框1420中包含的组件可用于对缩略dock1712所属的桌面空间进行设置。As shown in FIG. 17A , the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 1710 . For the user interface 1710, reference may be made to the introduction of the aforementioned user interface 1410 shown in FIG. 14B. The user interface 1710 may include a scene setting frame 1420 , a simplified display thumbnail dock 1711 and a fully displayed thumbnail dock 1712 . It can be seen that the electronic device 100 includes two desktop spaces. The electronic device 100 is currently in the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs. The components contained in the scene setting box 1420 can be used to set the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs.
场景设置框1420中可包含删除组件1430。响应于作用在删除组件1430的用户操作,电子设备100可以删除缩略dock1712所属的桌面空间。A delete component 1430 may be included in the scene setup box 1420 . In response to a user operation acting on the delete component 1430, the electronic device 100 may delete the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs.
当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示图17B所示的桌面1720。桌面1720中可包含dock1721。电子设备100仅包含一个桌面空间,dock1721所属的桌面空间。该dock1721所属的桌面空间即为上述缩略dock1711所属的桌面空间。When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the desktop 1720 shown in FIG. 17B . The desktop 1720 may include a dock 1721 . The electronic device 100 only includes one desktop space, which is the desktop space to which dock1721 belongs. The desktop space to which the dock1721 belongs is the desktop space to which the above-mentioned abbreviated dock1711 belongs.
对比图17A和图17B可知,电子设备100将缩略dock1712所属的桌面空间删除。Comparing FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B , it can be seen that the electronic device 100 deletes the desktop space to which the thumbnail dock 1712 belongs.
可以理解的,一个桌面空间是对电子设备100中部分桌面组件的组合。用户可以通过创建不同桌面空间的方式对电子设备100的桌面组件按照场景进行划分。当电子设备100删除一个桌面空间,电子设备100删除的是一种桌面组件的组合方式,而并未将这一个桌面空间包含的桌面组件从电子设备100中删除。用户仍然可以从全量桌面空间中找到被删除桌面空间包含的桌面组件。It can be understood that a desktop space is a combination of some desktop components in the electronic device 100 . The user may divide the desktop components of the electronic device 100 according to scenarios by creating different desktop spaces. When the electronic device 100 deletes a desktop space, what the electronic device 100 deletes is a combination of desktop components, but does not delete the desktop components contained in this desktop space from the electronic device 100 . Users can still find the desktop components included in the deleted desktop space from the full desktop space.
由上述实施例可知,用户创建桌面空间后,还可以将桌面空间删除。上述删除桌面空间的操作也比较简便。It can be known from the foregoing embodiments that after the user creates a desktop space, the desktop space may also be deleted. The above-mentioned operation of deleting the desktop space is also relatively simple.
在一些实施例中,全量桌面空间可以是,在为经用户手动创建桌面空间之前,电子设备100所处的桌面空间。全量桌面空间中可用于查看电子设备100中所有的桌面组件。In some embodiments, the full desktop space may be the desktop space where the electronic device 100 is located before the desktop space is manually created by the user. The full amount of desktop space can be used to view all desktop components in the electronic device 100 .
在一些实施例中,全量桌面空间不可被删除。全量桌面空间中的桌面组件被移除,可以相当于从电子设备100中被删除(如APP被卸载)。在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备100可以将全量桌面空间隐藏。响应于显示全量桌面空间的用户操作,电子设备100可以将全量桌面空间显示在桌面上。In some embodiments, the full amount of desktop space cannot be deleted. The desktop components in the entire desktop space are removed, which may be equivalent to being deleted from the electronic device 100 (for example, the APP is uninstalled). In a possible implementation manner, the electronic device 100 may hide the entire desktop space. In response to the user operation of displaying the full desktop space, the electronic device 100 may display the full desktop space on the desktop.
在全量桌面空间处于隐藏状态的情况下,若电子设备100将所有用户手动创建的桌面空间均删除,电子设备100可以将全量桌面空间从隐藏状态变为显示状态,在桌面显示全量桌面空间的dock和桌面page。When the full amount of desktop space is hidden, if the electronic device 100 deletes all the desktop spaces manually created by the user, the electronic device 100 can change the full amount of desktop space from the hidden state to the displayed state, and display the dock of the full amount of desktop space on the desktop. and desktop page.
响应于作用在任意一个桌面空间中将一个桌面组件从电子设备100中删除的用户操作,电子设备100可以将这一个桌面组件从电子设备100中删除。其中,电子设备100可以将这一个桌面组件从所有桌面空间中移除。In response to a user operation acting on any desktop space to delete a desktop component from the electronic device 100 , the electronic device 100 may delete the one desktop component from the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the electronic device 100 may remove this one desktop component from all desktop spaces.
在一些实施例中,全量桌面空间可包含dock。响应于用于切换桌面空间的用户操作,例如作用在dock所在区域向左滑动或向右滑动的用户操作,电子设备100可以在全量桌面空间,以及用户手动创建的桌面空间之间切换。In some embodiments, the full amount of desktop space may include a dock. In response to a user operation for switching desktop spaces, such as sliding left or right on the area where the dock is located, the electronic device 100 can switch between the full desktop space and the desktop space manually created by the user.
在一些实施例中,在电子设备100新安装一个桌面组件的情况下(例如从应用商城APP中下载一个APP),电子设备100可以将这一个桌面组件放置在全量桌面空间的桌面page中。其它用户手动创建的桌面空间可不包含该新安装的桌面组件。当进入桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以显示全量桌面空间的缩略桌面page。电子设备100在桌面编辑状态下处于用户手动创建的桌面空间A中的情况下,该新安装的桌面组件在缩略桌面page上的显示状态可以为移除的显示状态。响应于作用在该新安装的桌面组件的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备100可以将该新安装的桌面组件的显示状态变化为未移除的显示状态。即电子设备100可以将该新安装的桌面组件添加至桌面空间A中。当退出桌面编辑状态,电子设备100可以在桌面空间A的桌面page上显示该新安装的桌面组件。In some embodiments, when a desktop component is newly installed on the electronic device 100 (for example, an APP is downloaded from an application store APP), the electronic device 100 may place this desktop component on a desktop page of the full desktop space. The desktop space manually created by other users may not contain the newly installed desktop component. When entering the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display a thumbnail desktop page of the full desktop space. When the electronic device 100 is in the desktop space A manually created by the user in the desktop editing state, the display state of the newly installed desktop component on the thumbnail desktop page may be a removed display state. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the newly installed desktop component, the electronic device 100 may change the display state of the newly installed desktop component to an unremoved display state. That is, the electronic device 100 can add the newly installed desktop component to the desktop space A. When exiting the desktop editing state, the electronic device 100 may display the newly installed desktop component on the desktop page of the desktop space A.
可以理解的,本申请中的用户界面、APP图标的名称仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成限定。It can be understood that the names of the user interfaces and APP icons in this application are only illustrative and shall not limit this application.
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。As mentioned above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, and are not intended to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: it can still understand the foregoing The technical solutions described in each embodiment are modified, or some of the technical features are replaced equivalently; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions depart from the scope of the technical solutions of the various embodiments of the application.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种桌面管理方法,应用于电子设备,所述电子设备包括用于显示桌面组件的第一桌面page、第一dock和第二dock,所述第一dock包含X个桌面组件,所述第二dock包含M个桌面组件,所述X和所述M均为正整数,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A desktop management method, applied to an electronic device, the electronic device includes a first desktop page for displaying desktop components, a first dock and a second dock, the first dock contains X desktop components, and the second The dock includes M desktop components, and the X and the M are both positive integers, wherein the method includes:
    所述电子设备在屏幕上显示第一桌面page和第一dock,所述第一dock中显示有X个桌面组件;The electronic device displays a first desktop page and a first dock on the screen, and X desktop components are displayed in the first dock;
    所述电子设备接收用户对所述第一dock的第一操作,所述第一操作用于切换所述屏幕上显示的dock;The electronic device receives a user's first operation on the first dock, and the first operation is used to switch the dock displayed on the screen;
    响应于所述第一操作,所述电子设备在所述屏幕上显示所述第二dock,所述第二dock中显示有M个桌面组件。In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays the second dock on the screen, and the second dock displays M desktop components.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    响应于所述第一操作,所述电子设备在屏幕上显示用于指示第一dock的标识。In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays on the screen an identifier for indicating the first dock.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    响应于所述第一操作,继续显示所述第一dock,所述第一dock中显示有Y个桌面组件,其中所述Y小于等于所述X。In response to the first operation, continue to display the first dock, where Y desktop components are displayed in the first dock, where Y is less than or equal to X.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:
    响应于所述第一操作,所述电子设备在所述屏幕上取消显示所述第一dock。In response to the first operation, the electronic device cancels displaying the first dock on the screen.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备进入桌面编辑状态,并在所述桌面编辑状态下显示所述第二dock,所述第二dock包含第一区域和第二区域,所述第一区域用于显示已添加至所述第二dock的所述M个桌面组件,所述第二区域用于显示所述电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。The electronic device enters the desktop editing state, and displays the second dock in the desktop editing state, the second dock includes a first area and a second area, and the first area is used to display the The M desktop components of the second dock, the second area is used to display one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备将第一时间段内被使用过的桌面组件按照使用情况划分为多个桌面组件包,一个桌面组件包包含一个或多个桌面组件;所述使用情况包括以下一项或多项:使用时间、使用地点;The electronic device divides the desktop components used within the first period of time into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include one or more of the following : Time of use, place of use;
    所述电子设备根据所述电子设备包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件,确定所述多个桌面组件包的重复程度,所述一个桌面组件包包含的与所述电子设备包含的dock中已添加的桌面组件相同的桌面组件数量越多,所述一个桌面组件包的重复程度越高;The electronic device determines the degree of duplication of the plurality of desktop component packages according to the added desktop components in the dock contained in the electronic device, and the desktop component package contained in the one desktop component package is the same as that added in the dock contained in the electronic device. The more desktop components with the same number of desktop components, the higher the degree of duplication of the one desktop component package;
    所述电子设备根据桌面组件的使用时长,确定所述多个桌面组件包的使用率,所述一个桌面组件包包含的桌面组件的使用时长越长,所述一个桌面组件包的使用率越高;The electronic device determines the usage rate of the plurality of desktop component packages according to the usage time of the desktop components, the longer the usage time of the desktop components contained in the one desktop component package, the higher the usage rate of the one desktop component package ;
    所述电子设备将所述多个桌面组件包中重复程度低于第一重复程度阈值,且使用率最高的第一桌面组件包确定为所述电子设备推荐的一个或多个桌面组件。The electronic device determines, among the plurality of desktop component packages, the first desktop component package whose repetition degree is lower than a first repetition degree threshold and has the highest usage rate as one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备推荐的所述一个或多个桌面 组件为所述第一桌面page上使用时长最长,或者使用次数最多的一个或多个桌面组件。The method according to claim 5, wherein the one or more desktop components recommended by the electronic device are the one or more desktops that have been used for the longest time or used the most times on the first desktop page components.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收到第二操作,所述第二操作用于切换所述屏幕上显示的桌面page;The electronic device receives a second operation, and the second operation is used to switch the desktop page displayed on the screen;
    响应于所述第二操作,所述电子设备将所述屏幕上显示的第一桌面page切换为第二桌面page;In response to the second operation, the electronic device switches the first desktop page displayed on the screen to a second desktop page;
    所述电子设备将所述第二区域中显示的桌面组件更新为所述第二桌面page上使用时长最长,或者使用次数最多的一个或多个桌面组件。The electronic device updates the desktop components displayed in the second area to one or more desktop components that have been used the longest or are used the most times on the second desktop page.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, further comprising:
    所述电子设备接收到第三操作,所述第三操作用于在所述第二dock添加第一桌面组件,所述第一桌面组件是所述屏幕显示的桌面page上的一个桌面组件;The electronic device receives a third operation, the third operation is used to add a first desktop component on the second dock, the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen;
    响应于所述第三操作,所述电子设备在所述第二dock中显示所述M个桌面组件和所述第一桌面组件。In response to the third operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the second dock.
  10. 根据权利要求5-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收到第四操作,所述第四操作用于在所述第一区域添加第一桌面组件,所述第一桌面组件是所述第二区域中显示的桌面组件;The electronic device receives a fourth operation, the fourth operation is used to add a first desktop component in the first area, the first desktop component is a desktop component displayed in the second area;
    响应于所述第四操作,所述电子设备在所述第一区域中显示所述M个桌面组件和所述第一桌面组件,在所述第二区域取消显示所述第一桌面组件。In response to the fourth operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area, and cancels displaying the first desktop component in the second area.
  11. 根据权利要求5-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5-8, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述电子设备接收到第五操作,所述第五操作用于在所述第一区域添加第一桌面组件,所述第一桌面组件是所述屏幕显示的桌面page上的一个桌面组件,所述第一桌面组件未显示在所述第二区域中;The electronic device receives a fifth operation, the fifth operation is used to add a first desktop component in the first area, the first desktop component is a desktop component on the desktop page displayed on the screen, and the said first desktop component is not displayed in said second area;
    响应于所述第五操作,所述电子设备在所述第一区域中显示所述M个桌面组件和所述第一桌面组件。In response to the fifth operation, the electronic device displays the M desktop components and the first desktop component in the first area.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    响应于用户在所述第一区域添加所述第一桌面组件之后,所述电子设备根据所述第一桌面组件,更新在所述第二区域中显示的所述一个或多个桌面组件。In response to the user adding the first desktop component in the first area, the electronic device updates the one or more desktop components displayed in the second area according to the first desktop component.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备根据所述第一桌面组件,更新在所述第二区域中显示的所述一个或多个桌面组件,具体包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the electronic device updates the one or more desktop components displayed in the second area according to the first desktop component, specifically comprising:
    所述电子设备将第二时间段内被使用过的桌面组件按照使用情况划分为多个桌面组件包,一个桌面组件包包含一个或多个桌面组件;所述使用情况包括以下一项或多项:使用时间、使用地点;The electronic device divides the desktop components used within the second period of time into multiple desktop component packages according to usage conditions, and one desktop component package contains one or more desktop components; the usage conditions include one or more of the following : Time of use, place of use;
    所述电子设备在所述多个桌面组件包中确定出包含所述第一桌面组件的第二桌面组件包;The electronic device determines a second desktop component package including the first desktop component among the plurality of desktop component packages;
    其中,仅有一个桌面组件包包含所述第一桌面组件时,所述电子设备确定包含所述第一桌面组件的桌面组件包为所述第二桌面组件包;有多个桌面组件包包含所述第一桌面组件时, 所述电子设备确定所述第一桌面组件的使用时长最长的桌面组件包为所述第二桌面组件包;Wherein, when there is only one desktop component package containing the first desktop component, the electronic device determines that the desktop component package containing the first desktop component is the second desktop component package; there are multiple desktop component packages containing all When referring to the first desktop component, the electronic device determines that the desktop component package with the longest usage time of the first desktop component is the second desktop component package;
    所述电子设备在所述第二区域中显示所述第二桌面组件包中除所述第一桌面组件以外的一个或多个桌面组件。The electronic device displays in the second area one or more desktop components in the second desktop component package except the first desktop component.
  14. 根据权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-13, further comprising:
    响应于所述第一操作,所述电子设备继续显示所述第一桌面page。In response to the first operation, the electronic device continues to display the first desktop page.
  15. 根据权利要求1-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一dock所属的第一桌面空间包含第一组桌面page,所述第一组桌面page包含的一个或多个桌面page用于放置所述第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件,所述第一组桌面page包含所述第一桌面page,所述第二dock所属的第二桌面空间包含第二组桌面page,所述第二组桌面page包含的一个或多个桌面page用于放置所述第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件;The method according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein the first desktop space to which the first dock belongs includes a first group of desktop pages, and the first group of desktop pages includes one or more The desktop page is used to place the desktop components contained in the first desktop space, the first group of desktop pages contains the first desktop page, and the second desktop space to which the second dock belongs contains a second group of desktop pages, so The one or more desktop pages included in the second group of desktop pages are used to place the desktop components included in the second desktop space;
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    响应于所述第一操作,所述电子设备将所述屏幕上显示的所述第一桌面page切换为第三桌面page,所述第三桌面page是所述第二组桌面page中的一个桌面page。In response to the first operation, the electronic device switches the first desktop page displayed on the screen to a third desktop page, and the third desktop page is a desktop in the second group of desktop pages page.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15, further comprising:
    在所述屏幕上显示有所述第二dock的情况下,所述电子设备接收到第六操作;In the case where the second dock is displayed on the screen, the electronic device receives a sixth operation;
    响应于所述第六操作,所述电子设备进入桌面编辑状态,显示所述第二dock和Q个桌面组件,其中,所述第二桌面空间包含的桌面组件以第一显示样式显示,所述第二桌面空间不包含的桌面组件以第二显示样式显示,所述Q为正整数。In response to the sixth operation, the electronic device enters a desktop editing state, and displays the second dock and Q desktop components, wherein the desktop components included in the second desktop space are displayed in a first display style, and the The desktop components not included in the second desktop space are displayed in the second display style, and the Q is a positive integer.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, further comprising:
    在所述桌面编辑状态下显示所述第二dock时,所述电子设备接收到第七操作;When the second dock is displayed in the desktop editing state, the electronic device receives a seventh operation;
    响应于所述第七操作,所述电子设备在所述桌面编辑状态下显示所述第一dock和P个桌面组件,其中所述第一桌面空间包含的桌面组件以所述第一显示样式显示,所述第一桌面空间不包含的桌面组件以所述第二显示样式显示,所述P为正整数。In response to the seventh operation, the electronic device displays the first dock and P desktop components in the desktop editing state, wherein the desktop components included in the first desktop space are displayed in the first display style , the desktop components not included in the first desktop space are displayed in the second display style, and the P is a positive integer.
  18. 根据权利要求15-17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 15-17, further comprising:
    在显示所述第二dock时,所述电子设备接收第二桌面组件的第一消息和第三桌面组件的第二消息;所述第二桌面空间包含所述第二桌面组件,不包含所述第三桌面组件;When displaying the second dock, the electronic device receives the first message of the second desktop component and the second message of the third desktop component; the second desktop space contains the second desktop component and does not contain the a third desktop component;
    所述电子设备显示所述第一消息,不显示所述第二消息。The electronic device displays the first message and does not display the second message.
  19. 根据权利要求15-18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 15-18, further comprising:
    所述电子设备接收到第八操作,所述第八操作用于删除所述第二桌面空间;The electronic device receives an eighth operation, and the eighth operation is used to delete the second desktop space;
    响应于所述第八操作,所述电子设备删除所述第二dock和所述第二组桌面page。In response to the eighth operation, the electronic device deletes the second dock and the second group of desktop pages.
  20. 根据权利要求1-19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-19, further comprising:
    所述电子设备接收第九操作,所述第九操作用于创建第三dock和所述第三dock所属的第三桌面空间;The electronic device receives a ninth operation, where the ninth operation is used to create a third dock and a third desktop space to which the third dock belongs;
    响应于所述第九操作,所述电子设备显示所述第三dock和W个桌面组件,所述第三dock 中显示有Y个桌面组件;In response to the ninth operation, the electronic device displays the third dock and W desktop components, and Y desktop components are displayed in the third dock;
    所述电子设备接收第十操作,响应于所述第十操作,所述电子设备以第三显示样式显示所述O个桌面组件中与所述Y个桌面组件相关的Z个桌面组件;所述W、所述Y、所述O和所述Z均为正整数。The electronic device receives a tenth operation, and in response to the tenth operation, the electronic device displays Z desktop components related to the Y desktop components among the O desktop components in a third display style; the W, said Y, said O and said Z are all positive integers.
  21. 根据权利要求20中所述的方法,其特征在于,所述与所述Y个桌面组件相关,具体包括:与所述Y个桌面组件中的一个或多个桌面组件的类别相同或相近。The method according to claim 20, wherein being related to the Y desktop components specifically comprises: being the same or similar to one or more desktop components in the Y desktop components.
  22. 根据权利要求1-21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-21, further comprising:
    所述电子设备在所述屏幕上显示第四dock,所述第四dock中显示有最近使用的桌面组件。The electronic device displays a fourth dock on the screen, and the fourth dock displays recently used desktop components.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述最近使用的桌面组件,具体包括:The method according to claim 22, wherein the recently used desktop components specifically include:
    在所述屏幕上显示有所述第一dock中已添加的所有桌面组件时,所述最近使用的桌面组件为所述第一dock所属第一桌面空间中开启时间最晚的L1个桌面组件,或者所述电子设备在第三时间段内开启的L2个桌面组件,所述L1和所述L2均为正整数;或者,When all desktop components added in the first dock are displayed on the screen, the recently used desktop components are the L1 desktop components with the latest opening time in the first desktop space to which the first dock belongs, Or the L2 desktop components opened by the electronic device within the third time period, the L1 and the L2 are both positive integers; or,
    在所述屏幕上显示有所述第二dock中已添加的所有桌面组件时,所述最近使用的桌面组件为所述第二桌面空间中开启时间最晚的L3个桌面组件,或者所述电子设备在第四时间段内开启的L4个桌面组件,所述L3和所述L4均为正整数。When all desktop components added in the second dock are displayed on the screen, the recently used desktop components are the L3 desktop components with the latest start time in the second desktop space, or the electronic For the L4 desktop components opened by the device within the fourth time period, both the L3 and the L4 are positive integers.
  24. 一种图形用户界面(GUI),所述图形用户界面存储在电子设备中,所述电子设备包括触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,所述一个或多个处理器用于执行存储在所述存储器中的一个或多个计算机程序,其特征在于,所述图形用户界面包括:A graphical user interface (GUI), the graphical user interface is stored in an electronic device, the electronic device includes a touch screen, memory, one or more processors, and the one or more processors are used to execute the One or more computer programs in memory, wherein the graphical user interface comprises:
    显示在所述触摸屏上的第一GUI,所述第一GUI包括第一桌面page和第一dock,所述第一dock中显示有X个桌面组件;The first GUI displayed on the touch screen, the first GUI includes a first desktop page and a first dock, and X desktop components are displayed in the first dock;
    响应于第一操作,在所述触摸屏上显示的第二GUI,所述第一操作用于切换所述触摸屏上显示的dock,所述第二GUI包括第二dock,所述第二dock中显示有M个桌面组件。In response to the first operation, a second GUI displayed on the touch screen, the first operation is used to switch the dock displayed on the touch screen, the second GUI includes a second dock, and the second GUI is displayed in the second dock There are M desktop components.
  25. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:触摸屏、存储器、一个或多个处理器,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述一个或多个处理器用于调用所述计算机程序,使得所述电子设备执行权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes: a touch screen, a memory, and one or more processors, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the one or more processors are used to call the computer program, making the electronic device execute the method according to any one of claims 1-23.
  26. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行,使得所述电子设备执行权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising instructions, wherein, when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-23.
  27. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包含计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行,使得所述电子设备执行权利要求1-23中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product contains computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method described in any one of claims 1-23.
PCT/CN2022/130644 2021-11-12 2022-11-08 Desktop management method, graphical user interface, and electronic device WO2023083184A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111344234.4 2021-11-12
CN202111344234.4A CN116126432A (en) 2021-11-12 2021-11-12 Desktop management method, graphical user interface and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023083184A1 true WO2023083184A1 (en) 2023-05-19

Family

ID=86301446

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/130644 WO2023083184A1 (en) 2021-11-12 2022-11-08 Desktop management method, graphical user interface, and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116126432A (en)
WO (1) WO2023083184A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090106704A1 (en) * 2007-10-18 2009-04-23 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Method, apparatus, and consumer product for creating shortcut to interface element
CN103970400A (en) * 2013-02-04 2014-08-06 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Dockbar processing method and device
CN104978113A (en) * 2015-07-28 2015-10-14 小米科技有限责任公司 Dockbar processing method and apparatus
CN106020648A (en) * 2016-05-26 2016-10-12 北京金山安全软件有限公司 Mobile terminal control method and device and mobile terminal
CN109144649A (en) * 2018-08-22 2019-01-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Display methods, device, terminal and the storage medium of icon

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090106704A1 (en) * 2007-10-18 2009-04-23 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Method, apparatus, and consumer product for creating shortcut to interface element
CN103970400A (en) * 2013-02-04 2014-08-06 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Dockbar processing method and device
CN104978113A (en) * 2015-07-28 2015-10-14 小米科技有限责任公司 Dockbar processing method and apparatus
CN106020648A (en) * 2016-05-26 2016-10-12 北京金山安全软件有限公司 Mobile terminal control method and device and mobile terminal
CN109144649A (en) * 2018-08-22 2019-01-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Display methods, device, terminal and the storage medium of icon

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116126432A (en) 2023-05-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN110489043B (en) Management method and related device for floating window
WO2021164313A1 (en) Interface layout method, apparatus and system
CN110597512B (en) Method for displaying user interface and electronic equipment
WO2021103981A1 (en) Split-screen display processing method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2021036571A1 (en) Desktop editing method and electronic device
WO2021000841A1 (en) Method for generating user profile photo, and electronic device
JP7217357B2 (en) Mini-program data binding method, apparatus, device and computer program
CN110119296B (en) Method for switching parent page and child page and related device
CN111263002B (en) Display method and electronic equipment
WO2022057852A1 (en) Method for interaction between multiple applications
CN111225108A (en) Communication terminal and card display method of negative screen interface
WO2020155875A1 (en) Display method for electronic device, graphic user interface and electronic device
KR20230124743A (en) Widget Display Method and Electronic Device
CN112068907A (en) Interface display method and electronic equipment
CN115480670A (en) Navigation bar display method, navigation bar display method and first electronic equipment
CN115525783B (en) Picture display method and electronic equipment
WO2022228043A1 (en) Display method, electronic device, storage medium and program product
WO2023083184A1 (en) Desktop management method, graphical user interface, and electronic device
WO2021196980A1 (en) Multi-screen interaction method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN115017522A (en) Permission recommendation method and electronic equipment
WO2023138305A9 (en) Card display method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2023160455A1 (en) Object deletion method and electronic device
WO2024067122A1 (en) Window display method and electronic device
WO2024027570A1 (en) Interface display method and related apparatus
WO2023280021A1 (en) Method for generating theme wallpaper, and electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22891978

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1